Full text of "Contributions to Canadian biology"

See other formats

nets wth Weta hiy Natrtty carn ll
reborn RP LA POP LPL A CIEL OS ioe ta
RT athe W fd a

pts rf mater? (nnd tig Soot ne oh ee rn ss

" . . ee aralnnred nar are Reco ad SMO meee Hone

Piarenin irs ecsraer HESS

ee ened -
ccatbetabiaindntelat

pie "aty hee OS
ete reese BA “re
ys a

a) ~ “
Sato

CONTRIBUTIONS * MOXy

TO : ro ie

CANADIAN BIOLOGY

BEING STUDIES FROM THE

BIOLOGICAL STATIONS OF CANADA

1921
Nos. £ and 2

THE BIOLOGICAL BOARD OF CANADA

Professor A. P. KnrcHt, Department of Naval Service, Chairman.
Professor E. E. Prince, Commissioner of Fisheries, Secretary.

Professor L. W. BatLey, University of New Brunswick, Fredericton, N.B.
Professor A. H. R. BULLER, University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, Man.
Very Rev. Canon V. A. Huarp, Laval University, Quebec, P.Q.

Professor J. PLAYFAIR McMourricu, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ont.
Dr. A. H. Mackay, Dalhousie University, Halifax, N.S.

Professor R. F. Ruttan, McGill University, Montreal, P.Q.

Professor W. T. MACCLEMENT, Queen’s University, Kingston, Ont.

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO PRESS
1921

CONTRIBUTIONS

CANADIAN BIOLOGY

BEING STUDIES FROM THE

BIOLOGICAL STATIONS OF CANADA

Ig2I
Nos. ft atid 2

ih“ BlOLOGICAE BOARD OF: CANADA

Professor A. P. KniGHT, Department of Naval Service, Chairman.
Professor E. E. PRINCE, Commissioner of Fisheries, Secretary.

Professor L. W. BAILey, University of New Brunswick, Fredericton, N.B.
Professor A. H. R. BULLER, University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, Man.
Very Rev. Canon V. A. Huarp, Laval University, Quebec, P.Q.

Professor J. PLAYFAIR McMurricu, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ont.
Dr. A. H. Mackay, Dalhousie University, Halifax, N.S.

Professor R. F. Ruttan, McGill University, Montreal, P.Q.

Professor W. T. MACCLEMENT, Queen’s University, Kingston, Ont.

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO PRESS
1921

CONTENTS

/ Pages
No. 1—Some Bacterial Organisms cecurring in the Clam (Mya arenaria)
which may produce “Blackening” in Tins, by Jennie L.

syinons, VieSes, MeGill University. >. .00 0.5... gots ee eee

No. 2—A Study of the Sea Mussel (Mytilus edulis, Linn), by Bessie
Ke BP: Mossop,eM-aA. - University of Voronton. fe. fcc5 05.4 15-48

a egta Se

iy ; 1 #
Fog poy
Ae

CONTRIBUTIONS

CANADIAN BIOLOGY

BIOLOGICAL STATIONS OF CANADA

1921
Nos. III to XII

‘THR BIOLOGICAL BOARD OF CANADA
®

__ Professor A. P. Knicut, Department of Naval Service, Chairman.
Professor E. E. PrincE, Commissioner of Fisheries, Secretary.
_ Professor L. W. BAILEY, University of New Brunswick, Fredericton, N.B.
_ Professor A. H. R. BULLER, University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, Man.
_. Very Rev. Canon V. A. Huarp, Laval Univetsity, Quebec, P.Q.
Professor J. PLayFAIR McMourricu, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ont.
—-—s«éDr, A. H. Mackay, Dalhousie University, Halifax, N.S.

ss Professor R. F. Ruttan, McGill University, Montreal, P.Q.
_.-——s«* Professor W. T. MacCLEmenT, Queen's University, Kingston, Ont.

: UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO PRESS
1922

SEI aes

CONTRIBUTIONS

CANADIAN BIOLOGY

BEING STUDIES FROM THE

BIOLOGICAL STATIONS OF CANADA

1O2k
Nos: ITE to: XT!

THE BIOLOGICAL BOARD OF CANADA

Professor A. P. KNriGHT, Department of Naval Service, Chairman.
Professor E. E. PRINCE, Commissioner of Fisheries, Secretary.

Professor L. W. BatLey, University of New Brunswick, Fredericton, N.B.
Professor A. H. R. BULLER, University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, Man.
Very Rev. Canon V. A. Huarp, Laval University, Quebec, P.Q.

Professor J. PLAYFATR McMourricu, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ont.
Dr. A. H. Mackay, Dalhousie University, Halifax, N.S.

Professor R. F. Ruttan, McGill University, Montreal, P.Q.

Professor W. T. MACCLEMENT, Queen’s University, Kingston, Ont.

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO PRESS
1922

No.

CONTENTS

Pages
3—The Fishes of the Bay of Fundy, by A. G. Huntsman, Biological
BOare Gi, Canada aie. 5. 2.05 be Ped ARC ans Ce ae Se Sores 49-72
4—A Study of the Ciscoes of Lake Erie, by Wilbert A. Clemens,
Wier Stes Ol MOrOUlO. Jen msec rss atdet < o, <dongs foot See 73-85
5—The Food of Ciscoes (Leucichthys) in Lake Erie, by Wilbert A.
Clemens and N. Kk. Bigelow, University of Toronto....87—101
6—The Pacific Hegring, by C. McLean Fraser, Biological Board of
PEAY INE Ae te 0 I PE eg i Os occa ne eR age pe oe 103-111
7—On the Development of the Angler (Lophius piscatorius L), by
C. J. Connolly, St. Francis Xavier’s College, Antigonish,
ASE YD mag eee Le ana ake gee Vin pete gt tata restecote. Seer aN 113-124
8—The Composition of Lobster Muscle, by Sadie N. Boyd, University
fie ORO DOT a, Saeed cas Fab. eRe oa rd he nee Res inet 125-131
. 9—Results of the Hudson Bay Expedition, 1920. I. The Foramini-
feta. Oseph A> Cushnidnie ....- 3 qe x. - Fee a ae: 133-147

. 10—Results of the Hudson Bay Expedition, 1920. II. The Gaster-

osteidae, by Philip Cox, University of New Brunswick .. 149-153

. 11—Diatoms from the Quill Lakes, Saskatchewan and from Airdrie,

Alberta, by; We Bailey, Fredericton, N.B:,.2..-7..-. 155-166

. 12—List of Publications based on Results obtained at the Canadian

Biological Stations, 1901-1921, compiled by A. G. Huntsman
AIS OVE. ASCE seis ae eee steer toe Se se 167-183

CONTRIBUTIONS

CANADIAN BIOLOGY

BEING STUDIES FROM THE

BIOLOGICAL STATIONS OF CANADA

1921
Nos. I to XII

THE BIOLOGICAL BOARD OF CANADA

Professor A. P. Kn1GHT, Department of Naval Service, Chairman.
Professor E. E. PRINCE, Commissioner of Fisheries, Secretary.

Professor L. W. BAILEY, University of New Brunswick, Fredericton, N.B.
Professor A. H. R. BULLER, University of Manitoba, Winnipeg, Man.
Very Rev. Canon V. A. Huarp, Laval University, Quebec, P.Q.

Professor J. PLayFAIR McMuraricu, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ont.
Dr. A. H. Mackay, Dalhousie University, Halifax, N.S.

Professor R. F. Ruttan, McGill University, Montreal, P.Q.

Professor W. T. MACCLEMENT, Queen’s University, Kingston, Ont.

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO PRESS
1922

No.

CONTENTS

1—Some Bacterial Organisms occurring in the Clam (Mya Are-
naria) which may produce “‘Blackening’’ in Tins, by
jennie Ic. Symonds, McGill University® o>. i... 6.0.0.3

2—A Study of the Sea Mussel (Mytilus Edulis Linn), by Bessie
hse Mossop; University. ot Vorontos.7.. 5. he hose

3—The Fishes of the Bay of Fundy, by A. G. Huntsman, Biologi-
CA MEGALGROL GO AMAG At crn «Mel Netter cctaus teen Ses bare nel

4—A Study of the Ciscoes of Lake Erie, by Wilbert A. Clemens,

MiimversriyeOi POrontOs: 5c oak tod ahe kere Rene ks oA CLAD Oe
5—The Food of Ciscoes (Leucichthys) in Lake Erie, by Wilbert A.
Clemens and N. K. Bigelow, University of Toronto. ....
6—The Pacific Herring, by C. McLean Fraser, Biological Board
Gil” (CERWe (6 ewig RRR Sh a Coa SO REO ae She ce a Pema i Ae a
7— On the Development of the Angler (Lophius piscatorius L.), by
C. J. Connolly, St. Francis. Xavier’s College, Antigonish,
PRS EE ese BAe RRS te Me th atl ne ereen S Sater

8—-The Composition of Lobster Muscle, by Sadie N. Boyd,
Rinniwersitycol GOnomtOu ice ita Abs a kcecee cae tnin Sao ns

9—Results of the Hudson Bay Expedition, 1920. I. The Fora-
fataitenrdas by posepn AMC ushina ye Sas) aah. yy eke

. 10—-Results of the Hudson Bay Expedition, 1920. II. The Gaste-

rosteidae, by Philip Cox, University of New Brunswick. .

. 11—Diatoms from the Quill Lakes, Saskatchewan and from Airdrie,

alberta, bye LW. Batley, Kredericton, NeBit. 3c. ew

. 12—List of publications based on Results obtained at the Canadian

Biological Stations, 1901-1921, compiled by A. G. Hunts-
Mane Gee .rAsSeRe aero bot 5 ie ae tepayes e «

105-111

113-124

125-131

133-147

149-155

155-166

167-183

SOME BACTERIAL ORGANISMS OCCURRING IN THE CLAM (Mya
arenaria) WHICH MAY PRODUCE “ BLACKENING” IN TINS

JESSIE L. SYMONS, M.Sc.
McGill University, Montreal

Some Bacterial Organisms occurring in the Clam (Mya
Arenaria) which may produce ‘“Blackening” in Tins.

By JENNIE L. Symons, M.Sc.,
(McGill University, Montreal).

The problem of blackening is a serious one in the canning industry.
Blackening is a common form of deterioration, in advanced stages of which the
contents of the tin becomes inky black and disintegrated. There is an intense
disagreeable odour in which a metallic quality is combined with the odour of
putrefaction. Often there is a large amount of gas, causing the cans to be
swelled as well as blackened.

The cause of blackening is usually accepted as bacterial action. It has long
been studied from this point of view. In 1897, a paper on “ Discolouration in
Canned Lobsters’? was published by Macphail and Bruére.! The authors had
isolated from spoiled cans four micro-organisms which, upon inoculation into
sterile cans, produced the blackened condition. Prescott and Underwood’, in
the same year, isolated from swelled tins of clams and lobsters nine species of
bacteria, which led to similar conditions if introduced into normal cans. These
organisms were found to be very resistant to heat. The authors of both papers
pointed out the necessity of accurately determined minimal periods of processing.
This determination involves a study of the bacteria concerned. It is also import-
ant to know the source of the micro-organisms which appear in the cans in order
to ascertain the chances of preventing infection.

The investigation described in this paper was undertaken at the suggestion
of Dr. A. G. Huntsman, Curator of the Atlantic Biological Station at St. Andrews,
N.B. Its aim has been a bacteriological examination of freshly dug clams
(Mya arenaria), such as are taken to the factories for canning, with a view to
the isolation and description of any blackening organisms normally present in
such clams.

PROCEDURE.
Isolations.

The clams from which isolations were made were of medium size. They
were dug at low tide on the beach near the Biological Station and brought in at
once. The exteriors of the shells were thoroughly washed in a stream of running
tap water and dried in the air. The edges were then seared in a flame and the
muscles holding the shell quickly severed with a knife.* One half of the shell
was then removed, the clam lying in:the other half. The mantle was slit and
turned back and four small pieces cut* from the body of the clam were at once
transferred with forceps* to separate tubes of broth. Cuttings were thus made

* All knives, scissors and forceps used for these purposes were kept standing in a jar of
alcohol and sterilized by flaming immediately before use.

at different times from all parts of the clam within the mant'e. In several cases
a culture was made from a little of the shell liquor withdrawn through the pedal
orifice by means of a sterile pipette. No attempt was made to associate an
ioslated organism with the part of the clam in which it was found. —

To simulate factory conditions, a few clams were washed as described above
and allowed to stand at room temperature (about 20°C) for 18 hours before
further steps were taken. Others were treated similarly and left 48 hours at
room temperature before being opened. In both cases the clams were found
to be still alive.

Clam peptone broth and beef peptone broth were both used for first cultures
in every case. Good growth was obtained in both media. In many instances,
it appeared earlier in the clam broth and was more luxuriant. After growth
for twenty-four hours at room temperature, plate cultures were made from each
tube, both.in clam peptone agar and beef peptone gelatin. These plates were
examined as soon as growth appeared, usually after from 14 to 18 hours. Plating
was done in the late afternoon, the plates as a rule showing growth the next
morning. Most of the organisms liquified gelatin rapidly, hence it was necessary
to deal with gelatin plates first. Colonies were carefully examined and from
each one chosen as representative of a new type, an agar stab, an agar slant and
a smear for microscopic examination were made. Seventy-six cultures were
thus obtained during four weeks beginning July 24, 1920. Agar stab cultures
of each were kept until the opening of the autumn session at McGill University,
when laboratory facilities permitted further investigation.

MEDIA USED.
1. ISOLATION MEDIA.

Clam peptone broth and Clam peptone agar. -

These were made according to directions given by Sadler’ in his paper on
“The Bacteriology of Swelled Canned Sardines.”’
Beef peptone broth.

Distilled water.

Liebig’s meat extract, 0.5 per cent.

Difco peptone, 1.0 per cent.

Sodium chloride, 0.5 per cent. ;
Beef peptone gelatin.

Beef peptone broth with 12 per cent. of Difco gelatin.

2. MEDIA FOR DETERMINING THE PRODUCTION OF HYDROGEN SULPHIDE.

(a) Lead Carbonate gelatin (Beijerinck).

Beef peptone gelatin+lead carbonate 0.1 per cent.
(b) Peptone-lead acetate solution (Pake).

This medium was prepared according to the following directions: Emulsify
30 g. peptone with 200 cc. tap water at 60°C. Wash into a litre flask with 80 cc.
tap water. Add 5 g. sodium chloride and 3 g. sodium phosphate. Heat at
100° for half an hour. Filter through paper. Tube. To each tube of 10 cc. add

0.1 cc. of 1 per cent. solution of lead acetate. This produces a yellow precipitate
which is blackened if H.S is formed. The solutions should be neutral. Difco
peptone was used.
(c) Clam media.

1 part clam meat+2 parts sea water.

3. MEDIA FOR DIFFERENTIATION.

Beef peptone agar.

Beef peptone broth+1.5 per cent. of Japanese agar.
Beef peptone gelatin.

Prepared as already described.
Beef peptone Broth. Two kinds were used.

(1) As described above.

(2) Difco nutrient broth 0.8 per cent.

Sodium chloride 0.8 per cent.
Distilled water.

Peptone water (Dunham’s).

Peptone I per cent.

Sodium chloride 0.5 per cent.

Distilled water.
Nitrate Broth.

Dunham’s peptone water+0.5 per cent. K NOs.
Potato.

Wedges were soaked 30 minutes in 1 per cent. sodium carbonate, rinsed
thoroughly in distilled water and sterilized.
Litmus Milk.

Klim adjusted to +1 reaction and sterile litmus solution added.
Fermentation Media.

Dunham’s peptone water was used as a foundation.
Dextrose Medium.

Peptone water +2 per cent. dextrose.
Lactose Medium.

Peptone water +2 per cent. lactose.
Saccharose Medium.

Peptone water +2 per cenit: saccharose.
Glycerin Medium.

Peptone water +6 per cent. glycerin.

To each of these 2 per cent. Andrade indicator was added.

Mannit protein-free broth. Mannit protein-free agar.
Mannit 15.0 grams 1.5 per cent. washed
K, HPO, OPO agar added to mannit
Meg SO; Os 2 rare solution prepared as
Na Cl ORs described.
C4 S04 Ook a

Car C0; 50 4,
10% Fe C1 solution 1.0 drop.
Distilled water, 1,000 cc

Do not filter.
Sterilize at 120° (autoclave) for 10 minutes.
Reaction of Media.
Gelatin, Agar, Broth and Milk were adjusted to +1 reaction.
Sugars and glycerin broth were neutralized.
Peptone water and Nitrate broth were left unadjusted (.4 per cent. acid
to phenol phthalein).
Sterilization of Media.
All media except milk and gelatin were sterilized in the autoclave for 15
minutes under 15 pounds pressure.
Gelatin and milk were sterilized by the discontinuous method in the Arnold
Steam Sterilizer.

SEPARATION OF BLACKENING ORGANISMS.

The first phase of the problem was the search for blackening organisms.
Three methods were employed:

Method 1.

Streak cultures were made upon plates of lead carbonate gelatin. The
result was unsatisfactory. Complete liquefaction followed before definite con-
clusions could be drawn with regard to blackening. Cultures i.j.r.s.t.u. produced
slight darkening of the lead carbonate after two days, then rapidly liquefied the
plates.

Method 2.

Cultures were transferred from 24 hour broth cultures to the strong peptone
solution, recommended by Pake, as a test for the production of Hydrogen
sulphide.

Filteen organisms, viz.; 1, 3,211, 12; 1o,\17;528;.29, dil, brew inni smc turned
the precipitate black and were thus differentiated as H2S formers. Some others
darkened the precipitate to brown only. All cultures were kept under observa-
tion for more than four weeks.

The fifteen organisms were transferred from broth cultures to other media,
astudy beingmade of preparations in Dextrose broth, Gelatin stick, Litmus milk
and potato. :

Method 3.

Myers’ called attention to the fact that some organisms produce hydrogen
sulphide on one brand of peptone and not on another. This suggested the
advisability of testing all organisms in clam meat itself. Tubes were prepared
according to Dr. Harrison’s suggestion, using clam meat and sea water in the
proportions of one to two. They were prepared in triplicate—about seven
hundred in all—arranged in the following series:

A. Clam meat+sea water+iron.

B. Clam meat+sea water+tin.

C. Clam meat+sea water+iron-+tin.

Chemically pure iron wire was used in small pieces (1/8 in. to a tube) and
chemically pure flaked tin. Sterilization was done in the autoclave 15 minutes
at 15 pounds pressure.

Dr. Huntsman kindly arranged that fresh clams and sea water for this

experiment be sent from St. Andrews, N.B. They arrived in perfect condition
and were opened and prepared at once.

and plated after 24 hours to determine purity.

Transfers were made from all original stab cultures to beer peptone broth

This having been established,
tubes of series A.B.C. were seeded in triplicate from broth cultures of all organ-
Three tubes of each series were kept uninoculated as controls.

isms.
No:] . Fe Fe Fe Sn Sn Sn Fe -Sn Fe Sn Fe Sn
re) Gir) = re | T= (+) = =
Sry tcte) te He a = = (=) GE) +
Ge) tert: (+) Gir) a = 7 () “i ate
AS sia) eal) C42) (aia) =e 5 qa =; (+) (+) | (4A)
EROS) |r) CF) = =f + (+) (=F) (-B)
1 er Cores a) (a) == = a= CAG) aise ae)
NEE NGI) oot a = ~ ry, ae 25 sig
16) + + + — = = = =
LES Ge PS Gi) a) + a Tr (+) (4) a)
20SEC) h(t) (i) 35 a at (=F) CH) (ra)
26.) + Co) CE} + =e) a (+) (4p) (+e)
ag] (+)|(+)| (4) | +] # ] +t (+) H) | 4)
aL} CH) | + - + | - - - - ~
ge} CA) e | (+) os ig) =i me CE) GF) (+r)
Reddish Reddish
SOW): | (tz) ir) 17 =e ae ee i WES) (+) (ap?
far) se) (cb) Cr) a r =e =i; ae a
Ga) le CT) Ga vn ee 2: Uae) (+) (ea)
15h) a a ro (+) oT a + Cr (+) =
AN oo al fe Ou) (+) oe == = CH (+) (Ca)
ips tC) (+) +t ae + (+) ‘Ce, (+)
Seite alc (ie) Gy) + as Goce (+) (CP) (+)
SAG) el (=e) (+) (=) 4) CE) = (-F) Gi) (se)
15.110 Coir) ra Nek Get) Sr et (+) Car) D-P)tae) Gt)
DON CS) eG) (+) i = + (+) (Gr) (+)
AE cS aN Ge dl PA) ee) a a = at a as
LBs (ce); ) Gt) + a = (sr) =aGe) (+)
SUN CE Ck) (+) =e te =P (+) (Ce) =
Fe Alt) CG) Gra) Cr) Zs (+) an (a)
Reddish

*Extra tubes.

(+) indicates very deep blackening of all clam meat.
+ indicates deep blackening of part of clam meat.

+ indicates dark greenish-brown colour—more characteristic of tin sulphide.
— indicates no blackening.

The seeded clam tubes were left at room temperature until growth. was

evident—24 to 48 hours—then kept in an unheated room from four to six weeks.

result is seen in the accompanying table.

Blackening developed rapidly in many nes slowly in others.

The final

Twenty-eight of the seventy-six original cultures were thus seen to be

capable of producing blackening when provided with the elements to be found

8 2
inacan. Among these, with the exception of No. 29, are the organisms separated
by Methods 1 and 2, though No. 16 showed such a feeble result in the clam

medium that it has been disregarded. No. 13, which showed a positive result
by the third method only, was also rejected.

CLASSIFICATION

Nothing had yet been done with a view to eliminating repetition of cultures,
except the preliminary observation in ‘our media of the fifteen HS formers
found by Method 2. Of these all had liquefied gelatin rapidly and fermented
dextrose w.thout the product’on of gas. Variation had been noted in the growth
upon potato and litmus milk.

With the aim of separating and determining different forms it was decided
to grow subcultures of all organisms simultaneously. Transfers were, therefore,
made from the most recent stab cultures of all blackening organisms to peptone
water for invigoration. After 24 hours they were thence transferred in duplicate
to Gelatin stick, sugars, potato, litmus milk, nutrient broth, agar slants and
nitrate broth. Fresh peptone water cultures were made daily until inoculations
were completed. Sl'des for m'croscopic examination were also prepared. Growth
characteristics were noted and comparisons made from day to day, all cultures
being kept for six weeks. Plate cultures on agar, gelatin, and starch agar were
also prepared and observed.

The most recent descriptive chart of the Society of American Bacteriologists
was used as a guide in choosing media and recording results.

For the indol test cultures were grown in Dunham’s peptone water for five
days and the Nitroso-indol-nitrate test made at the end of this period.

For nitrate reduction, sulphanilic acid and naphthylamine hydrochloride
were added in equal quantit’es (3 drops of each) to nitrate-broth cultures 48
hours old.

Controls were used in both these cases.

Reduction was unmistakable in all cultures so that it was not necessary to
repeat the tests after longer periods of growth.

Six forms were finally separated, repeated tests being made in many cases.
Potato cultures, for instance, were tried both at room temperature and at
Side.

CHARACTERISTICS COMMON TO ALL THE ISOLATED ORGANISMS.

Preparations stained for flagella revealed the fact that all belonged to the
genus Pseudomonas, one variety possessing a tuft of polar flagella, the others
having a single flagellum attached to one pole. Endospores were not observed
in any of the species. All liquefied gelatin rapidly and digested casein, though
in one instance the latter process was very slow. All formed hydrogen sulphide
and reduced nitrates to nitrites. All fermented dextrose, saccharose and glycerin.
At first they gave strong acid reaction, which began to change about the fourth
day, the contents of the tube gradually becoming alkaline throughout. In one
case only, lactose was fermented, though all cultures grew well and produced
turbidity in lactose broth. The common characteristics here noted will not be

mentioned in the detailed descriptions below, which rather aim to point out
distinguishing traits.

ORGANISMS IDENTIFIED.
1. Pseudomonas fluorescens (Fliigge) Migula.

The organism was easily stained and appeared as a rod of medium size
with rounded ends, which usually occurred in pairs. Six flagella were observed
in the polar bundle. On gelatin plates the colonies appeared after two days as
round centres of liquefaction. A white mass of bacteria occupied the centre of
the depression which was cup-shaped. Deep colonies were white with shadowy
margins which, as the microscope revealed, were made up of radiating hairs.

In the gelatin stab cultures, the line of inoculation showed a trace of lique-
faction after 24 hours. In 36 hours its margin was clouded by numerous dis-
crete, white, punctate colonies. At the same time a crateriform liquefaction
had developed on the surface, with a white film lining the depression. The
liquefaction soon became infundibuliform and the medium acquired a distinct
fluorescence.

On potato a dirty-greyish growth appeared after 24 hours. Though dull
at first it became moist, spreading and shining, deepening in colour to fawn.
The potato was at the same time darkened to brown.

Broth was rendered turbid with a strong yellow-green fluorescence and a
membranous shining pellicle.

Diastatic action on starch was positive.

On agar slants the growth was of a yellowish-grey colour, moist, shining and
spreading, the subtratum becoming distinctly fluorescent. :

In litmus milk the reaction was distinctly alkaline after 24 hours, the blue
colour deepening for a week, then remaining constant; even at the end of 6 weeks
no digestion was observable. A white shining pellicle was produced on all
liquid media.

2. Pseudomonas Jaegeri (Migula).

This organism was somewhat variable in form. As a rule, it was a short
thick rod with rounded ends. Flagella were difficult to count; in many cases they
were turned back and formed loops along the sides of the organism. In one
instance two were plainly observed, attached at one pole.

On gelatin plates, round, creamy-white, zoned colonies developed within
two days. They produced a crateriform liquefaction with a dense white mass
in the centre. Outside this lay white turbid zones, concentrically arranged and
becoming gradually thinner toward the margin. Under the microscope the
small dew-drop-like colonies appeared round, finely granular and light brown.
The larger colonies had a dense, dark brown central nucleus surrounded by a
coarsely-granular zone, outside of which was a finely-granular area with a ciliated
margin.

Gelatin stab cultures rapidly became saccate and uniformly turbid. In
96 hours liquefaction was complete. On the surface of the liquefied gelatin a

‘light flocculent pellicle was formed and a heavy, creamy sediment lay in the
bottom of the test tube.

Growth on agar plates was characteristic of the old genus, Proteus. The

moist, cream-coloured colonies developed a variety of projections, some confluent
and arborescent, others circular with irregular, curved, radiating arms. A
yellow-green fluorescence was produced in the medium. .

On starch plates there was diastatic action and marked green fluorescence
in the medium.

On potato a thick, cream-coloured, raised, luxuriant growth developed
rapidly and soon covered the entire surface of the medium.

Milk was coagulated quickly with production of acid. Digestion followed,
a dull, sage-green layer appearing at the surface and leaving a green ring on the
tube. A strong pungent and cabbage-like odour was produced on this as on
other media.

Litmus milk gave parallel results.

This organism formed acid and gas in dextrose, saccharose and’ glycerin.
The reaction changed after one week and gas formation ceased, except in glycerin.
After five weeks, glycerin cultures were strongly acd and were still producing
gas.

In broth fluorescence was noted, as well as turbidity, a dense sediment and
a light pellicle.

4. Pseudomonas sericea (Mig.) var. fluorescens.

This organism was a short, thick, gram-negative rod with a single, delicate,
polar flagellum.

Gelatin colonies were at first punctate, bluish-white, later becoming definitely
round. Under the microscope they were coarsely granular with grumose centres
and a clearly defined margin. .Some of the larger colonies had a few club-shaped
processes.

On agar the surface colonies were round and concentric with slightly irregular
margins. Beneath the surface small, dense, granular, pyramidal colonies were
numerous. Under the microscope all appeared to have a grumose structure.

On agar slants a white, lustrous, spreading layer was formed. Growth
first appeared as discrete, pearly-white colonies (diameter about 1 mm.) which
later became confluent. The water of condensation was turbid, with a white
deposit.

In Gelatin stab cultures, a bowl-shaped depression was first produced, a
white film lining the cavity. This became broadened until the sides of the
tube were reached and proceeded in a horizontal layer to the bottom.

Broth cultures were moderately turbid with a flocculent pellicle and a
sediment. A negative result was obtained by the indol test.

Potato cultures had at first a dull slightly granular surface which later
became smooth, shining and waxy. The colour varied from pink to buff. In
old cultures the buff tone was constant.

Litmus was completely reduced in 18 hours and a white pellicle was formed
on the surface of milk cultures of that age. Digestion began at the surface of
the medium on the fifth day and was complete in about two weeks. No clotting
took place. The 1eaction was strongly alkaline. The medium became slimy
and gradually deepened in colour to a golden-yellow. At the surface a layer
containing fluorescent pigment was formed. This layer appeared dark-purplish
by transmitted light and sage-green by reflected light. Shaking produced this

effect throughout the tube. A very strong pungent odour suggesting an amine
was characteristic of these cultures. Tanner?? has described a similar effect
produced upon litmus milk by one group of his green fluorescent water bacteria.
His organisms, however, seem to have differed in other particulars from those
described here. They differed, for instance, in their action upon sucrose.
Migula has described a form known.as Pseudomonas sericea as producing alkali
and reducing litmus—though he has classified this organism among non-fluores-
cent forms. In the group under consideration fluorescence, observed chiefly
in milk but occasionally upon agar and broth, seemed the only important varia-
tion from the type described by Migula. Therefore, the tentative name of
Pseudomonas sericea fluorescens has been given.

4. Pseudomonas liquefaciens (Tataroff. Migula) var. marina.

Stained with Loeffler’s methylene blue this organism appeared as a short
rod, very often occurring in pairs. In a hanging drop it had a dodging and
darting rapid movement in a narrow field. It possessed one polar flagellum,
two or three times the length of the organism. It was gram-negative.

On Gelatin Plates.

Colonies appeared in three days, first as round white points with a somewhat
cloudy margin. Under the microscope, surface colonies were circular, granular,
dense in the centre with radiating, cochleate filaments from the margin. The
deep-set colonies had a sunburst appearance, the processes, which were very
numerous and tangled, radiating in all directions.

On Agar Plates.

Growth was evident in 24 hours. Surface colonies were round, moist,
raised, cream-coloured, 1 to 2 mm. in diameter, later widening to 15 mm. Micro-
scopically, they were grumose, concentric, dense in the centre, with successively
thinner rings outside. Deep-set colonies were dense, disc-shaped, tilted, 0.5 to
1.0 mm. in diameter. Magnified they appeared dark brown, grumose, with
rough edges.

In gelatin stab cultures liquefaction was at first crateriform. A cloudy
appearance was produced along the line of inoculation by numerous, minute,
discrete colonies. The margin of the liquefied area was slightly dentate. The
liquefaction became infundibuliform about the third day and was invariably
complete in ten days. The sediment was cream-coloured, viscid and
abundant.

Nutrient broth was rendered uniformly turbid with a frosty membranous
pellicle and a sediment.

Litmus milk became alkaline with reduction of litmus and digestion of
casein. In this medium growth was very slow in all cases. Tested soon after
isolation and grown in the dark the organism produced a change in the milk
on the sixth day. In later cultures, grown at room temperature without pro-
tection from light, no change was apparent for four weeks, after which alkalinity,
reduction of litmus, and digestion of casein were observed. Preparations in
plain milk gave parallel results. A strong ammoniacal odour was characteristic
of old cultures.

On potato no growth was obtained, though repeated cultures were made.
One vigorous strain, however, which grew more rapidly and luxuriantly than

- it

this type on all media, invariably produced a whitish, spreading growth upon
potato in 24 hours.

Tataroff’s organism having been isolated from fresh water and this closely
allied form from a salt water clam, it seems possible that the variations noted—
namely, slower growth in litmus milk and the absence of growth on potato were
due to lack of salt in these media.

It is hoped that this will be confirmed at a later date.

5. Pseudomonas myae.

Though this form had well-defined characteristics it has not been discovered
in the available classifications and descriptions. In many particulars it is
suggestive of the Pseudomonas oogenes of Migula which has been found ‘n eggs.

In form it was a short rod with one polar flagellum. It was gram-negative.

On gelatin plates white colonies developed in between.2 and 3 days. Lique-
faction was bowl-shaped, a dense white deposit occupying the central point in
the depression. Around this, a less dense, uniform turbidity gave the remainder
of the bowl a frosty-white appearance. Observed microscopically the small
deep-set colonies were found to be very dense, spherica’, granular masses. The
larger colonies seemed often to be built concentrically about such a colony as a
central nucleus. Other large colonies were merely grumose in the centre, a
loosely granulated zone occupying a comparatively wide area between the
central portion and the margin.

On agar plates, small, deep-set, pyramidal colonies were numerous. Surface
colonies were of the round, moist, cream-coloured type. Microscopically, they
were granular without projections and dense in the centre. Occasionally
branching and budding of the colonies was observed.

In litmus milk the litmus was quickly reduced. Clotting and digestion
followed rapidly. _They whey was perfectly clear without a pellicle, while the
clot became deep pink in colour.

Ps. myae was the only one of the blackening organisms which fermented
lactose.

In gelatin stab a crateriform-filiform liquefaction was well-developed at the
end of 24 hours. The liquefied area gradually widened, reaching the sides of the
tube in 3 or 4 days. A statiform area thus appeared above an ever-widening
central turbid column. In ten days the gelatin was completely liquefied, with
a heavy, creamy, viscid sediment.

In nutrient broth there was a light pellicle, marked turbidity and a viscid
sediment. Ly

The organism grew delicately upon potato, the growth appearing as a
narrow white film along the line of inoculation. It was at first mucoid but soon
became flattened, dry and shining, remaining unchanged at this stage for weeks.

The indol test gave a negative result.

6. Pseudomonas sp?

Another form, having all of the features mentioned in the general description,
was observed. Though it was very motile, the number of flagella was not
determined.

This was a small rod which had a tendency to bipolar staining. It frequently
formed short chains. It was gram-negative.

On gelatin plates it developed round, bowl-shaped, liquefying colonies, in
which there was a uniform white turbidity. A dense white deposit occupied
the centre of the colony, and smaller, opaque, white masses of bacteria lay at
many points midway between the centre and the circumference.

Under the microscope the whole colony was found to be granular. The dense
centre appeared dark brown, the outer zones lighter in colour. Approximately
midway between the centre and circumference a denser line, broken at intervals,
corresponded with the deposits noted microscopically.

On agar plates colonies were round, moist and cream-coloured. Micro-
scopically they appeared concentrically zoned, with a granular structure. Dense
masses like a tilted disc were often embedded in the colony near the centre.

In gelatin stab cultures, liquefaction was fairly rapid. It was at first crateri-
form but rapidly became infundibuliform. In 6 days liquefaction was complete.
A whitish sediment and a uniform white turbidity were characteristic.

On potato luxuriant growth was produced. It was at first yellow and
shining, with an even contour; later, it became deeper in colour, spreading and
of a painty consistency. The potato itself was darkened.

On litmus milk a light pellicle was formed within 24 hours, followed by
reduction of litmus, and the clotting and digestion of casein, proceeding from
the surface downward. The clear liquid became pinkish in colour. The clot
also, which was at first white, later became pink.

On agar slants, the growth was luxuriant, spreading evenly along the line of
inoculation. It was raised, cream-coloured, moist and shining, spreading
gradually over the entire slant. There was a creamy-white deposit in the water
of condensation. Indol was formed.

SUMMARY.

1. Many forms of bacteria occur normally in Mya arenaria, the long-necked
clam.

2. Six of these, belonging to the genus Pseudomonas, are capable of causing
blackening, if supplied with a favourable medium, containing iron or tin. This
number includes Pseudomonas fluorescens (Fliigge) Migula., Pseudomonas Jaegeri.
Mig., Pseudomonas liquefaciens (Tataroff. Mig.) var. marina., and two forms
which, for reasons stated above, have been given the tentative names, Pseudo-
monas sericea fluorescens and Pseudomonas myae.

3. All these blackening organisms were facultative anaerobes.

All liquified gelatin.

All reduced nitrates to nitrites.

All formed acid from dextrose, saccharose and glycerin.

A change of reaction from acid to alkaline was characteristic in sugar
media, and usually began on the third or fourth day.

All were motile, gram-negative rods.

No spores were observed.

4. Fluorescence was characteristically produced by three of these organisms,
namely, Ps. fluorescens (Fliigge) Mig., Ps. Jaegeri, and Ps. sericea (Mig.) var.

fluorescens. ~Ps. myae and Ps. sp? formed an acid curd, followed by digestion
of casein, in milk.
Ps. Jaegeri was the only gas former among the blackening organisms isolated.

~ NOTE OF THANKS.

The writer of this paper wishes to express her thanks to Dr. Harrison, who
outlined the problem and made many helpful suggestions; to Dr. Huntsman,
under whose direction the work was begun; to Professor Lloyd, whose practical
interest has been a constant encouragement; to Dr. Oertel, who allowed her the
facilities of his department; and, finally, to Professor Derick, whose unfailing
interest has been an inspiration and whose practical suggestions have been of

great value.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

1. Macpuatt and BRukERE:~ Discolouration in Canned Lobsters. 29th Annual
Report Marine & Fisheries, Ottawa Supp. No. 2, 1897.

2. Prescott and UNDERWOOD: Micro-organisms and Sterilizing Processes in
the Canning Industries. Tech. Quarterly, 1897, Vol. 10.

3. SADLER: Bacteriology of Swelled Canned Sardines. S Geo. V. Sess. Paper
35a, Vol. LIT, ‘No. 13; 1918:

4. TEYXEIRA: Zeitschrift fiir Unters. d. Nahr u. Genuss, 1912, Vol. 23.

5. RussELtL: Untersuchungen iiber im Golf von Neapel lebende Bacterien

6. RussELL: The Bacterial Flora of the Atlantic Ocean in the vicinity of
Woods Holl, Mass. Bot. Gaz., Vol. 18, 1893.

7. Myers, J. T. Production of H.S by Bacteria, Jour. Bact., Vol. 6, 1920.

8. TANNER: Bacteriology and Mycology of Foods, 1919.

9. Prescort, S. C., 1900. The Bacteriology of Canned Foods. Sctence 11:442.

0. CatHcart, E. P. The Bacterial Flora of Blown Tins of Preserved Foods.
Jour. Hyg. 6, 248-50, 1906.

11. Brcetow: Problems of Canning Operations, 1918. Amer. Jour. Pub.
Health, Vol. 8.

12. JorDAN: The Kinds of Bacteria found in River Water. Jour. Hyg., Vol. 3,

No. 1, 1903.

13. WENNER & ReTTGER: A Systematic Study of the Proteus Group of Bacteria.
Jour. Bact., Vol. 4, 331.

14. BucHANAN: Studies in the Nomenclature and Classification of the Bacteria

III. The families of the Enbacteriales. Jour. Bact. 2, 349.

15. Hiss and ZINNSER: Text-book of Bacteriology, 1919.

16. Eyre: Bacteriological Technique. Philadelphia, 1913.

17. GILTNER: Micro biology. New York, 1916.

18. CuestErR: A Manual of Determinative Bacteriology.

19. MiGuLa: System der Bakterien, 1900.

20. TANNER: A Study of Green Fluorescent Bacteria rome water. Jour. Bact.,
Vol. 3, 1918.

No. 2

A STUDY OF THE SEA MUSSEL (Mytilus edulis, Linn.)
BY

BESSIE K. E. MOSSOP, M.A.
Department of Hygiene, University of Toronto

A Study of the Sea Mussel (Mytilus Edulis Linn.)

BEssiIE K. E. Mossop, M.A.

Department of Hygiene, University of Toronto.

In 1917 the writer began a study of the growth of the sea mussel (Mytilus
edulis, Linn.) primarily with the object of discovering the commercial possibilities
of the mussels of our Atlantic coast. The investigation was conducted chiefly
on the mussels of the St. Andrew’s region, New Brunswick, with the Marine
Biological Station, St. Andrews as a base, but brief surveys were also made of the
beds at Digby, Nova Scotia, and at Grand Manan Island, Bay of Fundy. A
very limited number of shells from Hudson’s Bay were also examined.

The problem soon presented five main aspects, viz., (1) the distribution of
the beds and the size and number of mussels in them; (2) the age of the animals
forming the beds; (3) the enemies which prey on them; (4) the factors governing
their rate of growth; (5) the factors governing their distribution.

SECTION TE
DISTRIBUTION.
1. DISTRIBUTION IN ST. ANDREWS REGION.

The early explorers (Ganong 1887 and 1889) of New Brunswick have left
some references to the natural history of the region which are of interest when
considering the mussel. Jacques Cartier was the first explorer of the coast of
Acadia who paid any attention to the animals and plants of the places he visited,
but he does not mention any invertebrates. The first published reference to
the invertebrates occurs in Lescarbot’s ‘“‘ History of New France’’ 1609 in which,
when describing Champlain’s voyage, he mentions the abundance of mussels
at St. Croix Island (now known as Dochet Island) and Port Royal. Champlain
in writing of his own voyage (‘‘Les Voyages du Sieur de Champlain,” published
at Paris 1613) mentions finding in 1604, cockles, mussels, sea-urchins and sea-
snails at St. Croix Island. He mentions also the occurrence at the present
Weymouth Harbour, St. Mary Bay, Nova Scotia, of many shell fish, such as
mussels, cockles and sea-snails. Another nteresting early reference is that of
Nicholas Denys, who, in his ‘‘Description Géographique et Historique des
Cotes de l’Amérique Septentrionale,’”’ published at Paris in 1672, mentions
the abundance of shell-fish (coquillages) upon the north shore of New Brunswick
and of oysters (huistres) at Cocagne. During the eighteenth century nothing
worthy of note appears to have been written on this subject. In the early half
of the nineteenth century several lists of mollusca were published, but these were
lists for travellers rather than scientific publications, and show signs of being
copied one from another. The chief lists were: Robert Cooney (1832); Rev. C.
Atkinson (1847); C. L. Hathaway (1846); Abraham Gesner (1847) (this list

was published in Hitchcock’s Zoology of Massachusetts, 1835, and includes the
mollusca of the whole New England coast); W. H. Perley (1852 and 1854);
Alex. Monro (1855).

The distribution given by later writers is as follows:

Willis (1863): ‘‘Whole coast; common.”’

Gould, A. A. (1870): ‘Extensively distributed throughout all northern seas.
Appears to inhabit shallow water. Eastport, common (Cooper).”’

Verrill, A. E. and Smith, S. I. (1873): ‘In Bay of Fundy from littoral zone
to 50 fathoms.”

Ganong, W. F. (1885): “Passing to the mussel family (Mytilidae) the Bay
(7.e., Passamaquoddy Bay) affords at least four species of which far the most
abundant is the edible mussel (Mytilus edulis). Crowded closely together
above ground and clinging by the firm byssus they occupy great beds, all of a
dull black colour except where a lighter coloured specimen of the variety pel-
lucidus is more conspicuous than its fellows. The nearer low water mark they
are the larger they are, while they are found at their fullest perfection by dredging
in four or five fathoms.”

Whiteaves, J. F. (1901): ‘Common everywhere, at or a little above low-
water mark.’

Detweiler, John D. (1915): ‘“‘Common throughout this region in the littoral
zone.”

In the following detailed description of the location of the mussel beds as
found during the summer of 1917 it will be seen that although in a general way
the mussel was ‘“‘common everywhere”’ in certain localities it was lacking. As
will be pointed out later this was due to the fact that the mussel was re-establish-
ing itself in the regions after being almost entirely exterminated there. It will
be noted also that although dredging operations were carried out near some of
the large beds no living specimens of Mytilus edulis were obtained in this way.
The distribution was confined to the littoral zone. This is in harmony with
Detweiler (1915) but disagrees with Verrill (1873) and Ganong (1885). What
the explanation of this disagreement is, the author is not prepared to say. In
other regions mussel beds have been known to be completely exterminated (from
causes not always obvious) even within a limited period. An interesting case
of this occurred a few years ago at Woods Hole, when only shells and fragments
were dredged in the summer of 1908 in several localities where mussels had been
abundant during the summer of 1903. All the beds in deep water, however,
were not exterminated, Mytilus edulis being “abundant and universally dis-
tributed in Vineyard Sound at 1-19 fathoms.’’ (Sumner, Osburn and Cole, 1913).

Description of the Mussel Beds of the St. Andrews Region in 1917.

The investigation of the region was carried out at or about low tide, when,
by the combined use of a launch and dinghy, the extent of the beds could be
ascertained by direct observation. In this way the whole shore (including
portions of the creeks whose mouths were on this shore-line) from Oak Bay to
Upper Green Point on the Mascareen shore was explored; also the entire shore
of Navy Island and of Minister’s Island, a portion of the shore of Bliss Island,
the shore of Deer Island, from North Harbour to a point opposite Indian Island,

Wilson’s Beach, and points on Macmaster Island and Adam Island. Owing to
a dense fog the exact location of the points of observation in the last two cases
could not be ascertained (Chart I).

In Oak Bay, in Warwig Creek, a rather extensive bed was found on a muddy,
gently sloping shore a short distance below the bridge. Dredging operations
were carried on in this creek near the beds but no mussels were obtained although
at one place the mussels were growing on either bank opposite the point where
the dredging was done. The St. Stephen River was not explored, but a resident
of the district informed the writer that the sawdust from the mills along the
river rendered it unsuitable for mussels and none grew there. This would
appear highly probable.

From Oak Bay along the Canadian shore of the St. Croix River, as far as
the Biological Station, no beds were found. It was impossible to make observa-
tions at Dochet Island to compare with Champlain’s records owing to the war
regulations regarding visitors at U.S. Lighthouses and adjoining grounds. At
the Biological Station fairly large patches of mussels were found on the bare
rocks there, extending nearly to Joe’s Point. Extensive dredging operations
were carried on opposite this bed and around Joe’s Point, but no mussels were
obtained. A large clam bed is located between Joe’s Point and the wharves of
St. Andrews, so that mussels do not have an opportunity of growing there,
although it would appear to be a favourable situation for them.

They grew abundantly on the wharves of St. Andrews and formed beds
between the wharves when allowed to do so. Beyond the wharves, however,
the beds ended and other beds were not found until the vicinity of the bar
between the mainland and Minister’s Island was reached. (In Kitty Cove a
large bed was found, but they were nearly all dead. What had caused their
death was not ascertained, but it was observed that the starfish were also dead
in large numbers.) On the side of the bar nearest St. Andrews the mussels
occurred in small scattered patches, but on the side of the bar nearest Chamcook
the bed was an extensive one. Around the northern part of Chamcook Harbour
mussels occurred, but none were found on or near Clarke’s Ledges.

From Clarke’s Ledges to the Bocabec River only one small patch of stunted-
looking mussels was seen. This was at Bocabec Bay. In Bocabec River a
similar patch was found. At Digdequash Harbour the mussels were growing in
a rather large bed on the gently sloping shore. At Hog Island, near Digdequash
Harbour, another such bed was found. From there to Upper Green Point,
along the Mascareen shore, no mussels were found, nor were any found at Upper
Green Point.

An extensive bed was found on the side of Navy Island nearest St. Andrews
extending from the Navy Bar Lighthouse to the point opposite the C.P.R.
wharves and lying on both sides of this point. There was also a large bed on
Niger Reef and on Navy Island near Niger Reef. Dredging operations were
carried on around these beds, but failed to obtain any mussels. On the side of
the Island remote from St. Andrews no mussels were found.

On Minister’s Island only one bed was found. This was continuous with
the one on the bar between the island and the mainland and did not extend
quite to the entrance of Chamcook Harbour.

On the outer side of Bliss Island, among the sea-weed on the ledges, the
mussels were quite abundant. Also on the sheer rocks forming a large portion
of the shore patches of mussels were found to occur quite extensively in a strip
from two to four feet wide just above low-water mark. In Fisherman’s Cove,
on the inner side of the island, mussels were found growing on the muddy,
gently sloping shore.

On Deer Island, from Northern Harbour to a point opposite Indian Island,
the mussels occurred in patches along the sheer rocky shore and on the ledges
in a strip from low-water mark to about four feet above it. Only at Clam Cove
were any found on the beaches and here only a very few scattered among the
sea-weed.

At Wilson’s Beach no mussels were observed. At Macmaster Island a large
bed was found. The mussels here were growing on the reefs and also on the
sloping portions of the shore. On Adam Island only one small patch of mussels
was found where observations were made, although the shore here was similar
to the outer shore of Bliss Island. As explained previously the exact location of
these points of observation could not be determined owing to a dense fog.

In all places where mussels occurred the beds ended abruptly when low-water
mark was reached. In the case of the beds on sloping shores the upper limit
was in the region between one-third and one-half of the distance between low-
and high-water marks. It was noticeable that no mussel beds were found on
sloping gravelly shores, but always where the shore was muddy or sandy (the
mussels soon render a sandy shore muddy) or on bare rocks. The writer is not
able to offer any explanation as to why the mussels grew on some of the sheer
rocky shores, e.g., Bliss Island and not on others, e.g., Adam Island.

The variety pellucidus was found in the various beds described, but was not
numerous.

Size and Relative Numbers of Mussels in the Various Mussel Beds of the St. Andrews
Region in 1917.

Samples of the mussels were taken from the various beds and the living
mussels taken from a known area were counted and the lengths of their shells
measured to the nearest half-centimeter. The length of the mussel was con-
sidered as the distance from the extreme anterior end of the shell to the extreme
posterior end when the shell was placed with the edge from which the byssus
protruded parallel with the scale. The samples of which the records are quoted
were taken from typical portions of the mussel beds near low-water mark unless
otherwise stated.

The mussels in the various localities were all small. The largest ones
obtained were only 6.5 cm. in length and only two were taken of this size. These
were found in a sample taken from the rocky bottom beside Niger Reef, from an
area of 102.5 sq. cm. Only 20 living specimens were obtained in the sample,
which was taken from a small patch of mussels growing just at low-water mark
somewhat isolated from the rest of the bed. In the main bed the mussels were
of the usual small size (none obtained being over 4.5 cm. in length), but from the -
above mentioned sample 17 out of the 20 mussels taken were 5 cm. or over in
length. In general the largest mussels were obtained from the reefs and rocky

a
edges such as occur on the outer side of Bliss Island. Samples 1, 2, 3, Table I.,

611 Tec sOTelMeGIa Sea) uel nace cOn ‘purys] 10}seOIN
uo poq WoOIy | ,UID G ‘CT 9

isp

as)

&£

= ‘asnoy
or

> -VysrT] 1eq AABN OF
o 9Z1 € Go|," 64) 96) Sa) Sl oF purjsy AaeN wWlo4y
5 Surpud}xo 1eq WOIY | "WI G*YCT c
SS :

a yoo) Simae\\ jo
@ ell Cra eeGG see z T yurq ulojsea uO pag | ;"WO G*YCT 57
Yon) pox :

Su “9AOD)
2 WP] 0} voueIQUA
= 9g ra Gh\ 2F 9 2 P 9 8 Z ye jurod ussyynos
@

JO YIOI A0YS | ,"WO GEEZ &

| JOA

PF 8 g JON 3 z z j I ssi[gq JO a10ys
J9jNO JO YOOI BYS | Wd G° LCT Fe

“purysy

G9 Pe cts We ST Gilat) Rae ee sleeatee st ei ssi]gq Jo a10ys

Jano jo saspe’y] | , Wo G’ LCT T

Se ASO) | Oye (Ret tay lise cies esi meee Cio eeeh ate, el acon eGo mal aE T a0

TON Se Seco Ee ee eho | Aarau semi veo) |p eibaca all onc), |) Slants) of Medios If Wide a) Joquinu
Jaquinu ee ee ee “U01}90'T “PIV ajdures
[RIO Ly, ‘syqsua’] jo ojdures ur sjassnyy jo 1oquinyy

“LIGL Ul UOIs01 SMOIPUY “1S JO Spoq ur saydures [eoIdAQ UI s[assNUI Bas JO 9zIS puke JaquINnuU oy YL,

)

T Hav.

From the beds lying on a sloping shore the majority taken were between 2 cm.

and 3.5 cm. in length as seen in Fig. 1.

are typical as to the length and number obtained from a given area of such beds.
beds.

As will be pointed out later, the reason so few mussels were obtained in the
beds over 4.5 cm. in length was that the beds were composed of young individuals
since, as will appear, mussels frequently grow larger in that region.

Description of the Mussel Beds of St. Andrews Region in 1918.

In 1918, in the St. Andrews region, it was found that the sea-mussel instead
of occurring in isolated patches about Passamaquoddy Bay now regularly formed
part of the fauna of its littoral zone. The large beds were located as previously
and were in a thriving condition. The mussel had extended up the St. Croix
River also as far as Oak Bay. On the ledges about Dochet Island and along its
rocky shores the mussels were abundant, forming a bed of considerable size.
The mussels (as observed from a launch) appeared to be of the usual size and
type found in the beds of St. Andrews. (Owing to the United States war regula-
tions ve lighthouse property a sample was not obtained.)

A trip to L’Etang revealed that the mussels were common there and in
Black Harbour, but no large beds were found.

500

400

Fig. I.—Frequency Curve of Mussels of various sizes in St. Andrews Region, 1917.

The mussels were always found as previously, occurring only in the littoral
zone except in special locations such as anchor chains, which afford some pro-
tection against certain of their enemies, e.g., starfish.

2. DISTRIBUTION IN DIGBY REGION, NOVA -SCOTIA.

In August, 1918, I paid a short visit to Digby, Nova Scotia, with a view
to making a survey of the mussel beds in the Annapolis Basin. Owing to the:
difficulty experienced in obtaining suitable boats for trips and the slowness with
which one could proceed close inshore at low-water (due to the quantities of
eel-grass which infest the shore) it was found possible to visit only the beds close
to Digby, and one bed reported at Gulliver Hole, a few miles down the coast
outside the Basin.

Through the co-operation of the Maritime Fish Corporation I was enabled
to secure the guidance of the mussel fisherman, Mr. Portie Weir, while visiting
the mussel beds. For this assistance I am much indebted.

For many years the sea-mussel has been known as common to this region.
Its distribution has been given as follows:

Willis, 1863: ‘‘ Whole coast; common.”

Verkruzen, 1878: ‘‘Annapolis Basin and Digby Gut, common.”

Ganong, 1889: ‘‘Very abundant everywhere on coast of Acadia.”

Three kinds of mussels had been reported to me as occurring in this region—
a large blue one, a large red one, and a small black one. Consequently, I expected
to find Mytilus edulis, Modiola modiolus and possibly Modiola nigra were the
mussels reported. I found, instead, only Mytilus edulis, large eroded specimens
being called ‘‘blue’’ mussels, those stained a reddish brown (the cause of the
stain has not been ascertained) being the so-called ‘‘red’’ mussels, while the
small sea-mussels growing close inshore were the “‘black’’ ones. I found also
several specimens of the lighter, horn-coloured variety of Mytilus edulis, viz.,
Mytilus edulis pellucidus, growing in the various beds.

The best mussel beds are the one in Joggins Cove and the one in Smith Cove
(Chart 2). These beds are of the same type. The shore is a very gently sloping
muddy one with a considerable quantity of eel grass growing on it, particularly
in Joggins Cove. There are, moreover, a large number of shallow tide pools.
In these the mussels grow in large numbers and to a good size (Table 2). Some-
times patches of mussels extend from pool to pool, but the greater number are
found in the pools often half-buried in the soft mud. In Joggins Cove the wreck-
age of an old weir furnishes an anchorage for a large colony. These mussels
were reported by the mussel fisherman to be ‘‘finer and larger’’ than those
growing on the muddy bottom. This colony suggested, of course, the buchét
method of mussel culture and raises the question as to whether or not some
modification of that method could not be used profitably in this region. Much
of the muddy bottom furnishes no surface on which the spat can attach them-
selves, hence only a portion of the bottom produces mussels. Every available
bit of brush or other solid structure is densely covered so there would appear
to be no lack of spat.

There is also a large bed of good-sized mussels on the flats extending from

Bear Island to the mainland. These grow in a similar manner to those in Smith
Cove and Joggins Cove. It has been used very little, however, owing to the
fact that they are slightly further away from the home of the mussel fisherman.

The ‘“‘blue’’ mussels grow along the rough rocky shore of the point bounding
Smith Cove on the side nearer Digby. Only a narrow strip of them survive in
this unfavourable location and these are exposed only at the fullest tides so that
although of good size (Table 2) they are of little importance commercially.
Another patch of eroded mussels occurs on Bear Island on the side of the point
nearest Digby. .

. The “black’’ mussels grow all around Bear Island and also at about the
upper limits of the bed in Smith Cove. They resemble the St. Andrews mussels
in shape and are too small for marketing (Table 2). They would probably
fatten if removed to the better locations and could thus be used as a source of
supply for seed mussels.

~ A large bed of mussels was reported as probably existing up Bear River, but
was not visited. It was known to exist in 1916. Another bed was reported at
Goat Island. Above Goat Island it is said no beds exist.

Mussels at Gulliver Hole.

A bed of large mussels was reported at Gulliver Hole, down the coast outside
of the Annapolis Basin. This proved to be only a patch of mussels growing on
the rocks, the mussels resembling those in Passamaquoddy Bay.

Size of the Mussels.

From a consideration of Table II it will be seen that the larger-sized mussels
in the beds near Digby are between 6 cm. and 7 cm. in length, some being found
even larger, viz., 8 cm. in length, in the sample of “‘blue’’ mussels. It will be
seen also that the mussels from Gulliver Hole are of a fairly good size, the majority
of the larger ones being between 5.5 cm. and 6 cm. in length.

It is of interest to compare the size of these mussels with those of St. Andrews
region. The majority of the larger mussels there in 1917 (from beds of similar
location also, 7.e., on the gently sloping shores) were between 2 cm. and 3.5 cm.
in length. Even those similarly situated to those at Gulliver Hole were appreci-
ably smaller, being for the most part between 4.5 cm. and 5 cm.

The difference in size between the mussels of the St. Andrews region and
those from the beds producing the large mussels at Digby (e.g., Smith Cove)
is not alone due to the difference in length; there is a distinct difference in the
relative proportions of length, depth and thickness of the mussels. Those from
Digby are relatively deeper and thicker in proportion to their length than those
from St. Andrews. Mussels of this shape I refer to as the Digby type, having
first observed this difference in proportion in mussels from Digby, while the
relatively shallower mussels which I observed first in St. Andrews region I refer
to as of the St. Andrews’ type. In Plate-I. are shown four mussels which
illustrate this difference in shape; Nos. 1 and 2 are mussels from Passama-
quoddy Bay and illustrate well the St. Andrews type, while Nos. 3 and 4 are
mussels collected at Loggieville, N.S., and are of the Digby type.

Agl

a! G I iS g I eordA} ‘ajoH] JoAT[N+y) c
Gl ¢ € i il I TI peordA ‘9A YITWS
jO sjassnu (, yoRl,, $
*yeord Ay
Gl G G 6 I I G I QAO) YWUIG IPoUu
ISSUES CUS Oh &
9T 6 Vv 8 it aS1P]
payoajas ‘9A0D YIWS Z
1G G 9 g G G G I I ‘yeord 4] ‘aAo0+ surssof I
‘ojdures
ts Be eSeale ten GEO ul eaQes IGG PC set Gry alah Ges oleic MG Galle alice arg ‘ojdures
sjassnur | ‘wo | ‘wo | ‘wo | ‘wo | ‘wo | ‘wo | ‘wo | ‘uo | “WO | “WO | ‘WO | ‘WO | “WO | “WO | “WD jo Jojovieyo | roquinu
jO ‘ON ‘ pue | ojdures
je1OL ‘sy}3ua7q] Jo ajdureg ur sjassnyy JO Joquinyy UOT} eI0'T

‘SIG ul uolda1 AGSIC] JO spaq UI S[essnu Vas JO 9ZIS OY]

Ll alavaL

3. DISTRIBUTION AT GRAND MANAN ISLAND, BAY OF FUNDY.

’

The sea-mussel has been known to occur at Grand Manan for some time
for Stimpson (1854) in referring to their distribution mentions them as “very

I was, therefore, anxious to examine any beds

abundant”’ at Grand Manan.
existing there at the present time.

During the first week of September, 1918, I was able to visit Grand Manan

Island, Bay of Fundy, to investigate the mussel beds there. Owing to stormy
weather at the end of that week it was only possible to make trips on September
3rd and 4th so that only a small portion of the coast was investigated. Through
the co-operation of Inspector Calder of Welchpool, Campobello Island, New
Brunswick, the use of the patrol boat ‘‘G” of Grand Manan was granted for
these investigations. I am much ‘ndebted to Captain Green and the other
members of the crew of the ‘““G” for their kindness and assistance during the
trips. e
The North-western coast of Grand Manan is very rocky and bare, the rock
rising sheer out of the water for a considerable height. Such a location is very
untavourable for mussels so that it is unlikely that any beds occur there. On
the eastern and southern coasts, however, extensive shoals occur and con-
sequently along these coasts I expected to find mussel beds.

At Seal Cove, where I made my headquarters, no mussels were found.
The shore there is sandy and so wave beaten as to afford a poor anchorage for
mussels.

The first trip made was to Cheynne Passage, between Ross Island and
Cheynne Island, where a ‘arge mussel bed had been reported. A bed of large
mussels was found there extending across the channel as indicated in Chart 3.
The mussels were found growing among the sea weeds (kelp, dulce and sea-
lettuce). Many dead shells (frequently 5 cm. or more in length) were found
among the living shells. The larger mussels grew in the deeper water while at
the upper limits of the bed the mussels were smaller, as is usual. Horse mussels
(Modiola modiolus) were found in the deeper parts of the channel. They were
of a good size but were exceedingly difficult to procure as they attach themselves
very firmly and frequently wedge themselves between rocks. In the shallow
water the mussels were practically all sea mussels (Mytilus edulis). Only one
starfish was seen in the neighbourhood of the beds, but large numbers of sea-
urchins were observed in the deeper portions of the channel.

Another bed (known in this paper as the White Head bed) was found on the
western side of the shoal between Cheynne Island and White Head Island.
Here the bottom appeared the same as at Cheynne passage, with similar sea-
weeds, but the mussels proved smaller (Table III) and less abundant. The
number growing in the deeper water was noticeably less than in Cheynne passage.
Great numbers of gulls were observed idling about. They are reported to feed
on the mussels of this region, it being said that they fly up with the mussels,
drop them on the rocks, thus breaking the shell, and then devour the contents.

The shore and bar off Redhead (Chart 3) was examined but no sea-mussels
were observed. ;

Two bars off the eastern coast of Wood Island (Chart 3) were examined but
no mussels were found’ on either. The bottom was of fine and coarse gravel.
It is said that a few years ago mussels grew abundantly on these bars. Under
the gravel a layer of fine black mud was found which suggested ‘‘mussel mud.”
One portion of one bar shifts during heavy storms so it seems possible that the
beds reported to have been there may have been destroyed by the bottom
shifting.

Size of the Mussels.

From a consideration of Table III it will’ be seen that the majority of the

larger sized mussels of Cheynne Passage are between 5 cm. and 6.5 cm. in length

(a few even reaching 8 cm. in length), while those of the White Head bed are

éIT I G Sg Ol | 6 él 86.1) aro.) 20 &
GG i I & 6 L ZL
1G G G 9 L ¢ € G
ia G g G G I G
-a]dures
Uy Satan! eS tee, we SON gO. Weg Gah ie a) SCR ale ata Ges lie cies | Cia Gaal| Co a I
S[OSSNU | PUD) | WO) | UO) | LTO | SWOT) | IOS | TOS | UO) OW) |S STTO |CO | STON pe LUO) | SULTS
jo |——-'—__'__—__ - I
aJaquinu ‘sy}sua] jo ojdures ur sjassnur jo raquinyy
[PIO

‘ST6[ Ul UeUR] puIT Je Spoq UT S[TaSSNUI Pas JO 9ZzIS JY,

HL atdve

S1o}snyo [et9A08
peoH MyM | F

a81P] payea[as
osessed
auudoy) ¢

*sIoqsnjo
19y}0
|B19A0s
asessed

auuAoy) G

‘Iojsnjo uo ase
-ssed suuday) T

‘o]duies
jo Jayovreyo |raquinu
pure uoreso0T jojdureg

somewhat shorter, the majority of the larger sized ones being between 4 cm.
and 5 cm. in length although even here one specimen was found 8 cm. in length.
It may appear from a consideration only of the data given in Table III that if
the same number of mussels had been measured from Cheynne Passage a similar
result might have been obtained. This, however, is highly improbable, as the
samples measured were typical and the mussels were noticeably larger throughout
the bed. The fact that the deeper parts of the channel were thickly covered
with mussels in itself would tend to raise the average length of the mussels of
that bed since the larger ones were found in such locations. What caused such
a marked difference in the size of the mussels of the two beds I am unprepared
to say. It is possible that the mussels of the White Head bed may be younger
than those of Cheynne Passage. Shells have been preserved for further investi-
gation of this point.

In general the size of the mussels at Grand Manan appears to be greater
than in the St. Andrews region, where in 1917 very few were found over 5 cm.
in length and the greater majority being as pointed out between 2 cm. and 3.5 cm.
in length. It will be noted also that they are of about the same length. as those ©
found in the better beds at Digby, N.S.

It is of interest to compare the lengths of the mussels from Cheynne Passage
and the White Head bed with the general length for the Passamaquoddy Bay
region as given by Gould (1870), viz., 2 io inches (i.e., approx. 6.2 cm.);
and also with the findings of Ganong (1885), viz., “in abundance 3% inches
(i.e., approx. 8.9 cm.) long and even longer.” It will be noted that the size
for the Grand Manan mussels corresponds very closely to Gould’s general
length but falls short of the length as given by Ganong.

In shape the mussels at Grand Manan are of the Digby type, 7.e., deeper
in proportion to their length than those of the St. Andrews region (Figs. 3 and
4, Plate I.); as at Digby the mussels near the upper limits of the bed tend
toward the typical St. Andrews shape (Figs. 1 and 2, Plate I.).

SECTION
AGE OF MUSSEL BEDS:
1. Age of Mussel Beds of St. Andrews Region.

The age of the mussel beds of the St. Andrews region was definitely deter-
mined in 1919. This was done by means of the annual ‘‘check marks”’ on the
shells by which the writer has found it possible not only to determine the age of
sea-mussels but also their rate of growth during each growing season.

A mussel bed typical of those of the St. Andrews region is conveniently
located near the eastern side of the wharf of the Biological Station. This has,
therefore, been used as a type bed. It is situated in the littoral zone about low-
water mark and is laid bare at nearly every tide. The mussels studied were
taken from that portion of the bed lying nearest low-water mark.

Material was collected for the purpose of determining the age of the mussels
in this bed July 14, 1919, from a typical portion of it.. This material included
all the individuals growing on a small area of the bed and was collected before the
spat of 1919 was conspicuous. The results of the examination of it are as follows:

Year class* | Number % of total
of shell. population:
ls 28 18.8
TIT. 63: 42.3
IV. 44 30.2

Vv. 13 8.7

In this material it will be noted that shells belonging to the fifth year class
are the oldest. In examinations of other material from this bed examples of
shells in the sixth year class were found but their occurrence was very rare, so
that they represent a negligible portion of the whole population. It will be
seen also that the majority of the mussels of the bed belong to the third and
fourth year classes, 7.e., are indiv duals that were spawned and settled in the bed
while it was thinly populated and so had a good opportunity to develop. In
Table IV. the above results are arranged to show when each season’s growth in
the various year classes was made and the relative numbers of the various year
classes in each year considered.

TABLE IV.
Showing relative numbers of each year class and when each season's growth of each year
class was made in the mussel population of a typical bed at Biological Station St. Andrews, N.B.,
July 14, 1919.

———

Relative Number of Mussels of Year Class
Year
1 II. III. IV. te Me VI.
“1919 | Unknown 28 63 | dt | 13 | Negligible
“ois | 28 | 63 44 13. | Negligible |
“4917 | 63 44 13 Negligible |
1916 | 44 ie 13 Negligable | F
1915 is | Negligible
“1014 Negligible

pe ee ee eee ee eee

The figures given in Table IV. are, of course, only approximately correct
since they are based on an examination of a relatively small number of the
mussels and since also they represent only the members of the various year classes
which have survived up to July, 1919. They serve, however, to give some
indication of the density of the population in preceding seasons and the relative
numbers of the various year classes during those seasons.

From these results it seems evident that the bed was destroyed possibly
in 1914 and at least before the spawning season of 1915 and that only a small
number of individuals spawned in 1914 survived. This deduction is supported
by the condition of the beds in the region in 1917. As indicated in Section I.
in that year the beds consisted of small mussels, the majority of which had a
shell length ‘of between 2 centimeters and 3.5 centimeters. Moreover, mussels

were not found along considerable stretches of the shore as then pointed out.
In 1918 the writer found that practically all parts of the shore possessed a number
of mussels, even unfavourable locations (e.g., gravelly shores) possessing an
appreciable number. In view of the rate of increase in length of the shell of the
sea mussel per growing season at St. Andrews, viz., 10.8 m. these facts indicate
that the mussels of the region were practically wiped out by some unfavourable
condition and that in 1916 and the following seasons they were re-inhabiting
the region.

2. Age of Mussel Beds at Digby, Nova Scotia.

The shells of mussels collected in the survey of 1918 at Digby, Nova Scotia,
have been studied in order to determine the rate of growth for that region.
This study revealed that the average rate of increase in length of the shells
per growing season is 16.0 mm. It will be seen, therefore, that the larger sized
mussels of from 6 cm. to 8 cm. inJength are in their fourth, fif-h or sixth growing
season, the age depending on whether or not the conditions which had obtained
during their various growing seasons were favourable.

SECTION -Iit
ENEMIES OF THE SEA-MUSSEL AT ST. ANDREWS, N-B:

During the free-swimming larval stage of the sea-mussel it forms part of
the plankton and consequently large numbers are undoubtedly destroyed by
those forms which feed on the plankton. After becoming well-established in
some suitable location for growth it is still subject to the attacks of several
animals. At St. Andrews, fish, other molluscs and echinoderms are the chief
offenders. A few mussels are probably destroyed by the gulls and crows which
occasionally frequent the beds at low-tide.

Fish destroy a large number of mussels. Professor A. G. Huntsman (1920)
informs me that they form “‘a not inconsiderable part of the food of the flounder
(Pseudopleuronectes) at St. Andrews,” and results obtained by Clemens and
Clemens (1921) in their study of the eel pout (Zoarces) at St. Andrews show that
in an examination of 75 specimens, 12 of them (z.e., 16%) were found to contain
sea-mussels, the largest number found in a single specimen being 122. It seems
probable that further study will show that other fish prey on the mussels in this
region.
The molluscan enemies observed devouring the mussels at St. Andrews are:
Purpura lapillus, Buccinum undatum (common whelk)- and Polynices heros
(round whelk or ‘‘cockle’’). Each one of these attacks the mussel in a somewhat
different way. The Purpura bores a small round hole about the size of a common
pin head in the shell and thus gains access to the animal within. These holes
are made in any convenient portion of the shell. Very frequently they are
found near the umbo. If the Purpura, while attacking a mussel, is disturbed
before the animal is injured the mussel appears to plug the inner end of the
hole bored by the Purpura with a pearly excretion, since shells have been found
with small holes (considered to have been made by a Purpura) which have been
plugged in this manner.

30 4

The common whelk wears down the posterior or siphon end of the mussel
shell by a rasping action of its teeth. This method scratches the shell, removing
the epidermis at the edge.

The round whelk, like the Purpura, bores a hole in the shell. Only three
shells whose inhabitants have fallen victims to round whelks have been examined
by the writer. In these the hole is a large oval one, the largest examined being
4.5 mm. along the greater diameter and 3.2 mm. along the lesser diameter. In

-each case the hole was made about midway between the anterior and posterior
ends of the shell near the edge from which the byssus protrudes.

The echinoderms observed destroying the mussel at St. Andrews were the
starfish (chiefly Asterias vulgaris and Asterias forbesii) and the sea-urchin
(Strongylocentrotus droebachiensis). The starfish, when destroying a mussel,
opens its shell by means of a steady pull exerted on each valve by the tube feet.
The shell left after the animal has been destroyed is clean and unmarked.

The sea-urchin has not commonly been credited with attacking mussels.
Field (1911), in reviewing the various forms which prey on the mussel, makes no
mention of the sea-urchin. Ganong (1899) mentions that in Europe it is said
to attack sea-mussels, but, gives no authority for this statement. Wilcocks
(1884) quotes “Mr. Harding”’ in a list of enemies, including the ‘‘echinus or
sea-egg,’’ but gives no exact alithority for this reference so it is of little value.
Scott (1901), in his investigation of the food of the sea-urchin at St. Andrews,
found that the principal food consisted of sea-weed. He found no evidence of
the urchins eating any mollusca and summarizes his conclusions after reviewing
the literature of the subject thus: “Although practically all who have investi-
gated the food have concluded that the urchins are herbivorous, there is, seem-
ingly, among zoologists a general belief that they are carnivorous.”

The sea-urchin is abundant at St. Andrews, and about low-water large
numbers of them may be seen on the mussel beds. If disturbed they appear to
have been simply resting on the mussels rather than attacking them. So
habitually do they haunt the mussel beds, however, that the writer became very
suspicious that they were feeding on the mussels, in spite of repeated failure to
obtain proof of this.

The first evidence that sea-urchins eat mussels was obtained from an urchin
found clinging to a bag containing small mussels suspended from the float of the
wharf. This sea-urchin was brought into the laboratory and placed in one of
the tanks in running sea-water with a number of small mussels. The following
morning the contents of the digestive tract were examined. One small-sized
mussel shell was found in it. Subsequently a number of sea-urchins were collected
from the mussel beds and the contents of their digestive tracts examined immedi-
ately. This examination failed to reveal any traces of mussels (either of the
soft parts or of the shell).

In order to obtain further evidence two sea-urchins were placed in a small
aquarium in running sea-water with a number of small mussels (8.5 mm.—10.5
mm. in length). The following day no evidence could be seen in the aquarium
of any of the mussels having been destroyed. Three more urchins were added.
The next day the remnants of at least eight mussel shells were found in the

S1-*

aquarium. During the subsequent exper ment on the rate at which the sea-
urchin destroys the mussels (see Table VII.) it was found that the method which
the urchin employs when destroying the mussel is to chip away the mussel shell,
beginning usually (if not always) at the posterior or siphon and to chew up
the mussel shell bit by bit. In some cases the whole shell is chewed up in this
fashion, in other cases the shell is only partially destroyed, the soft part of the
mussel being eaten from the remaining part of the shell. If a-sea-urchin is
disturbed in an attack on a mussel before it has been seriously damaged, the
mussel shows a scratched and ragged edge. Many old mussel shells show that
they have been attacked by sea-urchins. Evidence of such attacks is frequently
found on the winter check marks.

An attempt was made during the summer of 1919 to obtain some data
regarding the rate of destruction of the mussels by their molluscan and echino-
derm enemies. This attempt was only partially successful. The forms used
in the experiments conducted were Purpura, the common whelk, the round
whelk, starfish and sea-urchins.

The experiments were conducted from August 28th to Sept. 19th. During
this time no ‘‘hot waves’ occurred so that no difficulty was encountered in
keeping the animals cool. In the experiments with the starfish and round
whelks the animals were placed in large shallow wooden tanks in running sea-
water. The sea-urchins were placed in a small aquarium in running sea-water
to a depth just immersing the animals. The Purpura and whelks were placed
in small aquaria in sea-water to a depth of from 5 to 7 cm. This water was
renewed three or four times per day. The mussels used were given no special
surface to which to attach except in the case of the experiment with the Purpura.
In this experiment the mussels were allowed to attach to a piece of rock before
beginning the experiments. No food other than the mussels was furnished any
of the animals used in the various experiments.

The result of the experiment with the Purpura and mussels is shown in
Table V.

During the experiment on the rate of destruction of mussels recorded in
Table V. a number of the Purpura did not appear to feed for some days. When
placed in the aquarium some of the Purpura immediately attached themselves
to its sides (some not being covered by the water) and remained clinging thus
apparently without any change in position until their removal from the aquarium
September 8th. When discarded they appeared healthy. Those that have
been considered as feeding on the mussels were moving on the rock to which
the mussels were attached and were attacking them. Shortly after the removal
of the other Purpura two of these on the rocks made their way to one side of the
aquarium and both remained clinging there until September 13th, when one was
knocked to the bottom. On September 14th both were again clinging to one
side of the aquarium. By September 16th, however, it was found near the
mussels. On September 19th one of the other Purpura, which had been feeding
on the mussels, was found clinging to the side of the aquarium. In Table V.,
in estimating the number of Purpura feeding, no account has been. taken of these
two latter movements since one tends to counterbalance the other and any
resulting error is probably very slight.

The rate at which the mussels were destroyed from September 2nd, 2 p.m.,
till September 8th, 3 p.m., was 0.9 mussels per Purpura per 24 hours. The rate
at which they were destroyed from September 8th, 3 p.m., till September 19th,
9.30 a.m., was 0.9 mussels per Purpura per 24 hours.

The experiment with the common whelk was unsuccessful. Five whelks
were placed in a small aquarium with a few medium sized mussels (6 or 8 mussels
of from 2 cm. to 2.5 cm. in length) on Aug. 29th. None of the mussels were
eaten from that time until Sept. 19th (z.e., during 21 days) when the experiment

TABLE V.

Showing rate at which Mytilus edulis L. was destroyed by Purpura lapillus under laboratory
conditions.

n VY
; Ee ad a=
bh < ra =!6 aD S
BES ea tis see oes Re) a } & 8 Sa «(OC me <=
as|o8| . ems | Paes eee, in|) oS
eee ome tee Stee lltsoeree | ewe cane ls eco e Z
pees ea ea” Soe ile. aaa ees em |e ats g
6.s1o°| So 5 3 oO Bea Sea Sys fs a8 2 o °
ZEW A you =e) FO Zao ZY eS Vee a Zz
19 ce Aug. 30 | 3 p.m
19 0 | Aug. 31 | 3 p.m. 24
19 1 | Sept. 2.) 2 p.m: 47 1 8.5-10.5
19 1 Sept. 5 | 9 a‘m. 67 1 i
19 2 Sept. 6 | 9 a.m. 24 4 S
19 4 | Sept. 8 | 3 p.m. 54 9 ic removed
15 Purpura
ft 4 | Sept. 8 | 3.05 p.m.
4 2 | Sept. 10 | 3 p.m. 48 4 8.5-10.5
4 2 | Sept. 13 ? ? 6 %s
Ane: i: Sept. 16 | 5 p.m. 145* 3 cs
4 2 | Sept. 19 | 9:30 a.m. 64.5 6 _

*This number of hours oe calculated from 3 p.m. Sept. 10th.

was ended. From Sept. 7th-13th one of the whelks died; with this exception
the whelks and mussels appeared healthy during the experiment. The whelks
were active and moved freely about in the aquarium.

The experiment with the round whelk was begun Sept. 12th and ended
Sept. 19th. A number of mussels ranging in size from 8.5 mm. to 20.1 mm.
length were placed in a large wooden tank with 8 or 10 round whelks. On
Sept. 15th one mussel shell was removed, the animal having fallen a victim to a
round whelk. On Sept. 19th two other shells were removed, the animals within

TABLE VI.

Showing rate at which Mytilus edulis L. was destroyed by Astervias under laboratory con-

ditions.

we bo.
5 EL
tg Oo Yv
WY) oo
ee =
yates eee
S o-3
ZS Zio
2 2
2 2
2 2
Z 2
2 2,
2 Y
2 2
2, 2
2 2
2 By
2 2
2 2
2 2,
Z 2
2 2
2 2

Sept.

Sept:

Sept.

Observation.

. 10

bservation.

ime of

ig
O

3.15 p.m.
10.55 a.m.
11.00 p.m.

8.30 p.m.
10.00 a.m.
10.00 a.m.

9.00 a.m.
10.00 a.m.

9.00 a.m.

9.05 a.m.

3.00 p.m.

3.00 p.m.
3.45 p.m.

4.15 p.m.

3.00 p.m.

9.30 p.m.

n vo 4
oZ | 9s : E
SOM en Mea = E :
ool Sas pe ee ae wee aes
S Y oD fee setise ss bs $ ©
SEBa/ oa oS o 3
PA Eau qialr tisha a siete) Z
19.6 4 8.5-10.5
24.9 9° nm
Aa 16 os
1305 0
24 8 us
23 3 ay
25 10 of
23 4 ss Removed all
mussels.
: Added larger
mussels.
DIO 22a
46 6 OB ay BPP,
Pallintiy Ush5)
Results
spoiled
25202040
72.8 6 D220 ree2ilenty
PA ai) PAL
IS ay SA(0)
WD 7 PAT dye 1A) AF
Pda Se ANG) S (58
20.5
PAT lay Ses
DIDS 5 UGE, iad
19.5
42.5 33 TORS a iliaes
16.0

having been eaten, while another mussel was removed from the’ grasp of a whelk
a hole having been partially bored in one valve of the mussel shell. During the
experiment the round whelks all appeared healthy and moved freely about in ~
the tank. It is evidently impossible to form an estimate of the rate at which
they eat mussels from this experiment.

The result of the experiment with the starfish is shown in Table VI.

One of the starfish used in this experiment had been kept in the tank for
some days without food until the day before the experiment was begun, when it

TABLE. VII.

Showing rate at which Mytilus edulis L. was destroyed by Strongylocentrotus droebachiensis
under laboratory conditions.

Se | 3 3 & BS Eos eS es ly Ca gee
ia o one D Last Sbilieeeh ear eae Wot celia :
eFel=S] 28 | gS |8eh| Sesh) bse é
hig Sa SO cee. Sea se ewe Oils ace 5
Zn a |Z 6 ES Ho A we. baer aie 6 2 Zz,
4 + Sept. 1 9.30 a.m. iat: So ee 88 mussels
placed in
aquarium
4 4 Sept. 2] 9a.m. Paps 12 8.5-10.5
A 4 Sept. 3] 9.30a.m. 24.5 iF ve
a 4 Sept. 4] 9a.m. Psa 10 3
Remaining
4 4 Sept. 5 | 10 a.m. 25 iba ais a mussels
removed
Placed 35
4 4 Sept. 6] 5 p.m. Siete nie te a mussels in
tank
4 4 Sept. 8 3 p.m. 46 6 16.5-25.6
4 + Sept. 10 fe ? 6 .
4 4 Sept. 13 | 4 p.m. - 121 2 co
4 4 Sept. 16 | 4.30 p.m. (CS 3 ¥
4 4 Sept. 17 | 2.45 p.m. 10.5 1 -

*This number of hours was calculated from 3 p.m. Sept. 8th.

was given four small mussels. On Sept. 4th the starfish were found to have
moved away from the mussels, which probably accounts for the small number
eaten from Sept. 8rd to Sept. 4th. By Sept. 6th the mussels were not as numerous
as formerly in the tank.

The rate at which the small mussels were destroyed (Aug. 28th-Sept. 6th)

was 3.6 mussels per starfish per 24 hours. The rate at which the larger mussels
were destroyed (Sept. 6th-Sept. 19th) was 1.2 mussels per starfish per 24 hours.
The results of the experiment with the sea-urchin are given in Table VII.
The rate at which the small mussels were destroyed (Sept. Ist-Sept. 5th)
was 3.1 mussels per sea-urchin per 24 hours. The rate at which the larger
mussels were destroyed (Sept. 6th-Sept. 17th) was 0.7 mussels per sea-urchin
per 24 hours. '

SUMMARY.

1. At St. Andrews the sea-mussel is preyed upon by the flounder, eel pout,
Purpura, common whelk, round whelk, starfish and sea-urchin.

2. Under experimental conditions the common whelk did not eat the mussels;
the round whelk ate a limited number of small mussels; the Purpura, starfish
and sea-urchin ate both small and large mussels freely.

SECTION: IV.

THE RATE OF GROWTH OF THE SEA MUSSEL (MYTILUS. EDUETS
L.) UNDER VARIOUS INTERTIDAL AND FLOATING CONDITIONS
AT ST. ANDREWS, NEW BRUNSWICK.

During the summer of 1919 experiments were conducted at the Biological
Station, St. Andrews, New Brunswick, to ascertain the rate of growth of the sea
mussel (Mytilus edulis L.) under various intertidal and floating conditions. For
these experiments the mussels were allowed to attach either to blocks of wood or
pieces of rock (when rock was used, that having a rough “‘honey-comb”’ surface
was selected). The most satisfactory wooden blocks used were approximately
2.5 inches wide by 8 inches long and had narrow grooves chiselled on the surface
to which the mussels attached. The edges of these grooves were left as rough
as possible, to give the mussels a surface to which they could readily fasten
themselves. The grooves also furnished some protection against wave action.
The mussels used were from 8-12 mm. in length. These young mussels attach
themselves readily. It was found that they would fasten themselves to the
rocks in from three to six hours, but for their attachment to the wooden blocks
from two to three days were required. While the mussels were attaching them-
selves the blocks (weighted to prevent floating) or rocks were placed in aquaria
and the mussels (measured) were placed over them with sufficient sea-water to
cover them to a depth of two or three centimeters. The water was renewed
frequently. Each day the mussels were left without water for periods of two
or three hours. This appeared to facilitate their attachment and also prevented
them becoming unaccustomed to exposure.

Sets of mussels were placed under the following conditions: One set was
suspended from the floating breakwater, the mussels being placed at various
levels from the surface; another set was fastened to a pole anchored to the
bottom and thus kept at an approximately constant distance from the bottom;
two other sets were fastened to the wharf at various intertidal levels, one set
being exposed to direct sunlight, the other being constantly shaded; another

set was placed in tidal pools, the pools being situated at different intertidal
levels. During these experiments it was found necessary, owing to the depreda-
tions of Purpura lapillus, to protect the mussels (by means of wire netting) on
the blocks forming the series on the wharf up to a level of 17.6 feet above low-
water datum. Similarly it was found necessary to-protect the mussels in the
lower six tidal pools, 7.e., those in the zone whose upper limit was 17.6 feet above
low-water datum. ;

TABLE VIII.

Showing rate of increase in length of Mytilus edulis L. during breakwater series experiment
in 1919.

Block 1 2 3 4 5
Depth ite etDElOW. SULLACE He. tee eles Scr aes | 1 2 3 6 9
No. Onublockuwhentset outs iily.See saeco 69 64 50 56 Pee
No. OuplOGk eA onl a sea ouster ee orto. erent a oul 38 44 18 33 aa
Pocontiee Onkblock, AM cara em rare atavsh. caer scrote + SYS (0) |b Cotsh, 0 36 | 58:8 ee
No. a blacks Sepi-7 Ohern Se oieess se wi, Fe ae hater che, heise 21 29 17 28 oe
ee ri icena: sare oes 30.4 | 44.1 34 | 51.8 56.3
rece. length in mm. when set out July 8......... 11 11 10.5 10.5 Pio
(ee TAIT PAM OAR. Arcot Teietate« trakece s60| LOO 16.3 16.3 15.6 eon.
ee: increase in length in mm. July 8-Aug. 4, 2.e., A iy
NN SIRO S one hn 3 oko es/s Need oe Oe oe e ae 5.6 5.2 5.8 5.1 4.5
is. Coe eee 10 13 6 5 Lee
ee increase in length in mm. per day, July 8- aan
ER AED eR ra Ph la actA 8) = dh « AS roar gaol. be 0.21 | 0.19.| 0.22 | 0.19 | 0.56
A fenonhsin Mme pbs Aer - oh ass kee oe Bot Pee 2oe ae 2osOne Zool i
oe increase in length in mm. July 8-Sept. 9, 2.e., ‘aie
Mi Gea Sta nw fe0s oce sd Si he ees eae Lege Sh 16.2 14.7 14.5 13.6 oO
aan examined one Ones a Poca 2 eke 12 15 ea 18 ; eg

Average increase in length in mm. per day, July 8-
SS) o1Fs 1S eo ete Ce ae CPR ne ase are cee ers ae Tee 0.25 =| O:24 4) 02232, hO.2t story,

Breakwater—Series.

In this experiment five blocks (Nos. 1, 2, 38, 4 and 5), to which measured
mussels were attached, were nailed crosswise to a scantling which was fastened
to the floating breakwater at the Biological Station in such a manner that the

blocks were at depths of 1, 2, 3, 6 and 9 feet respectively from the surface. The
results of this experiment are recorded in Table VIII. Unfortunately the whole
series was lost during the second week of October so that it was impossible to
obtain the rate of the growth late in the season.

TABLE IX.

Showing rate of increase in length of Mytilus edulis L. during anchored pole series experiment
in 1919.

3) gel Saeae Reenter api car Se 11 12 13 14 15 16 ily/ 18 19 | 20
Minimum. depth in feet from

SUTSACE sR ten ee we Roeo as 2 | 3.16) 4.32) 5.48) 6.64) 7.80) 8.80) 9.80)10.80)11.8
Number on block when set out

PUTS Ae PE oie eet Rua ek 66 | 125 ? 85 | 119 | 85 72 | 95 |14.4] 0.8
Number surviving Sept. 15..... 25 cA OLS LOM 2a 15 22 ee GG al GAs a2 eee

Percentage surviving Sept. 15...|37.8 |80.8 ? 131.7 (63.8 25.8 |81.6 |67.3 |18.8 |- 12

Average length in mm. when set
RNR Aer hae, cas tod ces] OD 9 9 9 9} 10) > 200) “LO Tones

—— ——* — | | ee

Average length in mm. Sept. 15./16.8 |17.0 |16.3 |15.8 |14.9 |16.0 |16.3 |16.4 |15.3

Average increase in mm. Aug. 4,
CHD: WTO Note sce EN Pe 723128. 00| "78 166.8 1. 941"6.07| (628 sossal aes

Number examined Sebt. 15.....} 10 27 PHY 8 17 5 19 11 2,

Average increase in lengt in
mm. per day Aug. 4-Sept. 15) 0.17/0.19 | 0.17} 0.16) 0.14) 0.14) 0.15) 0.15} 0.13

no sample taken

Average increase in length in
mm. from Aug. 4-Oct. 18,
Pele A GOLGAY Ss ke ovat deere oe 6.9 |11.0: |1272 |11.6 |13.9

Average increase per day in
length in mm. from Sept. 15
COREL PA ere ote ss nak oee net 0.091) 0.15) 0.19) 0.24

From the results of this experiment it is evident that the most advantageous
depth for the growth of the sea mussel is 1 foot from the surface. The irregularity
which is contrary to this conclusion occurring in the rate of increase in length _
at a depth of 3 feet noted on August 4th, is probably due to the small number of
measurements on which this rate is based. It will be observed also that, with
the exception mentioned above, the rate of increase in length decreases as the

25.

depth from the surface increases. It will be noted, too, that the percentage
surviving September 9th on the block 1.foot from the surface was noticeably
less than on the blocks at greater depths. The greater wave action at the
surface probably accounts for this.

Anchored Pole Series.

In this experiment ten blocks (Nos. 11 to 20), to which measured mussels
were attached, were nailed lengthwise along a pole. This pole was anchored in
the cove at the Biological Station so as to float upright ten feet from the bottom.
It was so located that the mussels were never exposed even at low water. There-
fore the mussels on this pole were at a constantly varying depth from the surface.
The results from this experiment are shown in Table IX.

Considering the results of the examination of material taken September
15th it will be seen that the greatest rate of incréase in length occurred at the
upper end of the pole and that the rate of increase in length shows a tendency
to decrease as the lower end of the pole is approached. It will be noted that
there is a considerable irregularity in the results when considered with reference
to this tendency. This is probably largely due to the fact that many of the
mussels moved from their original positions on the blocks and wedged themselves
between the blocks and the pole, thus obtaining more sheltered positions. It
was impossible when collecting the mussels for examination to make note of
these individual differences. It will be observed that the rate of increase in
length at the upper end of the-pole, viz., 0.17 mm. increase in length per day,
corresponds with that at 9 feet from the surface in the breakwater series Sep-
tember 9th.

The material collected October 18th unfortunately represents only a portion
of this series. It will be seen that it indicates that the rate of growth from
September 15th to October 18th was distinctly slower on the whole than from
August 4th to September 15th. The fact that the increase in length of the
mussels examined from the upper block was less October 18th than that of those
examined September 15th may be due to the small numbers examined September
15th. From the limited data available it is impossible to judge whether the
increased rate of increase in length observed as the depth from the surface
increases is significant or not.

Wharf Series.

In this experiment two sets of eleven blocks (Nos. Al, B1, to K1, and Nos.
A2, B2 to K2) on which measured mussels were attached were put out in two
vertical series July 4th. The blocks used were pieces of weathered shingles
about 2.5 inches wide and 10 inches long. One set of blocks (known as the south
pile wharf series) was fastened on one of the south piles of the wharf of the
Biological Station. In this location they were constantly exposed to direct
sunlight during the day. The other set (known as the below beams wharf
series) was fastened below the beams on the east side of the wharf. In this
situation the whole series was constantly shaded. Corresponding members of
each series were placed at the same level above low-water datum. The results
of the experiment are shown in Tables X. and XI.

It will be noted that the highest level above low-water datum at which the
mussels survived until July 31st was 19.2 feet in the sunny exposed location
(7.e., south pile wharf series) and 21.0 feet in the shaded location (7.e., below
beams wharf series). It will be seen; also, that the number surviving at any
level was small. This was due to two causes, viz., the mussels were set out on
shingles which furnished unsuitable surfaces for firm attachment and they were
unprotected from the depredations of the Purpura, which wrought great havoc
among them, especially at the lower levels.

TABLE X.

Showing upper limit of survival of Mytilus edulis L. during the first south pile wharf series
experiment in 1919.

13Y LoXe) "ei ie re yh ena AEST Pah AL) BE. (Cl. Dal VE. | Fas Giles seieaa ie K1.

Height in feet above low water datum.} 9.5/11.1/12.7/14.2/15.9 17.6119.2121.0/22.6 24. 3/26.0
Rea length in mm. when set out el a) Palais Gee

Pty Aeon pe oe ok ole Pee vio werd LO DAD 22 12 1D 10 5 O p51 1 eee ee
No. set out on block July 4...:. ge ...| ? ? > ? ? P7859 | 57ers
5 ip, [On Se Stan eee an a oa ‘90 | 17 (16 (49 ?)| P| |e |e eee
jill ee PP PPP
28 Maral . acer egrets: eee 25rd Te 22 CoM sese Wh ee ap eer ene
oan ULE ae eee ene 20} 12 | 14 | 28 | 11 | 48 | 22 | 21 | 43 [rae | 54
ate Near pleclessacpeit ste ees eee 1 Ree G7] 24s el AS roe |= Oia) MO een Ses
ec z ves le* SS |g oe IE IE Ea | a | | | rs
Ze Biotal eae rate. Salaries oy sae 21 | 15 | 205). 32 4, 12) 52°|'25 4 21 || 43124 aee
£2 (On Block. ccisehenceel Bl alia 2) opel 3-5: ol neat
Be inehiocde) kk he este
See | ed (8 oe a (a ae a ae |
a ABEL Se ete spree ed Bie rk oe 5.38 War 8 Oy 218. | Salk O02 erie
Pitiecjaanee July eee nt Os Heel ct a Bae <7 so as Sa e! Pal e 0 ae 0

Note.—Numbers marked * included a large proportion of dead mussels.

So few of the first sets survived until July 31st that two other sets (blocks
Nos. A3, B3 to 13 and A4, B4 to L4) were put out in the same locations, but on
the type of blocks used in the anchored pole series. In addition to the grooves
on the surface to which the mussels attached these blocks had holes bored in
these surfaces to provide greater protection. The blocks within the zone of
activity of the purpura (7.e., up to 17.6 feet above low-water datum) were also
protected by wire cages. The results obtained in the second south pile wharf
series are given in Table XII.

TABLE

XI.

Showing upper limit of survival of Mytilus edulis L. during first below the beam series

experiment in 1919.

ERlONGlerevrancee ford P we Siaerg sek oe Soph eee AQ) B24| E222). 2) P20) G2" | 2 125 Ke
Height mi feet above low water datum | 9.5/11.1/12.7|14.2)15.9/17.6/19.2)21.0/22.6/24.3 26.0
Average’length in mm. when set out | a
Alloy te ee ease sh ots Wt eb! 8 WO ay eC | TEN | ETE SU Te | OU val aye abe alal
Number ae ece when set eee 51 Phin 54 58 | 49 | 37 69 29 “42 sae
Raber Surwiving-|uly Tc:<seee 0.5: 34 | 16 | 44 | 44 | 29 | 44] 11 | 58 | 25 | 388 “oF :
Number surviving July 15.........:.. 6 Cay ]] TE Ne) ae ey 27 10) a4 o5*
Number surviving July 381........... | ? BS sta ON PI se PAN ee Oe. alge

Note.—Numbers marked * included large proportion of dead mussels.

TABLE

XII.

.Showing rate of increase in length of Mytilus edulis L. during second south pile wharf series

experiment in 1919.

Block A3

Height in feet above low water
Bey abUsilerters = ee cfre meyer 9.5

Average length in mm. when set

OUI Ont HN nel 9
Nee bee SEC GME ee erasures 95
Mice surviving Aug. BAS 94
ee surviving Sept. 1..... ?
Maes surviving Sept. 16.... 50
ee recovered Oct. 28..... 94

14.2

E3 F3 G3 H3 | 13

15.9} 17.6) 19.2] 21.0/22.6

75 45 ? i; ?
? ? 29 >? 126
? ? 3 15 | 3

Percentage recovered Oct. 28... 99

Average length in mm. Oct. 28. 10.8

Average increase in length in
mm. from Aug. 19 to Oct. 1.8
Ss 4:CreInE DORCAS. ¢ ws. = =<

Average increase in length in

mm. per day from Aug. 19 | 0.036) 0.071) 0.033

COLOCER ZS etre see See ye

B3 C3
te Ae 12257,
9 9
84 84
80 80

? ?

? ?
59 44
70.4) 52.3
12.5) 10.6
Sr Ole LG

30.4

0.015

ZAM ds no! | MaiOlln One

O57 Ol 2 TOC Seo: t

0.015} 0.024) 0.036)0.0028

It will be observed that in the second south pile wharf series experiment, the
mussels survived at 21 feet above low-water datum, while in the first south pile
wharf series experiment, the highest-level at which they survived was 19.2 feet
above low-water datum. This was probably due to the fact that during the
second experiment the weather was cooler than during the earlier one. The
second set was, therefore, not exposed to as high a temperature when uncovered
as the first set. It will be noted also that the number surviving shows a decided
tendency to decrease as the exposure to which the mussels were subjected in-
creases. The irregularities occurring in the percentage, surviving at the higher
levels, is probably due to slight differences in the various blocks favouring attach-
ment and protection for the mussels. It will be seen, also, that the rate of growth
shows a tendency to be higher at the lower levels than at the higher ones. While
this tendency is evident, it is subject to several irregularities. Since the rate for
block ‘‘G3”’ is based on only three mussels is of little value and is probably too
high.

Unfortunately, owimg to some misunderstanding of instructions, the second
below-beams-wharf series was not preserved at the same time as the second
south-pile-wharf series, but instead was left until November 21st. Consequently
it is impossible to compare the rate of growth at the various levels as had been
intended. The rate of growth per day is not very significant either, since growth
(as will be shown later) was at most very slow during November. The results
of the experiment are given in Table XIII.

TABLE XIII.

Showing rate of increase in length of Mytilus edulis L. during second below beams wharf

series experiment in 1919. .
Block AA| B4i! C4) D4 | B4) F4G4 7 H4 14
Height in feet above low water datum... sor 11.0 12.6 14.1 15.8 17.4 19.1 21 22.6
ie length in mm. when set out ae ea ee bos ce
PAU SOS eer 3 SG she theeteers see ees 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Nutiber BEL OME ais foo ere aie te Stee 56 91 70. 95 “on 95 72 76 “67,
ae recovered Nov. 21, '19........ 35° 55 “36. 22 me 9 ey 4 wee
eee. recovered Nov. 21, ’19...... 62.5 60.4 51.4 23.1 15 9.5 ar 5.3 a
Aas length in mm. Nov. 21........ 13.9 13-7 13.0 13-2 10.7 il & =. Theil a

Average increase in length in mm. from
Aug-19 to Nev..2! #.¢., m'94 days... 1) 3.9)! 3.7 3.0) 82) | k0n a deat eee ee

It will be seen that in this series the highest level at which the mussels
survived was 21 feet above low-water datum, 7.e., at the upper limit or survival
in the second south-pile-wharf series experiment, and in the first below-beams-
wharf series experiment.

5 rE a 29

The writer has no data available to account for the non-survival of any
mussels on block ‘‘G4.’’ It is probably purely due to accident. It will be noted
that the percentage of mussels surviving and their increase in length decreases
as the level above low-water datum increases and that the percentage surviving
at the higher levels is very small. It is evident, therefore, that exposure is
detrimental to the growth of the mussel.

TABLE. XIV.

Showing conditions in tidal pool series experiment in 1919.

o a = 2 o = a
seg rome ge? oO S| BR |S e-e
eee es Pe eee eee bad | Gs bese Be
dies OH oar, cine QO 4; oe o 5 oe Sia
ere ae tes |e | EB Bee lB Ie 8 aie
et » bE us oe SEE = EU SE 24
a |mis| ASS Be Se fae | eS ol, er “hk eS
PIA) 12:25 p.m.
il 7.3 6x6 36 0.33 0.25 C0 Ci =>
24.0 1:15 p.m
26.5 120 eed
2 9.3 5.5 x2.5 13.75 0.33 0.25 SG S| a
27.0 [Wi toey &
24.0 1 PAs ee
3 12.0 3x3 9 0.29 0.20 1.8 24.0 PALI P.M eg)
24.5 2:40 *
26.5 INES ieee
a 13.9 5x3 15 0.37 0.33 4.95 |— =a
27.5 3:08.55
26.2 205gien
5 15.2 6x3 18 0.20 0.12 mele |
27.0 Bis ai
28.0 136 a
6 16.7 5x 2.6 15 0.20 0.12 1.80 —————
28.5 3242) we
29.0 142 “
ve 18.1 7x2.6 18.2 0.20 0.12 Fe NS | 9 |
29.2 4:03“
28.0 je 8 a a
8 19.3 5.5 x4.5 24.75 0.41 0.25 6.39
28.0 4:03 “
20.5 U5 gene
9 20.0 4x2 8 0.37 0.25 2
18.5 Dal ea

30
Tidal Pool Series.

The tidal pools used in this experiment were shallow pools in the intertidal
zone at the Biological Station. In Table XIV. are recorded the height above
low-water datum, the surface, depth, etc., of the various pools. The temperature
observations of July 21st were taken to ascertain the maximum temperature of
the water in the pools during the experiments. July 21st was a bright sunny
day and one of the hottest of the summer. Low water occurred at noon, thus
giving the water in the pools every opportunity to become warm. The final
temperature reading for each pool was taken just before the incoming tide
entered it. With one exception (pool 9) this was the highest temperature
recorded for each pool. In pool 9 it was lower than the earlier reading. This
was due to the fact that in the morning and early afternoon the pool was exposed
to the sun, but in the late afternoon it was shaded. The temperature of the
incoming tide was 13.7° C at 4:18 p.m. Pool 3 was surrounded by sea-weed
(Fucus) and a small amount was about pool 2... The other pools were free from it.

The mussels used for this tidal pools experiment were allowed to attach
to pieces of rock sufficiently heavy to remain in the pools without shifting their
positions. The first set was put out (unprotected) in the pools July 4th. The
Purpura destroyed all those in the lower six pools so that it was necessary to
put out a new set. In Table XV. are recorded the results for the upper three
pools of the first set.

TABLE XV.

Showing rate of increase in length of Mytilus edulis L. during first tidal pool series experiment
n 1919.

Pool 7 8 g)
Bont in feet of pool above low water datum..»..,........,..... 183 19.3 20.0
Risckbee Sepoutunspoolsjulyalden aan cece ee eee e eee eee ees ? 64 Pa
Naber FECOVELEU SE pts gl Orr eather oe eevsaacs nite aie eo Bem bv Ze 55 pgeaaes
2 ae LECOVered: Sept Ll Ona as seep cus ser eaters kara aitenscounre eietiae trees P 85.9 2.9 -
foe length/in am. when isétouts|ully hie satire ccs ae serie el 11 11 Ries
en - mm. Sept. Fite “a DEN ate Sterne aut rhe ee 14.3 ye gee
eee increase in length in mm. rom July 17 to Sept. 10, 2.e., in Se

BI ACAV IS. coh Pele egtd ord tose ec iesRasetyt ok CMe. chale ptioe ae Sates Rsk She heere ees 3.3 3.3 4.6
peo increase in length in mm. per day from July 17 to Sept. 10.) 0.061 0.060 “0.084

Mussels in tidal pools were feeding as shown by carmine in water.

A second set was placed in the pools August 5th; of these the lower six
were protected by cages of wire netting. This proved effective, except in the
case of pool 3. It was found necessary August 20th to provide a fine meshed

inner cage for the mussels of this pool.

A number of the mussels were removed

from the pools September 11th, while a number were left in the pools until
October 7th, except in the case of pool 3.
the Purpura that it was necessary to remove them all from this pool September
11th. The results of this experiment are recorded in Table XVI.

TABLE XVI.

So few survived the depredations of ©

Showing rate of increase in length of Mytilus edulis L. during second tidal pool series experi-

ment in 1919.

Pool 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Height in feet of pool above

low water datum........ Cote Opo | kaO oso 1h. 2° 16.0 1s 19.3" (S20n0
Number set out in pool Aug. 5 150 68 112 86 69 51 69 60 65
Number recovered Sept. 11.../143 51 18 57 61 49 65 46 57
Percentage recovered Sept. 11.| 95.3 | 75 16.0 | 66.2 | 88.3 | 96.0 | 94.2 | 76.6 | 87.7
Number again set out in pool

SS Tara Achar an ahe: ish asy seats 103 32 0 32 23 30 41 46 24
Number recovered Oct. 7..... 82 18 21 3 28 33 22 19
Percentage recovered Oct. 7...| 79.6 | 56.2 65.6 °| 13.0 | 93.3 | 80.5-| 47.8 | 79.1
Average length in mm. when

SEE OUI PANES SO troy) aye cha 5 10.5 | 10.5 } 11 10) 6%), 10) SO 5a) 20. Ss) Age re
Average length in mm. Sept. 11} 18.5 | 12.1 | 11.3 | 11.8 | 11.7 | 12.1 | 12.6-] 12.4 | 12:6
Average increase in length in

imme. trom vue. oo sept.|( 3-00) 1.65\7 O3io 2.3.) Bes) 16) 21 1290226

1a 2.6%, ino” -dayss. ow
Number examined Sept. 11...| 40 19 18 25 38 19 24 15 33
Average increase in length in

mm. per day from Aug. 5| 0.080) 0.046) 0.087) 0.036) 0.035) 0.044) 0.058) 0.054) 0.073

COLDED tee Meee ra verevoetiaal
Average length in mm. Oct. 7.| 14.1 | 12.9 1273 11258 113-0 >\1S-3) sO) Ase
Average increase in length in

mm. from Aug.5-Oct. 7

BGx, Uh Gar GAYS cigiate cram os 3.6 | 2.4 fh Sp | 28 |e oe eae aoe m teens
Number examined Oct. 7..... 82 18 21 2 28 33 22 19
Average increase in length in

mm. per day from Aug. 5

TOOCE or eco aise ne 0.056} 0.038 0.028! 0.035! 0.049) 0.037; 0.040! 0.067

It will be seen that the rates of increase in length of the mussels in these —
pools show no correspondence to the differences existing among the pools regard-
ing their surfaces, depths, volumes, maximum temperatures attained, or amount
of exposure between tides.

Anchored Float Series.

An attempt to determine the time at which growth became very slow was
made. A number of blocks to which measured mussels were attached were set
out in the middle of September. These were fastened to an anchored float, so
that they were submerged near the surface. The blocks were taken in at intervals
of about two weeks after October 18th until December 5th. The results obtained
(given below) show that after Nov. 4th growth was very slight.

Date of Average length
examination of mussels in mm. No. examined

(When set out

middle of Sept.) 12 13
Oct. 18, 719 15.2 20
Nov. 4, 719 17.4 20
Nov. 18, 19 ae 23
Dec. 5, 719 Le,

SUMMARY.

1. The greatest rate of growth occurred in mussels constantly submerged
1 foot from the surface.

2. The rate of growth in constantly submerged mussels decreases as their
distance below the surface increases.

3. The rate of growth of mussels subjected to exposure between tides
decreases as the amount of exposure increases.

4. The rate of growth of mussels in tidal pools at various intertidal levels
varies, but apparently irregularly.

5. The rate of growth of mussels in intertidal pools and in locations where
they are subject to intertidal exposure is much less than that in any location
where they are constantly submerged.

6. The upper limit at which mussels survive at St. Andrews when subject
to intertidal exposure is between 19.2 and 21.0 feet above low-water datum,
depending on the conditions of shelter of their location.

7. When subjected to intertidal exposure the percentage of mussels surviving
is much less near the upper limit of survival than at the lower levels.

8. Growth became exceedingly slow during November in 1919.

SECTION? Y.
FACTORS GOVERNING THE DISTRIBUTION.

The distribution of the mussel beds in the littoral zone at St. Andrews, N.B.,
presents an example of a nice balance among the various factors which affect
their existence. In Section IV. it was shown clearly that the rate of growth is

greater when the mussel is never exposed yet the sea mussel has not been found
of recent years in the St. Andrews region below low-water datum.

A consideration of the distribution of its chief predatory enemies shows how
delicately adjusted is the balance determining the lower limit of the beds. Below
low-water datum the mussels are constantly menaced by their enemies among the
fish, and by the'starfish, sea-urchins and whelks. The mussels above low-water
datum, when exposed by the tide, are entirely free from fish depredations and
the menace from starfish, sea-urchins and whelks is at least greatly lessened.
This weakening of the action of their enemies is sufficient to allow the mussels
to form beds in the littoral zone, although there they must endure the detrimental
effects of exposure between tides as well as the attacks of the Purpura and the
occasional attacks of crows and gulls. The upper limit of the beds is evidently
determined by the effect of exposure on the young mussel larvae since primarily
the beds are formed by the development of the young mussels where they settle
when leaving the free-swimming mode of life. Which is the detrimental factor
acting during exposure that determines the death of the young mussel the writer
has not investigated. It may be the action of light, heat (and consequent
drying), or lack of food, etc., or the combinétion of all these. The upper limit
of the beds is naturally not as sharply defined as the lower one since the protection
against exposure is not equal in all locations and since also drifting mussels
detached during storms may fasten themselves and survive above the upper
limit at which the younger ones would be killed.

In concluding, the writer wishes to-express her indebtedness to Professor A.
G. Huntsman (under whose direction the work was undertaken) for many helpful
suggestions during the conduct of the work, and to the various assistants at the
Biological Station, particularly Capt. Mitchell and Engineer Bartlett, whose
hearty co-operation was invaluable.

LITERATURE.

CLEMENS, WILBERT A. and CLEMENS, Lucy S.
1921. Contribution to the Biology of the Muttonfish, Zoarces anguillaris.
Contributions to Canadian Biology, Ottawa (69), 1921.
DETWEILER, JOHN D. ;
1915. Preliminary notes on the mollusca of St. Andrews and vicinity, New
Brunswick. Contributions to Canadian Biology, 1911-1914, Fasci-
culus 1, pp. 43-46.
FIELD, IRVING A.
1911. The food value of sea mussels. Bulletin of U.S. Bureau of Fisheries,
Vol. XXIX. (1909), 1911, pp. 85-128.
GANONG, W. F.
1885. On the zoology of the invertebrate animals of Passamaquoddy Bay.
Bulletin of the Natural History Society of New Brunswick, No. IV.,
pp. 87-97.
1887. Marine mollusca of New Brunswick, Ibid., No. VI., pp. 17-61.
1889. The economic mollusca of Acadia. Ibid., No. VIII., pp. 1-116.

Gow Lp, A. A.
1870. Report of the Invertebrata of Massachusetts. Second edition, edited
by W. G. Binney, VIII+524 pp. 12 pl. Boston.
HuntTsnMAN, A. G.
1920. A letter to the writer under date January 10, 1920.
Seorn, i TH:
1901. Food of the sea-urchin (Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis). Con-
tributions to Canadian Biology, 1901, pp. 49-54.
STIMPSON, W.
1854. Synopsis of the Marine Invertebrata of Grand Manan, or the region
about the mouth of the Bay of Fundy, New Brunswick, Smithson-
ian Contributions, Vol. VI., 1854.
SuMNER, F. B. OsBurN, R. C., and Cote, L. J.
1913. A biological survey of the waters of Woods Hole and vicinity. Bulletin
of U.S. Bureau of Fisheries, Vol. XXXI., Part I., Sec. I., pp. 11-
219; Part II., Sec. III., pp. 549-614.
VERKRUZEN, T. A.
1878. Zur Fauna von Neu-Schottland (Nova Scotia) und Neu-Foundland.
Jahr, der Deutschen Malak. Gesell, Vol. V., 1878, pp. 208-230.
VERRILL, A. B. and SuitH, S. 1.
1873. Report upon the invertebrate animals of Vineyard Sound and the
adjacent waters with an account of the physical characters of the
region. Report of the U.S. Fish Commission for 1871-72, pp. 295-
778, pl. I1.-X XXVIII.
WiLcocKs, J.C:
1884. Improved Fishery Harbour accommodation for Great Britain and
Ireland. Fisheries Exhibition Literature, Vol. IX. Prize Essays,
Pt. II., 1884, pp. 1-113.
WinLIS: J. JR.
1863. List of Nova Scotian shells. Proceedings and Transactions of Nova
Scotia Institute of Natural Science, Vol. VII., 1888-89, Part IV.,
pp. 419-428.
WHITEAVES, J. F.
1901. Catalogue of the Marine invertebrates of Eastern Canada. Geological
Survey of Canada, Ottawa, 1901, pp. 271.

PEA ET

Photographs of Mussels, illustrating the two types. 1 and 2,
St. Andrews type from Passamaquoddy Bay: 3 and 4, Digby
type from Loggieville, N.S.

* \ ‘ ‘

roa ofa * ; ; “
( ey vie “4 w - " i y + |
ee ae pan” ‘fa Ra ce 4

a hue Od OE UR TAP Ne > eT

Ta . ri
1 Pa

ex
Lg a

The Mussel Beds of Passamaquoddy Bay Region in 1917

CuHart I.

67
\ Ys
ah eS
Ae
a= IN
PAS NS
Lives : )
de
aS
D
& 5
= ?
A > Vie
Wiger Reef :
Nay BN OOR Whark
Wary Sar Lyght
45°

goI0g oj

*
;

CHART I. MUSSEL BEDS OF THE DIGBY REGION.

|| \\| ZARGE MUSSELS

Ile [ofefe BAVE? MUSSELS

am SY. ANDREWS’ YY PE : h

BEAR JSLAND

~ bs
. = a 2
: .
i
= ’
_- .
2 ¥ »
* ‘
‘ -_
< :
¢ alts 3
+
ae - i
F i =
Ml .
: 7
a
# 4 a
7.
fim @
. i
¢ 5 “i
: «
Cae ~ Pa
1 : - .
ab) ih 4
“ * 2 -
, is ;
ar
Pa el *
eae
(i i a
ele ae
+ a Ve
Pe fal , t. z ; -
- : —
. 2 y
de
> © ’ :
a 3
¥ iv x Fy
8 é !
7*
ae
. ° bs
ee -_ 4 :
! ' in
i} 4
— z
= , ;
, = ;
yi ,
ao oe
* . << ’ be
7 '

CHART &. AMVSSEL BEDS OF GRAND MANAN /5LANOD.

STATUTE MILES

SOUTHWEST
HEAD

: a
AITTLE wood

ISLAND

| || | 2x05 WITH LARGE MUSSELS fhe
ec ISLAND

“It BARS WITHOUT MUOSELS

D THREE
ISLANDS

No. Il

THE FISHES OF THE BAY OF FUNDY
BY

A. G. HUNTSMAN,
Biologist to the Biological Board of Canada

The Fishes of the Bay of Fundy.

By A. G. HUNTSMAN,
Biologist to the Biological Board of Canada.

The Bay of Fundy is a peculiar body of water in a number of respects.
From its broad opening into the Gulf of Maine, its rather straight sides con-
verge towards its head, and at the same time the depths decrease considerably.
It has, indeed, the shape of a half cone, considerably flattened out and with
the plane surface horizontal. This shape lends itself to a very full development
of the tidal oscillations, which has made it famous for its high tides.

On its southeastern or Nova Scotian side are two very different bays.
At its mouth and opening more properly. into the Gulf of Maine is St. Mary
bay, a small edition of the Bay of Fundy itself, but with its symmetry disturbed
somewhat by two lateral openings, Grand and Petit passages, in its outer half.
Being so broadly open to the Gulf of Maine and having very little fresh water
entering it, it scarcely presents estuarine conditions, and has throughout water
of comparatively high salinity, with, in summer, the temperature steadily
rising towards its head. The Annapolis basin, on the other hand, presents
rather different conditions. Opening into the Bay of Fundy not far inward
from the level of the head of St. Mary bay by a rather narrow but deep gut,
and having as its natural prolongation to the northeast, parallel with the shore
of the Bay of Fundy, the gradually narrowing Annapolis river, which drains a
considerable area, it presents in its outer parts conditions not unlike those of
St. Mary bay, but changing rather abruptly into the estuarine conditions of
the Annapolis river.

At its head the Bay of Fundy forks, one branch consisting in succession
of Minas channel, Minas basin, and Cobequid bay, and the other of Chignecto
bay, with two branches, Shepody bay and Cumberland basin. In these waters
the tides are very heavy, and a rather gradual change to warm estuarine con-
ditions occurs.

On the northwest or New Brunswick side of the bay is an inlet, St. John
harbour, through which the major portion of the fresh water entering the bay
passes. This water comes from the St. John river, which exhibits a series of
enlargements or extensions not far from its mouth, a narrow passage through
the rock. These features result in the formation at the mouth of a falls revers-
ing with the tide, the amount of water poured through the mouth not being
sufficient to greatly alter the level of the water in the adjacent extensive reaches
of the river. Some of these reaches, as for example the Kennebecasis bay, |
are comparatively deep and the bottom water consists of. the densest water
entering the river during the year. This permits of the development of a
salt or brackish water below the nearly fresh water of the surface.

At the mouth of the Bay of Fundy on its north side where New Brunswick
and Maine meet is the inlet of Passamaquoddy bay, into which several rivers
empty, the St. Croix being the largest. A large number of islands to a great

extent block the mouth of this kay, and farther off are the Wolves islands and
Grand Manan with its retinue of smaller islands. To this region has been
given the name of Western archipelago.

It is this part of the Bay of Fundy which has been most thoroughly investi-
gated, the Canadian Atlantic Biological Station being located on the St. Croix
river near the point where it opens out into Passamaquoddy bay. At the
present time this region is virtually without certain important fishes whose
life history requires easy access to fresh water. The shad, salmon, alewife,
and striped bass are now quite rare, although they were formerly abundant
(see Atkins, 1887, p. 700). The action of the heavy tides through the archi-
pelago mixes the water rather thoroughly, and determines cool surface conditions.
Warm water species are notably absent except as strays, for example, the pipe-
fish, cunner, sand flounder (Lophopsetia), and butterfish (Poronotus). On the
other hand deep water forms occur far into ‘the inlet and in shallow water. The
wrymouth (Cryptacanthodes) lives in the intertidal zone, the rosefish and thorny
skate go far into the St. Croix river, the hagfish (/yxine) enters Passamaquoddy
bay, and the rat-tail (Macrourus) is sometimes found at the surface in the
approaches to the bay. Another effect of the unusual conditions is the presence
in this district regularly each year of enormous quantities of young herring,
giving rise to the sardine fishery which is centred in the Western archipelago.
In the outer waters of this district the young herring, and to some extent even
the older herring, may be obtained throughout the year, an evidence of the
equalness of the temperature. The rather peculiar character of the water seems
to be associated with the practical absence of the larve of fishes having pelagic
eggs, although many of the eggs themselves may be found more or less regu-
larly. This fact demonstrates the failure of the district as a spawning ground
for these species, which must occur, therefore, only as immigrants in stages
later than larvee. As compared with other parts of the Canadian Atlantic
coast, Passamaquoddy bay supports at least two invertebrates, whose proper
home is farther south, these being the starfish, Asterias forbesi, and the Ascidian
Caesira manhattensis. In the group of the fishes there are no particularly south-
ern species that are endemic in the bay. On the contrary, it supports a northern
form, Myoxocephalus scorpius, that is absent from the warmer bays of the coast.

The Kennebecasis bay on the St. John river, some distance above the re-
versing falls, presents conditions not occurring elsewhere around the Bay of
Fundy. It is the only place where we have found the medusa Aglantha and the
Amphipod Parathemisto breeding. It is interesting also that only here are the
hake (Urophycis) to be found in the winter. They are fished regularly by hook
and line through the ice as was related by Adams (1873, p. 256), who erroneously
considered these hake to be Merluccius. Cod, grayfish (Squalus), and skate
(Raia diaphanes) are sometimes taken with the hake.

The bays or basins on the Nova Scotian side of the Bay of Fundy present
warmer conditions than those on the New Brunswick side, particularly toward
their heads. Correlated with this is the occurrence endemically in these Nova
Scotian bays of such southern species as the hermit crab, Pagurus longicarpus,
and the gastropod, I/yanassa obsoleta. In Minas basin live also the crab, Libinia

emarginata, and the squid, Loligo pealei, that are not found elsewhere (except
as immigrants in the case of the latter species) on the Canadian coast. Among
the fishes there are several that appear to be endemic only on the Nova Scotian
side of the bay. Only in St. Mary bay isthe cunner (7 autogolabrus) to be found
in abundance and of all sizes. The occurrence of young pipefish (Syngnathus)
in the Annapolis river affords ground for presuming that that species is a regular
resident of the Annapolis basin at least. The butterfish (Poronotus) and the
sand flounder (Lophopsetta) seem to be permanent inhabitants of the basins
on the Nova Scotian side of the bay, and doubtless breed successfully there,
as both small and large individuals are found.

In the Bay of Fundy proper, that is, the main portion exclusive of the
tributary waters, the fish fauna shows on the whole what would be expected
from its long funnel shape, namely, a change from open salt water forms at
its mouth to brackish water forms at its head. The outer deep water basin
with a depth of more than fifty fathoms ends at the level of the mouth of the
St. John river, and the large catches of the important bottom-feeding salt water
fishes, namely the cod, haddock and hake (Urophycis), are restricted to the
shoal water bordering this deep basin, the catches decreasing rather abruptly
above this basin. All three species are caught, nevertheless, quite to the head
of the bay. On the other hand, the halibut that enter the bay exhibit a different
distribution. A moderate number reach Grand Manan, but with this exception
they are virtually absent from the New Brunswick shore. On the Nova Scotian
side they are taken from the mouth of the bay to Minas channel, although
above Digby the quantity taken is small.

Of the fishes that feed in midwater or near the surface, the pollock and
herring are the only ones occurring in large quantities. They are taken principally
in the tide rips of the Western Archipelago and of the mouth of St. Mary bay.
Moderate quantities are to be obtained quite to the head of the bay. The
swordfish scarcely enters the bay. The tuna is an uncertain immigrant oc-
curring most frequently on the Nova Scotian side, and only rarely on the New
Brunswick shore. The mackerel enters the bay fairly regularly but is almost
wholly confined to the Nova Scotian coast and is of quite uncertain local oc-
currence even there. As compared with the mouth of the bay or the exposed
coast it is usually taken in as great or even greater abundance far up the bay
or inside the basins. The grayfish (Squalus) has a somewhat similar distribution,
but invades the waters of the New Brunswick coast more regularly than does
the mackerel.

Of the fishes spawning in fresh water only two, namely the salmon and
the shad, enter the Bay of Fundy proper to any extent. The bass, alewife,
smelt and tomcod scarcely pass out of the estuaries. The shad and the salmon
migrate out into the salt water of the bay, the latter going considerably farther
than the former. Their distribution in the bay is in relation to the rivers from
which they come. On the New Brunswick side the chief river is the St. John.
From its mouth the salmon and shad are distributed along the coast for some
distance to the southwest, but it is the exception for many even of the salmon
to be taken beyond Point Lepreau. They are, practically speaking, absent

to the northeast. In Chignecto bay at the head of the Bay of Fundy occur
the salmon originating in its tributary rivers. These salmon are most abundant
on the southeast or Cumberland shore, and perhaps even migrate to some
extent around Cape Chignecto into Minas channel. The Minas basin system
furnishes a large number of both salmon and shad. The latter are caught as
far out as Minas channel, but the former go much farther, being taken along
the coast of Kings and Annapolis counties, apparently as far at times as Digby
gut. The majority of these outside of fresh water are taken on the north shore
of Cobequid bay, and on the south shore of Minas channel and its continuation
in the Bay of Fundy, that is, the coast of Kings county. The salmon of the
Annapolis basin are taken in salt water principally along the coast of Digby
county southwest from Digby gut.

There is evidently a distinct tendency for the salmon and shad to spread
along the coast oceanward from the mouth of the estuary, that is in the Bay
of Fundy to the southwest toward the Gulf of Maine.

Although our knowledge on this point is far from complete, it is already
evident that a large proportion of the species of fishes occurring in the Bay of
Fundy do not pass through their entire life history in that bay and its tributary
waters, and may therefore be considered as immigrants. Each species presents
a more or less special case, but we may make a provisional classification of all
the species on this basis. Such a classification is admittedly artificial and
subject to revision.

A. Species endemic in the Bay of Fundy and its tributary waters.

1.. Species endemic in the Western Archipelago and its tributary waters.
Apeltes, Aspidophoroides, Clupea, Coregonus, Cryptacanthodes, Cyclopterus,
Fundulus, Gasterosteus aculeatus_and bispinosus, Hemitripterus, Liopsetta, Liparts,
Lumpenus, Menidia, Microgadus, Morone, Myoxocephalus aeneus and scorpius,
Myxine, Neoliparis, Osmerus, Petromyzon, Pholis, Pomolobus pseudoharengus,
Pseudopleuronectes, Pungitius, Salmo, Salvelinus, Sebastes, Ulvaria, and Zoarces.
31 species.

2. Species occurring, if at all, in the Western Archipelago only as immi-
grants: j

Actpenser, Alosa, Lophopsetta, Myoxocephalus octodecimspinosus, Pomolobus
aestivalis, Poronotus, Raia erinacea, Roccus, Syngnathus, and Tautogolabrus.
10 species.

B. Immigrants in the Bay of Fundy.

1. Decidedly northern species:

Anarhichas minor, Cetorhinus, Eumicrotremus, Gymnocanthus, Mallotus, Somni-
osus, and Triglops. 7 species.

2. Species endemic in the latitude of the Bay of Fundy:

Ammodytes, Anarhichas lupus, Brosmius, Enchelyopus, Gadus, Glyptocephalus,
Hippoglossoides, Hippoglossus, Isurus, Limanda, Lophius,:Lycodes, Macrourus,
Maurolicus, Melanogrammus, Merluccius, Pollachius, Raia diaphanes, radiata,
and stabuliforis, Scomber, Scomberesox, Squalus, Thunnus, Urophycis tenuis and
chuss, Vulpecula, and Xiphias. 28 species.

3. Decidedly southern species.
Albula, Anguilla, Archosargus, Brevoortia, Carcharias, Car oon, Galeorhinus,
Mola, ore medtocris, Prionotus, Stenotomus, and Tautoga. 12 species.

In the following account of the various species we give in brief form the
present knowledge of their distribution in the Bay of Fundy, and of their oc-
currence at various stages in their life history, as well as an indication of the gear
by which the adults may be taken. Very little has been published concerning
the fishes of the Bay of Fundy, therefore this account is mainly based upon
the investigations that have been made from the Canadian Atlantic Biological
Station at St. Andrews, New Brunswick. Only the waters within easy reach
from the Station have been at all thoroughly examined, and they are the same
as those whose fish fauna has been made known through the labours of collectors
of the United States Fish Commission with Eastport, Maine, as a base. The
fishes of the remainder of the bay are known to us largely through special ex-
peditions from the Station, namely, that in August and September, 1916, to
St. Mary bay, Yarmouth, St. John and the Annapolis basin; that in the summer
of 1919 to St. Mary bay; and that in September, 1920, to Minas channel and
basin. To Professor Philip Cox, of Fredericton is due the credit for identifica-
tion of much of the material that has been collected as well as for an active
share in its collection, and to Mr. A. H. Leim of the University of Toronto
we are indebted for information as to the species taken in the weirs at Scotsman
bay, Minas channel, where he was engaged in a study of the shad during the
summer of 1920. Through the courtesy of Mr. W. A. Found, Assistant Deputy
Minister of Fisheries, Department of Marine and Fisheries, we have been able
to obtain from the Fishery Officers specimens of fishes from their respective
districts. We may mention Mr. B. B. Brittain. of St. John, Captain Edward
Chute, of Harbourville, Kings County, N.S., Mr. J. G. D’Entremont, of Pubnico,
Yarmouth County, N.S.; Mr. W. A. Fraser, of Grand Manan, and Mr. T. C.
Rose, of Urbania, Hants county, N.S.

Myxine limosa, Girard.

Not uncommon on soft mud bottom and rather deep water in the Bay of
Fundy. It has been recorded from Grand Manan (Putnam, 1874, p. 129%
Goode and Bean, 1895, p. 3) and from Eastport (Kendall, 1908, p. 1). From
a number of records we may mention the following: Off Head harbour, Cam-
pobello island, 60 fathoms, August, 1911; off Fish head, Grand Manan, June,
1912; off Bliss island, 35 fathoms, July, 1912; off Campobello island, 50 fathoms,
January and February, 1919; Passamaquoddy bay, 18 fathoms, April 16, 1919.
The egg has been obtained off Campobello island, but no young have been seen.

Petromyzon marinus, L.

Not seen very often. Perley (1852, p. 225) gives it for the St. John river,
and Cox (1898, p. 42) described it as occurring on squirrel-hake in Kennebecasis
bay. Mr. Leim has found the larve very abundant in the Shubenacadie river.
Dr. Cox has obtained the adults in the Passamaquoddy region, and Kendall
(1908, p. 1) records it from Eastport.

Galeorhinus laevis (Valmont)
syn. Mustelis canis.

A single specimen was taken on a long line in the St. Croix river near the
Biological Station in July, 1918. An immigrant from the south.

Vulpecula marina, Valmont

syn. Alopias vulpes.

Perley (1852, p. 222) mentions it as frequent in Cumberland and Minas
basins, and Kendall (1908, p. 6) records it from Eastport.

Carcharias taurus, Raf.
syn. C. littoralis.

Taken in a weir near St. Andrews, Passamaquoddy bay, in 1913. A stray
from the south.

TIsurus (Lamna) nasus (Bonn.)
syn. Lamna cornubica.

Reported from Passamaquoddy bay by Prince and MacKay (1901).

Carcharodon carcharias (L.)

Goode (1884, p. 679) has reported it from Eastport.

Cetorinus maximus (Gunn.)

Perley (1852, p. 222) reported a specimen taken off Musquash harbour,
St. John county, in August, 1851, and Verrill (1871, p. 6) reported three specimens
as having been taken near Eastport and Lubec in 1868.

Sgualus acanthias, L.

Of somewhat uncertain occurrence and few in number in Passamaquoddy
bay, not being found every year. Appears fron the end of July to the end of
August (by the first of July in the Bay of Fundy) and leaves by the end of
October. Only adults are seen. The females contain eggs in an early stage,
or well developed young with the yolk not yet all absorbed, but no intermediate
stages. More abundant in the Bay of Fundy, particularly on the east coast.
Observed in Minas channel, at Harbourville, Kings County, in St. Mary bay,
and at Port Maitland, Yarmouth County. As none smaller than a length of
56 cm. has been observed, there is nothing to indicate that it breeds in the
Bay of Fundy. Taken on long lines and in gill nets.

Somniosus microcephalus (Bl. & Schn.) .

Kendall (1908, p. 10) has reported this species from Eastport. Dr. Cox |
obtained two specimens in 1915, one from a weir in Passamaquoddy bay, and
the other from long lines set in the North channel off Campobello island during
the first week in June. An immigrant from the north.

Raia erinacea, Mitchill.

Very abundant in the Bay of Fundy and Passamaquoddy bay, occurring
in the latter from May to December or even January, and in the Bay of Fundy
somewhat longer. Young skates have never been found in Passamaquoddy
bay, but what appear to be the young of this species have been taken just out-
side Passamaquoddy bay off Campobello island in 50 fathoms, although only
during February and March. Similar young skates were taken in Minas chan-
nel in September, 1920. Doubtless the head of the Bay of Fundy is a breeding
ground from which the young descend toward the mouth of the bay during
winter. Taken in seines, weirs, shrimp and beam trawls and on long lines.
Also observed in Minas channel and basin, at Harbourville, Kings County, and
in Annapolis basin and St. Mary bay. Perley (1852, p. 225) reported it from
Grand Manan.

Raia diaphanes Mitchill.
syn. R. ocellata.

Abundant both in the Bay of Fundy and Passamaquoddy bay, occurring
in the latter from May until November. No young are seen, but the half
grown are difficult to separate from R. erinacea. Taken in weirs and shrimp
trawl, and on long lines. Also in Minas channel and St. Mary bay.

Raia radiata, Donovan.

Frequently taken with the other skates in Passamaquoddy bay from May
to November, but never in shallow water, always in depths of 10 fathoms or
more. It seems to remain in the Bay of Fundy throughout the winter, as we
obtained it off Campobello island in February and March of 1919, the only
adult skates which we secured at that time of the year. Captured in the shrimp
trawl and on long lines. We have also taken it in St. Mary bay, but only in
the deeper water (20 to 30 fathoms). No young, identified as this species,
have been taken. Cox (1896 a, p. 75) reports having obtained it off St. Martins
in St. John county, near the head of the Bay of Fundy.

Raia stabuliforis, Garman
syn. R. laevis Mitchill.

Adults of this species are never abundant, but are found very generally
in Passamaquoddy bay and the Bay of Fundy. In the former they are to be
found from May until November, and somewhat longer in the latter. No young
have been found. Taken in weirs and shrimp trawl, and on long lines, or
captured almost stranded by the ebbing tide in shallow water. Also taken in
Minas basin and channel, at Morden, Kings county, and in St. Mary bay.
Jones (1879, p.97) with Gilpin as authority, reported it from the Nova Scotian
coast in the Bay of Fundy, and Perley (1852, p. 224) gave near the eastern end
of Campobello island and the Annapolis basin as localities for its occurrence.

Acipenser sturio, L.

In the St. John river and doubtless in the rivers at the head of the Bay of
Fundy. Mr. Leim observed two small sturgeons, doubtless of this species,
taken in Scotsman bay, Minas channel, in 1920. They are known also in the
Annapolis river, which they are said to ascend as far as Middleton.

Anguilla chrisypa, Raf.

Elvers have been taken in the open water of Passamaquoddy bay in April
and are found ascending the streams during the summer. The adults are
common in all the accessible fresh waters and in much of the brackish water,
but are rarely taken in the salt water. This is well shown by the results of our
comprehensive operations in St. Mary bay in 1919. While elvers— 6 cm. long—
were obtained at Sandy cove and Brighton, the adults were taken only at the
head of tide in the Sissibou river and in the stream at Little River. Also in
St. John and Annapolis rivers and at Pubnico, Yarmouth county.

Albula vulpes (L.)

Recorded by Halkett (1913, p. 45) from Black’s Harbour in Charlotte
county. Doubtless a Gulf Stream immigrant.

Clupea harengus, L.

Common nearly everywhere in the bay, the young passing far up the estu-
aries. The young, known as sardines, are extremely abundant near the mouth
of the bay, but chiefly on the New Brunswick side, and centreing in the Western
Archipelago. Spawning at the present time seems to be limited to the autumn,
and to take place at the mouth of the bay (Grand Manan and southern Nova
Scotia) and at its head in Minas basin. The adults are largely restricted to
the same region. The young leave Passamaquoddy bay during the winter,
but may be taken just outside in the Bay of Fundy all winter, as may also
the adults. Taken in seines, weirs, gill nets and shrimp trawl.

Pomolobus mediocris (Mitchill)

Perley (1852) reported this species from near Campobello island, but we
have never observed it. A doubtful record.

Pomolobus pseudoharengus (Wilson)

Abundant at some points, but restricted to the neighbourhood of rivers
suitable for spawning. The young are frequently met with, and appear to
travel far in salt water, as we have taken them in water 50 fathoms deep, off
Campobello island in December of 1917, and again in March of 1919. Rare
in Passamaquoddy bay at the present time. Taken also at St. John, in Kenne-
becasis bay; in Minas channel, at Harbourville, Kings county; in Annapolis
basin and St. Mary bay; and at Port Maitland and Yarmouth. Taken in
seines, weirs, gill nets, and shrimp trawl.

Pomolobus aestivalis (Mitchill).

Seemingly restricted to the larger rivers. Cox has found it in the St. John
river, and we have had specimens from St. John harbour and the Shubenacadie
river. However, Bensley (1901, p. 61) has reported it doubtfully from Passa-
maquoddy bay, and Kendall (1908, p. 39) has recorded it from Eastport in
two collections.

Alosa sapidissima (Wilson)

Spawning in the large accessible rivers, as the St. John, Petitcodiac, Shu-
benacadie and Annapolis, its distribution in salt water being restricted largely
to the regions near the mouths of these rivers. Rarely taken in Passamaquoddy
bay, where it must be considered as a stray from the St. John, whose fishery
does not extend beyond the border of the county at Lepreau. The shad from
the Shubenacadie and neighbouring rivers go to sea for a greater distance,
probably owing to the peculiar hydrographic conditions at the head of the bay.
The fishery extends through Minas basin and channel to the Annapolis county
line or farther. Taken in gill nets and weirs. Formerly in the St. Croix river

(Atkins, 1887, p. 700). :

Brevoortia tyrrannus (Latrobe).

Perley (1852, p. 208) referred to this species being sometimes taken in the
weirs in St. John harbour, and in 1919 we received from Overseer Brittain a
specimen of this species taken in that harbour on August 12th. We have never
seen it in the Western Archipelago. Kendall (1908, p. 40) gives Goode, 1877,
as authority for its occurrence in Passamaquoddy bay, which seems at variance
with Goode’s account of the species in 1884. An immigrant from the south.
Coregonus quadrilateralis, Richardson.

Two specimens of a Coregonus doubtfully identified as this species by Dr.
Cox, were seined in mid-channel at the mouth of the Sissibou river, St. Mary
bay, on September 8, 1919. In James and Husdon bays it is customary to find
whitefish and ciscos in brackish or salt water, but this appears to be the first
recorded instance of this kind for our Atlantic coast.

Oncorhyncus gorbuscha (Walbaum).

This Pacific species has been introduced by the United States Bureau of
Fisheries into the waters of northern New England. The fish have been ob-
served at Lubec and in Cobscook bay (Fisheries Service Bulletin, No. 67, 1920).
Humpback salmon were reported to have been taken in weirs in Passamaquoddy
bay, both in 1919 and in 1920, but we were unable to secure any specimens for
examination.

Salmo salar L.

Its abundance in the salt water is determined by the proximity of a river
system suitable for spawning. Now rare in the Western Archipelago since-
the damming of the St. Croix river, the few that are taken being doubtless

strays from the St. John river or escaped fish from the landlocked form that is
to be fouad in the Chamcook and other lakes of the district. The St. John
river provides a fishery along the coast of the Bay of Fundy chiefly to the south
west from St. John harbour. The rivers of Minas basin provide a fishery not
only in the basin, but through Minas gut into Minas channel and down the
coast of Kings and Annapolis counties. The sea fishery provided by the Anna-
polis river is relatively unimportant.

Salvelinus fontinalis (Mitchill).

Abundant in many of the streams around the bay. We have never obtained
it in the salt or brackish water around the Bay of Fundy, as it may be obtained
in the southern part of the Gulf of St. Lawrence.

Mallotus villosus (Miiller).

Of very irregular occurrence in the Bay of Fundy. Perley in his investi-
gations of the Bay of Fundy obtained reports (1852, p. 136 and 1388) of its
occurrence on the coast of St. John county, at a number of points all east of
St. John. None have been taken there in recent years although the tradition
persists.

In the Western Archipelago we have obtained several records in recent
years. In May, 1915, and again in October, 1916, a few were taken among
small herring in the approaches to Passamaquoddy bay. In October and Novem-
ber of the latter year, they were taken in rather large numbers in the herring
weirs in the Passamaquoddy region (Kendall, 1917, p. 28). From fishery
officers reports of their occurrence about that time at a number of points along
the coast of Charlotte county, but not at Grand Manan island, have been
obtained. The only other part of the Bay of Fundy where they were noticed
was the coast of Kings county, where large quantities are said to have been
taken in May and June of 1917, but not in 1918.

In January, February and March of 1919, we obtained a number of specimens
with the shrimp trawl in water 50 fathoms deep off Campobello island, Char-
lotte county, and in April of that year, Kendall (1919, p. 70) records that they
were taken in the Penobscot river in southern Maine.

As the capelin must be considered as invading the Bay of Fundy from the
outer coast of Nova Scotia and entering the bay at its mouth on the Nova
Scotian side, it would be expected that they should occur more frequently in
Yarmouth and Digby counties. Perley (1852, p. 164) states: ‘No capelin has
ever been seen at Brier Island.’’ The fishery officers of those counties informed
me in 1919 that no capelin are taken there. However, for the season of 1903 the
Digby reporter for the Fisheries Intelligence Bureau stated that “Caplin were
reported in good fishing on May 22,” (36th Ann. Rep. Dep. Mar. and Fish.

Fisheries, p. 307).
Osmerus mordax, (Mitchill).
Found generally around the shores of the bay, but not abundant. It is

restricted to a very narrow shore zone, and is further limited by lack of suitable
streams for spawning. We have obtained it not only around Passamaquoddy

bay, but also at the following places: outside St. John harbour, in Kennebecasis
bay above St. John, in Minas channel, Annapolis basin, and St. Mary bay,
and at Yarmouth. It is also landlocked in Chamcook and Utopia lakes, which
drain into Passamaquoddy bay. Taken in seines, weirs, gill nets and shrimp
trawls.

Maurolicus pennanti (Walbaum).

Has been recorded from Grand Manan by Cox (1896 b, p. 55) and again
by Prince (1918, p. 1143 and 1144). From Dr. Cox we have also obtained
additional records, namely, from stomach of pollock at Welchpool, July 13,
1914, and on the beach at Wilson’s Beach, July 27, 1914—both on Campobello
island. An immigrant from the midwater of the northern Atlantic.

Fundulus heteroclitus (L.)

Restricted to brackish water and hence not very common in the Bay of
Fundy. It can be obtained usually in the brackish tidal pools, as at St. Andrews.
Also in Annapolis basin and St. Mary bay. The variety macrolepidotus has
been reported by Cox (1896 a, p. 56, as F. nigrofasciatus) from the mouth of
Little river, St. John county.

Scomberesox saurus (Walbaum).
Recorded by Cox (1896 a, p. 60) as having been taken in the vicinity of
of St. Stephen. This would mean somewhere in the Western Archipelago.

We have not met with it. It has been found off southern Maine. An immi-
grant from the open ocean.

Pungitius pungitius (L.)

For the most part restricted to brackish and fresh water and consequently
rarely seen along most of the coast. Chiefly in ponds or in streams in the
intertidal zone. Taken in Passamaquoddy bay, and also in St. Mary bay.
Doubtless very general as no fish is more widespread in distribution in Canada.

Gasterosteus aculeatus, L.

Practically restricted to the brackish water, but occurring occasionally
in the saltest water, but always near the shore and near an estuary. Also
outside St. John harbour, in Kennebecasis bay and St. Mary bay, and at Yar-
mouth.

Gasterosteus bispinosus, Walbaum.

Often in company with the preceding species in Passamaquoddy and St.
Mary bays.

A peltes quadracus (Mitchill).
Restricted to the brackish water and therefore rarely met with. In the

estuaries of Passamaquoddy bay, in Kennebecasis bay, St. John, and in St.
Mary bay. Taken in the seine.

Syngnathus fuscus, Storer.

Adults have been taken on several occasions at the outlet of Passamaquoddy
bay, near Campobello island, and also in Passamaquoddy bay:—Wilson’s
Beach, autumn of 1912; Bocabec, July 4, 1912. Kendall (1908, p. 65) has
reported this species from Eastport and notes the large size of the specimen
found. No young have been found, and only very large individuals ever reach
the district from their successful breeding grounds. However, we obtained
the very young in the Annapolis basin in 1916. This and other estuaries of
the east coast of the bay are doubtless breeding centres for this species.*

Menidia notata (Mitchill).

Largely restricted to brackish water and hence not very common. In
the Western Archipelago we have only found it in warm, brackish, tidal pools.
Elsewhere not so restricted. At St. John—outside the harbour (Sheldon’s
beach), and in Kennebecasis bay. In the Annapolis basin—at Goat island
and above Annapolis. In St. Mary bay—at Brighton and in the Sissibou
river. i

Ammodytes americanus, DeKay.

Rather uncommon in the Bay of Fundy, probably from lack of suitable
sandy coast. We found it abundant at Woodward’s cove, Grand Manan, and
a single specimen has been taken at the Atlantic Biological Station in the St.
Croix river. Kendall (1908, p. 70) has taken it near Eastport. We have also
obtained it in St. Mary bay. Taken by hand at low tide and in the seine.

Scomber scombrus, L.

Usually only a few individuals are seen each season in the Western Archi-
pelago. They enter Passamaquoddy bay. On the east coast of the Bay of
Fundy they are more regularly seen and frequently in very large numbers. They
pass far up to the head of the bay and even to the New Brunswick side. A
summer immigrant, usually from June to August. No larve have been found.
The young (tinkers) occur in St. Mary bay and at Yarmouth. Eggs have not
been found in the Western Archipelago, but only in the Annapolis river. It is
doubtful whether any successful breeding takes place in the Bay of Fundy.
Taken in weirs and gill nets. Specimens examined from Passamaquoddy bay,
Harbourville, Kings county, St. Mary bay and Port Maitland.

Thunnus thynnus (L.)

An immigrant from the open ocean that appears in summer. It is fairly
regular in its appearance on the Nova Scotian side of the Bay of Fundy near
the mouth. It is occasionally seen in Passamaquoddy bay, where we have
observed it, and Kendall (1908, p. 73) has obtained it near Eastport.

*In August of 1921 Mr. Leim took both adults and young at Bass River in Cobequid bay.

Xiphias gladius, L.
Its fishery ends in Yarmouth county, and it rarely, if ever, enters the Bay
of Fundy.

Poronotus triacanthus (Peck).

Found occasionally in the Bay of Fundy and Passamaquoddy bay, but not
every season, and only in the half grown state. Large spawning individuals
have been taken in St. Mary bay in July. The larve have not been observed.
Caught in the weirs. Bensley (1901, p. 62) has reported it from Passamaquoddy
bay, Kendall (1908, p. 88) from Eastport, Cox (1896 a, p. 59) from St. John
harbour, and Goode and Bean (1879, p. 16) from the Annapolis basin, where
also we took it in 1916. Also from Scotsman bay and Canada Creek, Kings
county, and Lobster bay, Yarmouth county. It is more abundant on the
Nova Scotian side of the bay and doubtless breeds there.

Roccus linealus (Bloch)

Confined to the large warm estuaries and the neighbouring fresh water—
namely, the St. John, Shubenacadie, and Annapolis rivers with the adjacent
estuaries. We have never seen it in the Western Archipelago, although Atkins
(1887, p. 700) reports it as formerly abundant in the St. Croix river.

Morone americana (Gmelin).

In the Bay of Fundy region this species seems to be entirely land-locked,
occurring only in fresh water. It is abundant in Bocabec lake, which drains
into Passamaquoddy bay, and Perley has reported it (1852, p. 182) as occurring
in many of the lakes and streams connected with the St. John river. Kendall
(1908, p. 97) has taken it near Eastport.

Stenotomus chrysops (L.)

Knight (1867, p. 12) gives a hearsay report that ‘‘porgies are occasionally
seen in St. Mary’s bay,’’ and Kendall (1908, p. 103) has reported it from East-
port. We have not met with it. An immigrant from the south.

Archosargus probatocephalus (Walbaum).

A coastal fish of the southern States that has been reported by Cox (1896 a,
p. 71) from St. John harbour.

Tautogolabrus adspersus (Walbaum)

Very common and of all sizes in St. Mary bay, which must be a successful
breeding place and centre of dispersal. Known to the fishermen in Annapolis
basin, but not common, and taken only on lines, no small specimens being seen.
Not known to the fishermen in the Western Archipelago and very rare, only
very large specimens occurring there occasionally (Grand Manan and St. Croix
river). The eggs have been taken in Passamaquoddy bay, but no larve have
been found. Taken in seine, lobster and hoop traps, gill nets, shrimp and beam
trawls, weirs and on long lines. Also from Pubnico harbour, Yarmouth county.

Tautoga onitis (L.)

Recorded by Perley (1852, p. 191) as having been introduced into St. John
harbour, but it is not known there now. Except for a single specimen taken
in Passamaquoddy bay in 1909 or 1910, there is no evidence of its normally
entering the Fundy region.

Mola mola, Linn.

The fish has never been observed in the Bay of Fundy in the work carried
on by the Atlantic Biological Station. Cox (1896 a, p. 75) has reported it from
St. John harbour. It must only very rarely enter the Bay.

Sehastes marinus (L.)

Quite common and of all sizes in the Bay of Fundy, Passamaquoddy bay,
and the St: Croix river, at depths of five fathoms or more, the females frequently
found with eggs containing eyed young. The spawning individuals at least
move out into deep water in the latter part of the summer, when the larve can
be found at the mouth of the Bay of Fundy and up its centre for some distance.
This fish is not abundant enough for the records to be conclusive, but the latter
indicate that the adults may be in Passamaquoddy bay from April to December,
and longer outside. The young may remain in both places throughout the year.
Caught on long lines and in the shrimp trawl. Reported by Perley (1852, p.
184) to the east of St. John, and we found it in 1919 in St. Mary bay. Also
at Grand Manan and off Seal island, N.S.

Triglops ommatistius, Gilbert.

We obtained several specimens of this species in April and July 1919, in
Passamaquoddy bay, with the shrimp trawl in about 15 fathoms of water, but
otherwise we have not seen it. An immigrant from the north.

Myoxocephalus aeneus, (Mitchill).

Common in shallow water in the Bay of Fundy and at the mouth of Passa-
maquoddy bay, but véry rare in as far as St. Andrews. All sizes are found.
Common in St. Mary bay and the Annapolis basin, but rare in Minas basin,
although both adults and young were found. Taken in the seine and shrimp
trawl.

Myoxocephalus scorpius (L.)

syn. M. groenlandicus.

Very common in shallow water everywhere and of all sizes. Large indi-
viduals are occasionally taken in depths as great as 15 fathoms. A half-grown
individual was taken in 50 fathoms off Campobello island in February, 1919.
The only fish remaining near the shore during the coldest part of the year.
The larve are found as early as February and on through the spring. Taken
in weirs, seine, and gill net, and on long lines. We have taken it in the Anna-
polis basin and St. Mary bay, and at Yarmouth; also at St. John, N. B. and
Abbott’s harbour, near Yarmouth, N.S. It does not occur at the head of the
bay where collections were made east and west of Cape Blomidon.

Myoxocephalus octodecimspinosus (Mitchill).

Very common in the Bay of Fundy and in Passamaquoddy bay during
the summer in shallow water, and abundantly at moderate depths where the
previous species is rare or absent. The young have never been observed in
the Western Archipelago, but have been taken in the Annapolis basin and Minas
channel. It must in the western part of the bay be considered as a regular
immigrant. It remains in Passamaquoddy bay very late in the autumn, and
a few even appear to stay through the winter.. The half grown appear in Passa-
maquoddy bay and just outside in some years at least during the winter, although
during the summer it is practically the adults alone that are taken. Caught in
the seine, gill nets, shrimp and beam trawls, weirs, and on long lines. Observed
also in Minas channel, at Canada Creek, Kings county, and in Annapolis basin
and St. Mary bay.

Gymnocanthus tricuspis (Reinh.)
Kendall (1908, p. 124) has reported it from Eastport. A stray from the
north.

_Hemitripterus americanus (Gmelin).

All sizes from very small ones (4.6 cm. or even less) up are found, but not
in large numbers, both in the Bay of Fundy and in Passamaquoddy bay in sum-
mer. The recently hatched young have not been observed. Taken in the seine,
weirs and shrimp trawl, and on long lines. Also found in Minas channel (the
very young in Minas basin), at Harbourville, Kings county, in the Annapolis
basin and St. Mary bay, and at Yarmouth. Cox (1896 a, p. 40) states that it is
by no means rare in St. John harbour.

Aspidophoroides monopterygius (Bloch).

Found occasionally in the Bay of Fundy and in Passamaquoddy bay,
being taken in the shrimp and beam trawls in from 15 to 100 fathoms. The
larve occur in Passamaquoddy bay from April to June at least. Kendall
(1908, p. 125) has reported it in two collections from Eastport.

Cyclopterus lumpus, Linn.

Very abundant in all stages both in the Bay of Fundy and in Passamaquoddy
bay in or near floating masses of rockweed and near shore. Taken in the herring
weirs, with the seine and by hand. Found also at St. John, Canada Creek,
Kings county, in St. Mary bay and at Yarmouth. Halkett (1907, p. 340) also
has reported it from St. John harbour, Cox (1920, p. 7) from Passaniaquoddy
bay and St. John harbour, Kendall (1908, p. 126) from Eastport, and Perley
(1852) from Grand Manan.

Eumicrotremus spinosus (Miiller).

Putnam (1874, p. 338) has mentioned having seen specimens from Eastport;
and Garman (1892, p. 35) has figured a specimen taken at the same point.
A stray from the north.

Neoliparis atlanticus, J. & E.

Rather common in both the Bay of Fundy and Passamaquoddy bay, often
found clinging to lobster pots. The larve have been observed in Passama- |
quoddy bay in April.

Liparis liparis (L.)

Not uncommon in the Bay of Fundy to a depth of one hundred fathoms
and in Passamaquoddy bay in as shallow water as five fathoms, but not yet
observed in the larval stage. “Taken in the dredge and shrimp trawl. Kendall
(1908, p. 127) found it near Eastport and Cox (1896 b, p. 55) received a specimen
from Grand Manan.

Prionotus carolinus (L.)
The only record is that of a single specimen obtained at Campobello island
in August, 1911. A stray from the south.

Pholis gunnellus (L.)

5 Abundant at all stages in shallow water both in the Bay of Fundy and in
Passamaquoddy bay. The larve are obtained in the early summer. Also
taken in Minas ard Annapolis basins, St. Mary bay, and Lobster bay, Yar-
mouth county. Captured by hand at low tide, and in the seine. (Cox, 1896 a,
p. 59) found it in St. John harbour.

Lumpenus serpentinus (Storer).

In 1919 it was taken with the shrimp trawl in the Bay of Fundy beginning
in January, and in Passamaquoddy bay from April to August. It was found
in St. Mary bay-in August and September of the same year. Also taken in
the beam trawl. Larvae identified by Dr. Cox as belonging to this species have
been taken in April. Kendall (1908, p. 133) has recorded the species from
Eastport.

Ulvaria subbtfurcata (Storer).

Common among seaweed on rocky shores in the Bay of Fundy, but only
rarely found in Passamaquoddy bay. Captured by hand at low tide and in
the seine.’ Also observed in St. Mary bay.

Cryptacanthodes maculatus, Storer.

Occasionally taken on long lines in the Bay of Fundy at considerable depths.
Also found living in burrows in soft mud flats in the lower part of the intertidal
zone at the mouth of the Magaguadavic river in Passamaquoddy bay. The
larve have been taken in the latter bay in the early spring. Reported from
St. John harbour by Cox (1896 a, p. 39) and again by Halkett (1907, p. 340).

Anarhichas minor, Olafsen.
Goode and Bean (1895, p. 301) have reported this species from Eastport.

Anarhichas lupus, L.

Not uncommon at Grand Manan, and occasionally at Campobello island.
The young have not been seen. Also off Seal island, Yarmouth county. Taken
on long lines. Kendall:(1908, p. 135) lists 1t from Eastport.

Zoarces anguillaris (Peck).

Common at all stages in Passamaquoddy bay and the Bay of Fundy, being
found on hard bottom from moderately deep water to the intertidal zone, where
the younger individuals in particular can be found lurking under rocks. It
leaves Passamaquoddy bay for deeper water by October or the beginning of
November, breeding during its absence. The very young are obtained in the
spring. The adults appear at the same time, just outside the bay in April and
inside the bay in May. Taken by hand at low tide, on long lines, in lobster
pots, and in the shrimp and beam trawls. Also observed in Minas channel
and basin, and at Canada Creek, Kings county.

Lycodes verrillii, Goode & Bean.

Obtained with the shrimp trawl in the Bay of Fundy off the approach to
Passamaquoddy bay in April and May of 1919, in from 35 to 50 fathoms on a
muddy bottom, but evidently quite rare.

Merluccius bilinearis (Mitchill).

Common in midwater and near shore both in the Bay of Fundy and in
Passamaquoddy bay at all stages from yearlings on, but varying greatly in
abundance from year to year. The spent adults enter the Bay in late summer
and frequently strand on the beach during the night. They leave in the late
autumn. The immature may remain throughout the year in the Bay of Fundy.
No larvae and no very young have been found. Taken in weirs, gill nets, and
shrimp trawl, and on long lines. Also observed in Scotsman bay (Minas channel)
at Harbourville, Kings county, and in the Annapolis basin. Perley (1852, p.
213) found it to be abundant around the island of Grand Manan. Bean (1880,
p. 81) listed it from Eastport, and Cox (1896a, p. 74) reported it as occasional
in St. John harbour.

Pollachius virens (L.)

Large individuals abundant in the tide rips in the Bay of Fundy during
summer. Yearlings found in shallow water in the Bay of Fundy. Half grown
individuals enter Passamaquoddy bay in moderate numbers. No larve or very
young have been found. Specimens examined also from Canada Creek, Kings
county, St. Mary bay, Port Maitland and Yarmouth. Taken in seine and
weirs, and on long lines.

Microgadus tomcod (Walbaum).
Rather common and of all sizes near the shore, particularly near estuaries,
where the larve may be obtained in the spring. Taken in, the seine, weirs, gill

nets, shrimp trawl, and on long lines. Also observed at St. John, in Minas
channel and basin, Annapolis basin, and St. Mary bay, and at Pubnico harbour,
Yarmouth county.

Gadus callarias, L.

Abundant :at Grand Manan, but decreasing in abundance toward Passa-
maquoddy bay. All sizes from yearlings on. Chiefly the intermediate sizes
in Passamaquoddy bay. No larve have been found, although the eggs are to
be found in the spring. A few young individuals have been taken in Passama-
quoddy bay and in Minas basin in the late summer, and they appear to be fairly
common in St. Mary bay. The quantity of cod taken diminishes very rapidly
from the mouth to the head of the Bay of Fundy, but a few go very far in,
occurring in Minas basin. Taken in seine, weirs, gill nets and shrimp trawl, and
on long lines. Also at Canada Creek, Kings county, Annapolis basin, St. Mary
bay, and Port Maitland, Yarmouth county.

Melanogrammus aeglifinus (L.)

Found regularly and frequently in abundance in the Bay of Fundy and in
Passamaquoddy bay, except during the winter. Those commonly seen are
quite large. Intermediate sizes are very rare. Yearlings are occasionally
found in the Western Archipelago and at times in the cavities of Cyanea. They
have also been taken in St. Mary bay. Larvae and very young have never been
found. Taken on long lines. Records also from Hall’s Harbour, Kings county,
St. Mary bay, and off Seal island, Yarmouth county.

Urophycis tenuis (Mitchill) and
Urophycis chuss (Walbaum)

These closely related species both occur commonly in immense quantities
on soft bottom both in the Bay of Fundy and in Passamaquoddy bay during
the summer. The majority of the specimens taken seem to be referable to the
first species. All sizes from yearlings on are found. The younger individuals
appear in the spring and are found near shore and far into the estuaries, while
the larger ones keep off shore chiefly on soft bottom, occurring in depths as
great as 100 fathoms. No larvae have been found, and only a few very young
have been taken, and that in the Bay of Fundy. Also at St. John, in Minas
channel and basin, at Harbourville, in Annapolis basin and St. Mary bay,
‘and at Yarmouth. The adults enter the bay in the early summer, appearing
in Passamaquoddy bay usually some time in July. They leave in October.
They seem to enter the St. John river in the autumn. In any event they are
to be found throughout the winter in Kennebecasis bay, where they are fished
through the ice.

The younger individuals do not leave Passamaquoddy bay as early as the
adults, and in some seasons they may be found as late as the latter part of
December, and return to some extent as early as April. They remain in the
Bay of Fundy all winter. Taken in weirs, seines, gill nets, shrimp trawl, beam
trawl, and on long lines.

Enchelyopus cimbrius (L.)

Found generally, but not in abundance, chiefly in the Bay of Fundy and
occasionally in Passamaquoddy bay, at considerable depths on soft bottom.
All sizes are found. It remains throughout the year. Eggs are common in
Passamaquoddy bay in the summer, but no larvae have been obtained. The
very young are common at the surface near the centre of the Bay of Fundy in
the autumn. Taken in shrimp and beam trawls and on long lines. Also taken
in St. Mary bay and in as shallow water as 6 fathoms.

Brosmius brosme (Miiller)

Not uncommon at considerable depths on hard bottom at the mouth of the
Bay of Fundy, as at Grand Manan and St. Mary bay. Rare inside. It has been
taken at Campobello, but is not known in Passamaquoddy bay. Only adults
are found. Taken on long lines. Also off Seal island, Yarmouth Co.

Macrourus bairdii, Goode and Bean

Two records for the Bay of Fundy are available. Kendall (1908, p. 145)
records it as having been taken floating near the surface at Eastport. In 1917
a specimen taken in a weir at Lubec was sent to the Atlantic Biological Station.
The strong tidal currents through deep narrow channels at the entrance to
Passamaquoddy bay must be considered as responsible for bringing this deep
water fish to the surface.

Hippoglossus hippoglossus (L.)

In the Western Archipelago most of the halibut are taken on the outer side
of Grand Manan island, but on the east coast of the Bay of Fundy it seems to
occur in quantity well up toward Minas basin. Occasionally individuals (rather
small) are taken in Passamaquoddy bay and in the St. Croix river as far up as
the Ledge Lighthouse at least. They are too rare for their seasonal movements
to be determined, but one was taken off Campobello island in 50 fathoms on
December 22, 1917. Otherwise they have all been captured during the summer.
On July 7, 1920, a very young individual, only 31 mm. in length, was seined in
Passamaquoddy bay. Taken on long lines and in the shrimp trawl.

Hippoglossoides platessoides (Fabr.)

Quite abundant both in the Bay of Fundy and in Passamaquoddy bay in
moderately deep water (15 fathoms or more) on soft bottom throughout the year.
Large individuals are not very common. The eggs occur in the spring, but no
larvae have ever been found. Yearlings and older are common. Also taken
in St. Mary bay in 1919. Captured on long lines and in the shrimp and beam

trawls.

Limanda ferruginea (Storer)

In the Bay of Fundy region we have found it only at St. Mary bay in 1919,
and there only a few large individuals in deep water. Perley (1852, p. 217)
appears to have found it in the upper part of the bay near Parrsboro. Taken in
the shrimp trawl. It is doubtless an immigrant.

Pseudopleuronectes americanus (Walbaum)

Very abundant everywhere in shallow water and at moderate depths, going
deeper in the winter. All stages are common, the larvae most abundant near
the mouths of estuaries, where they have been taken in June and July. In
Passamaquoddy bay they may be obtained throughout the year in the deep
water (about 15 fathoms), but leave the shores in the coldest months—January
and February, except during mild winters. In the Bay of Fundy they have
been found on soft bottom at depths of from 30 to 50 fathoms only from
November to April. Taken in the seine, gill net, weirs, shrimp and beam trawls,
and on long lines. Observed also at St. John, in. Minas basin and channel, at
Harbourville, Kings Co., and in Annapolis basin and St. Mary bay.

Liopsetta putnami (Gill)

Abundant in and near estuaries in shallow water on soft bottom. All stages
can be taken. It occurs in Minas channel and the Annapolis basin, but appears
to be absent from St. Mary bay. Taken in the seine and weirs.

Glyptocephalus cynoglossus (L.)

Taken very generally in the shrimp trawl, but not in large quantities, both”
in the Bay of Fundy and in Passamaquoddy bay in moderately deep water
(15 fathoms or more) on soft bottom. The larvae have never been found, but
all stages from the time of transformation, and later, occur. As far as our
records go, they show its presence in Passamaquoddy bay from April to Novem-
ber, and in the Bay of Fundy throughout the year. Also taken in St. Mary bay
in 1919.

Lophopsetta maculata (Mitchill)

Exceedingly rare in the Western Archipelago. Bean (1880, p. 79) listed it
from Eastport, Goode (1884, p. 199) recorded it from Passamaquoddy bay, and
we secured a large individual there in 1912. No young have ever been found in
that region. Mr. Leim found it to be common at Scotsman bay in Minas channel
in 1920, and its larve also occurred there, showing that part of the bay to be
its successful breeding place and a centre of dispersal. We have also obtained
it in St. Mary bay. Taken in the seine, weirs, and shrimp trawl.

Lophius piscatorius, L.

Large individuals are frequently taken on long lines in the Bay of Fundy or
found stranded in the intertidal zone. Occasionally they have been taken in
Passamaquoddy bay and the St. Croix river. The egg masses have only rarely
(two records) been found. Only one young individual has been secured, and
that at Campobello island (Connolly, 1920, p. 14). No larvae have been ob-
served. Also captured in the shrimp trawl. It has been taken also in St. Mary
bay, Annapolis basin and Minas channel, where it seems to be not uncommon.
Previous records are,—Eastport (Kendall, 1908, p. 151); St. John harbour
(Halkett, 1907, p. 342); Great Salmon river, St. John Co., and Annapolis basin
(Perley, 1852, p. 189); Harbourville, Kings Co., and St. Mary bay (Connolly,
19203 p.-7):

LITERATURE
ApaAms, A. L.
1873. Field and Forest Rambles, with notes and observations on the natural
history of Eastern Canada. London, 1873, Pt. III. Fishes,
pp. 201-257.

TRING, C. G,
1887. The river fisheries of Maine. The Fisheries and Fishery Industries
of the United’ States... Sect. V., Vol. 1, pp. 673-725:

BEAN. [F. H.
1880. Check-list of duplicates of North American fishes distributed by. the
Smithsonian Institution in behalf of the United States National
Museum, 1877-1880. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Vol. 3, pp. 75-116.

BENSLEY, B.-A.
1901. Report on the sardine industry in relation to the Canadian herring
fisheries. Contr. Canad. Biol., 1901, pp. 59-62.

CONNOLLY, C. J.
1920. The Angler. Bull. Biol. Board Canada, No. 3.

Cox, P.
1893. Observations on the distribution and habits of some New Brunswick
fishes. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc., N.B., No. XI, pp. 33-42.
1896a. History and present state of the ichthyology of New Brunswick.
Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. N.B., No. XIII, Art. II, pp..27-75.
18965. Report on Zoology. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. N.B., No. XIV, App. p. 55.
1902. The Lumpfish. Bull. Biol. Board Canada, No. 2.

GARMAN, S.
1892. The Discoboli. Mem. Mus. Comp.- Zool. Harv. Coll., Vol. XIV,
No. 2, pp. 1-96.

GoopE, G. B.
1884. Fishes. Natural history of aquatic animals. The Fisheries and
Fishery Industries of the United States. Sect. I. Text, pp.

169-686.

Cooper, GB: and BEAN. “Lf. Hix
1879. A catalogue of the fishes of Essex County, Massachusetts, including
the fauna of Massachusetts Bay and the contiguous deep waters.
Bull: Essex Insts, Vol Xai No. 1, pp. 1-38:
1895. Oceanic Ichthyology. Spec. Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1895, xxxv,
pp. 1-529.

HALKETT, ANDREW.
1907. Report of the Canadian Fisheries Museum. App. No. 14, 40th Ann.
Rep. Dep. Marine and Fisheries, Fisheries Branch, pp. 321-349.
1913. Check list of the fishes of the Dominion of Canada and Newfoundland,
pp. 7-138.

Jones, J. M.
1879. List of the fishes of Nova Scotia. Proc. Nov. Scot. Inst. of Nat. Sci.,
Vol. V, Pt. I, App: pprs7-9e.

KENDALL, W. C.
1908. List of the pisces. J2uen of New England. Occ. Pap. Boston Soc.
Nat. Hist., Vol. 7, pp. 1-152.
1917. The capelin Motions villosus) with notes of its occurrence on ia
coast of Maine. Copeia, No. 42, pp. 28-30.
1919. Second authentic record of capelin (Mallotus villosus) on the Maine
coast. Copeia, No. 73, pp. 70-71.

KNIGHT, loc:
1867. Shore and deep-sea fisheries of Nova Scotia, pp. 1-113.

PeELEY.M. -H.
1852. Reports on the sea and river fisheries of New Brunswick. 2nd Ed.,
Fredericton, pp. 1-294.

PRINCE, .E. -E:
1913. The Pearlsides. A luminous fish new to Canada. Rod and Gun in
Canada, Vol. 14, No. 11, pp. 1143-1145.

Prince, eB: and YuMAcKay,} Are
1901. The paired fins of the mackerel shark. Contr. Canad. Biol., 1901,
pp. 55-58.

Putnam, F. W.
1874. Notes on Liparis, Cyclopterus and their allies. Proc. Amer. Assn,
Adv. Sci., XXII, pp. 335-340.
1874. Notes on the genus Myxine. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 1873-74
(1874) 16, 127-135.

VERRILL, A. E.
1871. (A brief sketch of the marine fauna of Eastport, Me.) Bull. Essex
Inst., Vol. III, pp. 2-6.

No. IV

A STUDY OF THE CISCOES OF LAKE ERIE
BY

WILBERT A. CLEMENS
University of Toronto

A Study of the Ciscoes* of Lake Erie.

By WILBERT A. CLEMENS,

University of Toronto

This study was carried out under the auspices of the Biological Board of
Canada in response to a request from the Lake Erie Fishermens’ Association
for an investigation of some of the problems in connection with the cisco fishing
industry. In the request it was desired particularly that some information be
obtained as to why smaller ciscoes in general are taken in the eastern end of the
lake than in the western part.

The major portion of the work having to do with the measurements of the
fish and the taking of scales was carried out at various points on Lake Erie
during the summer and fall of 1920, but shipments from various points were
examined in Toronto during the years of 1919 and 1920.

The author desires to express his appreciation of the assistance given by many
fishermen, in particular by Mr. A. E. Crewe, who kindly provided accommoda-
tion for the carrying out of the work during the summer of 1920, freely placed
all the material of his catches for examination, and gave assistance in many
ways. Other gentlemen who facilitated the work in supplying material and in
other ways were: Messrs. Charles Ross, Roy Ross, Wilson S. McKillop, A. B.
Hoover, C. W. Barwell, R. Kolbe, and W. D. Bates.

IDENTIFICATION OF SPECIES

For the separation of the species of shallow water ciscoes (subgenus 7/ris-
somimus) as described by Jordan and Evermannj (1911) it appears that three
proportional measurements are more or less critical, namely, head in length,
depth in length, and depth of caudal peduncle in head. Jordan and Evermann
give the following proportions:

*The word cisco is here used instead of herring for all members of the genus Leucichthys
except for the tullibees, in accordance with the list of standardized names of North American
fish as agreed upon by the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries, the Biological Board of Canada and the
Canadian Fisheries Association.

jJordan, D. S., and Evermann, B. W. 1911. A Review of the Salmonoid Fishes of the
Great Lakes with notes on the Whitefishes of other Regions. Bull. U.S. Bureau Fish., Vol. xxix
(1909). Document No. 737 (1911).

~I
Or

Species Head in length} Depth in length | Depth of caudal
peduncle in head
Tae tis. a A ms * tes 4.33 a 43-46 ; 3.0
ee MER op ee ge n eee ; 4.66 : es : 2.9
eS ition cis Brahh toet ae ininee ; : - : a 455 a : 3.74.2 2.66
ee a ae ees ea > | 3 peacg 1 ee eee
L. Sa : Set eee ee git 4.4 | 3.3-3.5 2-2

Accordingly for each fish examined the necessary measurements were made
for the calculation of the above proportions. In addition the girth and the
weight were determined and scales removed for age estimation. From June 14
to August 24, 1920, the ciscoes taken in twenty pound nets at the Crewe Bros.
Fishery near Merlin were examined daily. In August and November the fish
taken at Port Dover, Nanticoke, McKillop’s Fishery (near Port Maitland)
and Dunnville were examined. The following species have been identified:

(1) Leucichthys sisco huronius (J. & E.), Lake Huron cisco.

This species was readily distinguished by the long spindle-shaped body.
The average proportions for 60 individuals were as follows: head in length 4.6,
depth in length 4.3, depth of caudal peduncle in head 2.95. These figures are
practically identical with those given by Jordan and Evermann for Lake Huron.
This species is taken rather abundantly in the pound nets at Merlin but very
few specimens were seen east of Long Point.

(2) L. ertensis (J. & E.). Jumbo cisco.

This is the most abundant species taken in pound nets from Rondeau to
Point Pelee. It also occurs in large numbers eastward to Long Point but appears
to become very much less abundant beyond. It is noted for the large size
attained as compared with the other species of the genus Leucichthys. The
outstanding characters are (1) the deep body, (2) the more or less pronounced
hump at the nape, (3) the deep caudal peduncle, (4) the relatively large scales.
The average proportions for 150 individuals were: 4.41, 3.42 and 2.44.

(3) L. artedi (Le Sueur). Lake Erie cisco or grayback.

This species occurred in numbers at Merlin next in abundance to L. eriensis
and appears to occur abundantly throughout the lake. It has been distinguished
from the jumbo cisco by (1) the somewhat narrower peduncle, (2) the narrower
body with usually little or no hump at-the nape, (8) the smaller scales with
less of the shiny appearance, (4) the much slower rate of growth as shown in the
following table and also later in the discussion of the results of the scale exam-
nations.

L. artedi L. eriensis
. Length Weight Age } Date Length | Weight| Age
No. Date em. Oz. Years|| No. Date c.m. Oz. Years
600 me 8 20.7 6 4 | 234 we 8 20.8 6 / 3
a is ne orale ere | ang 7 3
602 pa 21.0 me 6 5 237 f =A Na 7 3
603 21.5 6 5 . 238 : 22.2 8 3
604 21.0 6 eS 239 : 22.6 8 3
605 - 22.2 6 ; 6 . 240 | 22.8 9 2 ;
606 21.8 6 ; 5 || . 241 ade 9 23.7 9 3
607 | July 9 : “22.8 i ; 6 | 242 ei 26.5 12 4
=== || : = —— = — =

609 22.9 7 5 | 243 21.5 7 3
610 | al 23.4. ie: 7 ee 5 Ie 244 arte | o L 10 3

Figure 1 shows a drawing of a scale from specimen No. 606, L. artedi and a drawing of a
scale from specimen No. 235, L. ertensts.

The average proportions for 50 individuals as they occurred at Merlin were
4.26, 3.7 and 2.86. These figures are somewhat different from those given by
Jordan and Evermann and may be due in part to the fact that the young of
L. eriensis are somewhat difficult to separate from this species, and in the selec-
tion of the above 50 individuals rather extreme forms were chosen. There is
an indication, however, that L. artedi is more closely related to the species of
the other lakes than perhaps the figures of Jordan and Evermann show.

(4) L. prognathus (Smith). Lake Ontario deep water cisco or longjaw.

In both the pound nets and gill nets from Port Dover to Port Maitland
a cisco occurs very abundantly whose exact identity and relationships have not
been determined as yet. Dr. B. W. Evermann, to whom ten specimens were
submitted for identification, refers them provisionally to the species prognathus
pending further examination of these and additional specimens. The out-
standing features of this form are the following: (1) the long mandible which
usually projects beyond the upper jaw and in extreme cases almost hooks over
it, (2) the relatively long bony snout, (3) the narrow caudal peduncle, (4) the
shiny appearance of the scales, (5) the rather deeply forked caudal fin. Ina
great many individuals the above characters are extreme as well as other features,
as indicated by the following proportions, 4.0,4.2,and3.2. In other specimens
the proportions are about as follows: 4.3, 3 75, and 2.85. The average for
148 individuals is 4.22, 3.88, and 2.85. However, Dr. Evermann states that
L. prognathus varies greatly. Only a single longjaw was taken at Merlin during

==
(LU

the summer of 1920 on August 24, and it had the proportions 4.1, 3.3, and 2.8.
A fisherman at Point Pelee has stated that he recalled having seen during one
spring rather large numbers of small longjaws. taken in the pound nets in that
region. This would indicate a migration occurring during the winter or spring
months when temperature conditions would be rather uniform throughout the
lake.

The longjaws examined at Dunnville and Port Dover early in November,
1920, were almost ready to spawn. Typically, members of the subgenus Cisco
(Jordan and Evermann) are said to spawn in late summer but it would not be
surprising to find the deep water forms in the shallower, warmer waters of Lake
Erie spawning later than those in the other Great Lakes, especially in a mild
fall such as occurred in 1920. Two females of L. johannae received from Wiarton,
Georgian Bay, November 24, 1920, were found not to have spawned.

The following table shows comparative measurements of certain characters
of the longjaws in Lake Erie. Measurements are given in decimal fractions
of body length.

PORT MAITLAND PORT DOVER
1082 | 1042 | 1037 919 | 907 | 918
Tt oan Seth pee 26 25 235 245] 25° ee 23 | 23. 24
Se Bee ees Ae ace ree 24 1 92 | als | eu 26 .30
CP. Pirin. eet eos “087 078 081 “082 082 089 “084 079 “082
pee Ree: cass coat Stren eT “054 058 060) 06 06 055 066 055 065
Snout . bones de Sh 063] .063) .064 063 063) .057)| . 058 053 058
Pe ee i Re “085 . 083 09 .08 087 “085 079 08 089
SPEER ett ee ae at a7 a7 avs qT Ne 16 166 ase 173
Fes le rs A be 45 | 16 ie 41 | 41 ; 152 ist 45 41
ee ee eae ‘lao [4.0 |h0 lao laa lla 43 lan
Deptt Pdi oat pt ne ene ? Reels 44 3.9 3.3
CP. Gepeh inspeadise = ay oe ee 3.9 |3.2 Is io \3.0 lo7 ; 28 '3.0 2.9

(5) L. harengus (Richardson). Georgian Bay cisco.

A few individuals were taken which agreed in measurements and description
with the Georgian Bay cisco. Jordan and Evermann report this species in
Lake Erie and no doubt it occurs in small numbers.

For purposes of comparison and for confirmation of the value of proportional
measurements, specimens of L. ontariensis were obtained from Port Credit on
Lake Ontario,.and specimens of L. harengus from Wiarton and Midland on

Georgian Bay.

The average proportions of 20 individuals of L. ontariensis

were 4.5, 3.8, and 2.6. The average for 25 individuals of L. harengus were

AeA Sand 3. 1<

The following table shows the measurements of typical individuals of the

various species examined.

body length.

Measurements are given in decimal fractions of

1From Georgian Bay.

3.0

2From Lake Ontario.

Be iterate. rE 14 14 .14 16 . 16 is a7
ane ee Benes . 13. - 12 vA mv mally 2 16 Silt
Dorsal height Po Mave eis, ap = 14 ? 13 15 16 | WW 18
ee lenothie dete 053 06 062 064 073 053
fora wate meet p = : 88 a .88 94 rai eile 13
Gil rakersl ns eae * ; 5S uae 7 a 48 43 46 45
Seales. | 9858 | 9828 loves | s707 | 875-7 | 876-7
ead in: lengthy \ 0) er 42 ic 4.6 4.6 4.3 4.4 fies
Depth in length......... ree 4.5 = 3.8 3.5 Ba ll AMD,
Cites insheade:aesee 37 os 27 28 ad 3.0

The following table shows proportions as given by Jordan and Evermann
and those obtained for the ciscoes in Lake Erie with the exception of L. harengus

and L. ontariensis.

Jordan and Evermann Lake Erie
Head in | Depthin |Depth C.P.| Head in | Depthin | DepthC.P.
Species length length | in length length length in length
aie ee ae ae ee ee a ieee oa
alee ie See erste } 4.66 42-45 ne 2.9 | 46 . 43 : 2.95
Lape. as | 3749 | 266 \ 25. | 3a 2 oar
aN ere 4.4 3 5-4 0 2.02.5. 4.26 3.70 5 2.86
ae i =< See 38 4.4 m 3 33.5 9 2 | 4.41 3.42 w oar
Epes ce} ho. | Poe S35 Pals |e oie ee

Fig. 1.—Drawings of scales of ciscoes.

A, from specimen No. 606, L. artedi, showing 5 winter bands, the fish therefore being in its

sixth summer.

therefore being in its fourth summer.

1From Georgian Bay.

2From Lake Ontario.

B, from specimen No. 235, L. eriensis, showing three winter bands, the fish

RATES OF GROWTH

The scales were used in determining the rates of growth of the various species
of ciscoes. The growth areas are usually well marked. Scales from approxi-
mately the following number of fish of each species were examined: L. eriensis

rrr

S85 geonep fan
SBR! BS RReeeesnee58
af TTY

Sueezsaeeees saaeeseessaesseszaes7
geseesceste

Pog

Supa ul aby

piste totetol H
Srssssess re titteeeesssziit
Poo seeeaas

10 15 20 825 30
Length in Centimeters

Fig. 2.—Graph illustrating rates of growth of ciscoes in Lake Erie a=L. artedi, p=L. prognathus,
e=L. eriensis, sh=L. sisco huronius.

Tecell

that the
Fig. 3

therefore

curve for this species should lie to the left of the curve for L. eriensis.
The length in centi-

meters is from the tip of the snout to the base of the caudal fin; the girth just

anterior to the dorsal fin.

It is possible

10
The following table gives the data obtained

In the majority of scales some of the winter

140; L. artedt 55; L. sisco huronius 55; L. prognathus 150. The results are
shown in Fig. 2. Considerable difficulty was experienced in estimating the

rate of growth of L. sisco huronius.
bands were difficult to distinguish and there was evidence that in some cases at

for the three important commercial species in Lake Erie.

least one winter band was not recorded.

shows the relation of age to weight.

SSnaEnsssasseessasessesssesssesesssesesz pt
|

HH
EH

: i fs aH cieesiies
sbrezeseeee cit scree cI ft Bank cy bites sfeict : Beer ci
Hs aa i HE zi He f sess! sees EF cH fH
SEreereenaria Heeiuiascritteiy

Pa
oe
oon
A
V
Foo
Ha,
Per
oe

Sia

cai

=<
ry

Age in Years

L. artedt, p=L.

Weight in Ounces
82

Fig. 3.—Graph illustrating relation of weight to age of ciscoes in Lake Erie.

prognathus, e=L. eriensis.

Lait

ceca GST Serv Il
F 4 les ecard, st cor | or
Te Ree shee G° 83 emt ¢ GP 9 AT oon 6
Tape elere ss Sha oe Cor SIT G16 SOS eee O-LT G°LE oon
OTT vit 9G L9 G6 L 01 G°SZ TOL | O'GE 0°9T ie G°ge sie
£9 ie lets) Z OI VG €9 GL © OL G°&% ¥ 6 GGG 8 FI gee ae
ne fy) $6 7 GG che) “ ae 9°6 GIG 9° GLt € 1 66 |
ZG SV. G's 0 0% 6G oY G3 0°61 VL Sie vit s SG ae:
oF 0'€ OL ir LI S72 0°€ O'L 0-91 T9 O°L Tas G06 e
3 | 0° Sl : oo cel! hee ee 99 ot a
- oe 0°8 O'& Son aie OF a3 ;, r
re ‘ZO Beak be Ee "ul ea He "Wud ‘ul ‘ZO “ul W'd pe
wap TYSIOM yasueT | yisueT yr | iwWsraA\ y sue] y.sua'] wap TSIM y13uaT] yysuey | asy

snyjousodd “'T

UpayaD “TT

susuarda “'T

The difference in weight between L. artedi and L. prognathus is partly due
to the fact that the specimens of the latter species were examined chiefly in

November and the females were then heavy with spawn.

12
SUMMARY

1. Three species form the bulk of the cisco catch in the Canadian waters of
Lake Erie, namely, L. eriensis, L. artedi and L. prognathus.

2. L. eriensis is the dominant form westward from Long Point, and L.
prognathus eastward from Long Point. This statement holds in general, for
the former appears to prefer the shallower water while the latter is apparently
a deep water form. However their ranges tend to overlap and their migrations
at times take them into one another’s territory. For example, fishermen have
reported occasional schools of longjaws as far west as Point Pelee, and, on the
other hand, the jumbo is reported as abundant, at times, off Port Maitland.
L. artedi occurs abundantly throughout the lake, but probably in greatest
numbers west of Long Point.

3. L. artedi and L. prognathus have rates of growth and increases in weight
which are practically identical, while L. erzensis increases about 1 1/3 times
faster in length and two to three times faster in weight.

4. Examinations of the graphs and tables for rates of growth and increases
in weight show that the optimum size for the taking of. the jumbo cisco is from
the fifth summer upward when they are at least 12 inches in length and 1 pound
in weight. Whether the food supply would permit of this as the minimum
size it is impossible to say. In regard to L. artedi and L. prognathus a minimum
length of about 10 inches and a weight of about 6 or 7 ounces, when the fish are
in their sixth summer, would appear to be quite satisfactory.

5. Concerning the occurrence of smaller ciscoes in the eastern end of the
lake, this much can be safely said: that in respect to gill net catches the fisher-
men in the western portion of the lake secure a larger percentage of jumbo
ciscoes and, therefore, get large fish, while the fishermen in the eastern end,
particularly off Port Maitland, secure chiefly the smaller species, L. artedi and
L. prognathus. The same facts apply to the pound net catches, with the addition
that, since the young inhabit the shallow waters and the shallow water area
east of Long Point is more limited, there appears to be a concentration of young
ciscoes along the shore, particularly in Long Point Bay, and hence the young are
apt to be impounded in large numbers in the pound nets.

6. No data were obtained as to the age when the various species spawn for
the first time. Spawning is probably at the end of the third summer, and, if so,
the six-ounce regulation protects the two species, L. artedi and L. prognathus in
respect to being allowed to spawn once, but does not protect L. eriensis since
it attains a weight of six ounces in its third summer.

7. The girth measurements were taken around the body just anterior to
the dorsal fin, that is where the greatest girth occurs. The results show that the
three inch gill net regulation is quite satisfactory for the species L. artedi and
L. prognathus since they do not attain a girth of six inches until the sixth summer,
but barely protects L. eriensis since this species attains a girth of six inches in
three years.

8. In any undertaking for the artificial propagation of ciscoes in Lake Erie,
at least for the region west of Long Point, particular attention should be given
to L. eriensis, because of its rapid growth and its excellent qualities as a food
fish.

CONCLUSION

This study has proved to be merely preliminary. The ciscoes of Lake Erie
form a complex association and it has been impossible in this investigation to
determine their inter-relations or to study the physical factors in relation to
the various forms. Solution of the many difficult problems must await a
thorough study of the physical conditions of existence in the various parts of
the lake, such as distribution of temperatures, oxygen, carbon dioxide, currents,
etc., and the relation of these factors to spawning, growth, movements of the
fish, as well as to the production and distribution of their food organisms.

No. V

THE FOOD OF CISCOES (Leucichthys) IN LAKE ERIE
BY
WILBERT A. CLEMENS
AND

N. K. BIGELOW
University of Toronto

The Food of Ciscoes (Leucichthys) in Lake Erie.

By WILBERT A. CLEMENS,
AND

N. K. BIGELow,
University of Toronto.

The results of the examination of the contents of the digestive tracts of
211 ciscoes (fresh-water herring) are presented herein. The bulk of the material
was obtained early in June, 1919, and from July to November in 1920, from
Lake Erie at various points along the north shore. The species examined were
Leucichthys eriensis, the jumbo cisco; L. artedi, the Lake Erie cisco; L. sisco
huronius, the Lake Huron cisco; and L. prognathus, the Lake Ontario deep
water cisco (longjaw). These were taken at Merlin, Rondeau, Port Dover,
Nanticoke, McKillop’s fishery (near Port Maitland), and Dunnville. In
addition 19 individuals of L. harengus, the Georgian Bay cisco, from Wiarton,
Georgian Bay, and 7 individuals of L. ontariensis, the Lake Ontario cisco, from
Port Credit, Lake Ontario, have been examined for comparative purposes.
The material from Merlin, Rondeau, Nanticoke and McKillop’s was obtained
in pound nets while the material from all the other points was obtained in gill
nets.

The results are given in the following tables. In the table “‘ Unidentified
species’’ are placed those fish whose identity was not determined. The figures
indicate the relative abundance, namely: (1) that only a few individuals were
noted; (2) that the organisms occurred rather abundantly; (3) very abundantly.

SUMMARY:

1. An examination of the tables shows that the ciscoes are pre-eminently
plankton feeders. The study practically covers the fishing season, and during
that time at least, the free swimming crustacea form the bulk of the food of
these fish. Of Canadian waters, Lake Erie produces more ciscoes than all the
other Great Lakes combined. For example, in 1919 Lake Erie produced
7,425,713 lbs., while the remainder of the Great Lakes produced 4,022,711 Ibs.
It is not improbable that the production of ciscoes is directly dependent upon
the amount of plankton Crustacea produced. The numbers of these Crustacea
which must abound in Lake Erie in order to support the millions of ciscoes, as
well as the great numbers of white fish and young of many other species, is
almost beyond the imagination. Comparative quantitative plankton studies
in the Great Lakes would, no doubt, afford considerable information as to the
fish productive capacities of these lakes.

2. It is doubtful if the various species of ciscoes show any preference among
the entomostraca as food material. They doubtless take whatever forms occur
in the waters they happen to inhabit.

3. In the great majority of alimentary tracts examined, Daphnia formed the
great bulk of the contents, while other forms were represented by scattered
individuals. In many cases Daphnia alone were present. This was particularly
true of the jumbo and the Lake Ontario ciscoes. It appears, therefore, that
Daphnia are very much the most important of the entomostraca as food organisms.
Daphnia longispina occurred in all the material examined, as variety hyalina
galeata. Daphnia ephippia were abundant in October in Lake Ontario and in
November in Lake Erie. Occasional ephippia with three eggs were noted.

4. Of the. Copepods Diaptomus sicilis and Limnocalanus macrurus were
perhaps the most abundant forms occurring in the digestive tracts, although
Epischura lacustris occurred frequently and occasionally in considerable numbers.
Very often the oil globules of these forms gave the contents a bright red colour.

5. In the eastern end of Lake Erie one of the most important food organisms |
was Mysis relicta. As far as we are aware this is the first record of the occurrence
of this form in Lake Erie. Its presence indicates at least an approach of con-
ditions in the eastern end of this lake to conditions in the other Great Lakes.

6. Three individuals were found to have eaten small fish. In each case
digestion had proceeded too far to allow of identification. All three ciscoes
were taken in the eastern end of the lake, two were longjaws (L. prognathus)
and the third, while not definitely identified, was probably -also a longjaw. A
fisherman near Point Pelee has stated that one winter he found that some
ciscoes which he took through the ice, had eaten “minnows.”

7. As is shown in the table for the longjaws (L. prognathus) these fish in
June, 1919, had fed practically entirely upon Ephemeridae (Ephemera simulans),
both adults and subimagoes. The importance of these insects as fish food is
thus further demonstrated. Moreover, there is no doubt that the transforma-
tion of the nymphs to the subimaginal stage takes place at the surface of the
water, as occurs in the closely related genus Hexagenia (Needham, 1920).*
This means that the subimagoes, as well as the imagoes, were taken at the
surface of the water by the ciscoes. The projecting lower jaw of these forms is
well suited to such surface feeding.

8. The following table, compiled from the food tables, shows the distribution
of the food organisms in the lake.

The outstanding points in the table are:

(a) The absence of Mysts relicta from the western portion and the absence of
Daphnia pulex and D. retrocurva from the eastern portion. Further investiga-
tion, however, may show the presence of these species throughout the lake.

(b) Although only 43 gill net fish were examined, and the list of forms is,
therefore, incomplete, yet the results are an indication of what would be expected
in any large body of water, namely, that the shore waters contain a greater
number of species of food organisms than the more open waters. The gill net

*Needham, James G. 1920. Burrowing Mayflies of our Larger Lakes and Streams.
Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish., Vol. XXXVI, 1917-18.

WESTERN PORTION EASTERN PORTION
87 pound net fish | 55 pound net fish | 43 gill net fish
from Merlin and from McKillop’s from Port
Rondeau and Nanticoke Dover and
Dunnville
Epischura lacustris........ + ae =e
I EPIOFAUS SUCLIS. =... Pte pe aati ss oa ze a
Limnocalanus macrurus............-. + ae Be
GYGOPSISD Sate Se ae Cain Beevers ss aL ae
BGHEIGRVSHIUILING © loys i.t021o.2 eral aft = te =) os + a
Diaphanosoma brachyurum........... +
Holopedium gibberum................ +
PINTO PULES ote vec As aeeeys San ee +
i FOLLOGIUTUGS = Ak eens Coon +
ze LORGESPUNG mee cis «ta (eos + ate fe
Bosming LOngirostris.. 0.6.2 ee je es +b ie
TEUPNCCrGUSHOMELOLUS A 0. it a). <i +
CHIODOS Ons seneingesae eat oO ee +
WC PLOMOVOMRUNGLUE. «et N tae sehen tects oaks + ae
VRE S POMEL NR eee 5 is a nie ne ad he os +
Hyallela knickerbockertt.............. +
Ts PLEMELLAGE yah Fo). 4 Meher yee eS + af
Sranailll INS) a peace | eens eames bart ae

fish were taken over 5 miles from shore while the pound net fish were taken
within 2 miles of shore.

(c) A comparison of the first two columns shows the possibility of there
being a greater number of species in the western part of the lake than in the
eastern end. There is a possibility also that quantitative differences exist in
these regions as well as qualitative. |

The results of this study serve to emphasize anew the importance of the
plankton fauna of our inland waters, and the necessity for a thorough quantita-
tive, qualitative and distributional investigation of these organisms, including
particularly their relations to the production, distribution and movements of

fish.

» 61
” SI
peel
eee
666
Lol
661
101
SIT
oo
jon 12)
o &.
aS}
5

*T wnankya
~DAq DUuosoUDYyd DLT € I I | OLlp 9c ” 0z/Z *8nV/66z
6 I T I #9-|9°22| 5, =: (08/0T 4Inf
“[ wndagqis unipad
-OJOFT + [ wnankyo
“Ddq DuosouDydorg I z Sel ae oad I I #9 19°20, =, «= (06/8 Ain
€ G I il \! I OLS 7 ” ” ”
g T I I It T Or GT ” ” ”
€ ar Al y | 8 (9-s2] UNTPIN [0¢/9 Ain
"T appimasayq yy g Oe elsegs ” ” ”
I Dpodayduy
‘| appimouodry)
‘% appraawmayd ay ¢g G | 12|0 TE ” ” ”
i ts I a7 SFT 0 2G oe ” ”
"] S}uowseIy Joosuy € € I I I I ¢ | E1/8°Ss| neepuoy | 6I/T oun
al eect See tS Se Big 8 SSS aa eS recta || see nea peta ate Se ie)
REST PRE RSS | SE ae ita se Ol ee karen eee test pee | nee es VC a ates Ae o
‘snooUey][aosiq\/ Side a clessb ie. ace cece: e | > Anime S a § aN = ES
Ss a na 8 ° > S so) . 8 > a 2 R
5 tv = > ny | 38

cd ema 2 oie mn ek er Cen a ees RL Oe nn eee ae BN la et Sk alll Se
‘AINA AMVT NI OOSIO OAWNAI—SISNAIVA ‘T

UPAR |0G/FS “AON

‘ & ZIT IL LZ
€ I1|$ FZ

€
&
"[T xoajoy ‘1
sliqep uvaseysnt)
L] SNID[JAaMD] SNIAIING I e ;

$$. | —-———_-—_

neapuoy |0Z/Z1 “AON 906'T

=e ee ~ 7 ¥ bad i in i = ne —— Ss CUP, Pere
3 z 7 fo"

. eae, % = , fF it Pe -
( 1
ll € I 9 | 6 |G & Ul]IIIN|0Z/FS,, +|999
I z € Gn Oe Ge Oc uae sfagkeniod| CHORD
G € CA Sa Ga0G An ” pe SO
; G g G 1202 i sf » |9PO'T
G G G F&F 19 61 s.donsow} ,, ye leeOsT
‘Z Sliqap uvacRysn41D I (6 g #Z |9°1% ' 02/01 “AON|Z08
DORN py a | ae area a eel ar 7 leak
"| 404909
-dayoua DIaq]DK FT z g I I z PEG |F'1Z| Neopuoy|6t/T eunf{ |For
Ses eae CI Se Se Sia lce SS a a ee 0 aS ee a le I o Vz)
Slee lass (2s lSs le (fk eles | Lereela lars | 8 Sepak
Se SS lS | eos) wee | S| 8 Seal aaah eee eres oa, | 98 Se e Bo
SSS! eS So ERS ee te | Ss eer Nes ey hen ratee te [careers alee + a
“snoouUry][aOsT] x SP Sos SP SOS | ease Sse Se £38 Spas ee |e < Shoe
: = 8 S. iS g Ss a oS S PS 5 5 :
S a i) . > . 4°) ~ a =]
= : ee = ; = ene
. vu o> a N 3
a “| ®

aIwa AMV NI MOVAAVAD AO OOSID ALY AAVTSGaHLYV “T

“SnOdUPT[IIST]

“DIIAd SISK

|
DiopojdaT

“SUAJSOAVBUOT
DuMusog |

é°ds piuydog

“‘DULgSIBUO]
piuydng |

“DRANIOAIOA

piuydng

‘xajnd piuydog

“DUL]IDISEAD
EBS

‘ds sdopoky

“SMANAIDUL
SNUDI|DIOUWLT

Rees
snmojdvug

“STAJSNIDI
DANYISIG A

‘asy

L. SISCO HURONIUS—LAKE HURON CISCO IN LAKE ERIE

"SZO UT IYSIOA\

“SUID UT Y1S8uaT

26.1/113

AqIPBO0T

‘a]eq

12/20} Rondeau |26.3] 9

“TaquinN
uolaT]0D

371|Nov. 24/20} Merlin

1,200

HIaad AAV!

—_

OOSID YALVM dHad OLAVINO FAV]

SQHLIWNIOUd “T

€ ” ” | I T I \! G Gig" 12 ” ” » 6
S ” ” i i P ¢\0 16 ” ” ” OS
“eg sooseuliqns
supjnuas paomayd yy I G| 44/602 ” ae ea lOr
‘T qnpe snosydiq
:@ sa0seuliqns
supnuas Daamaydy I i) G|6 06 ” ” alll!
*T Ynpe snossqdiq i
‘@ ssosruliqns
sunjnurs Daamaydy I i! I V| 9/802 ” ” » IGP
‘T npr snosaidiq,
‘€ ” ” I G FIG 6I ” ” ” OL eo)
cs AS ey Ve aa aed Rss ss ia M We aecate <1 15, 17, on)
€ " ” I I I b| fee 61) Tae mare
*g sooseuiqns
supnuus Déawmayd y I P| 89'S ” ” » [8
] Sy[npe prwouosnys)
:@ ssosrvuiqns
SUDNUS DAgMaY4 I I FP) S/S 2T/eyooweN|6T/T ounf{|sT
=a ~ ~ [oy oa GS he a tC
slrelee[S/yelaele/ag/eleeles|eesleleie) 5 9 | 29
Bey eee sl eed 9 ey le gee Si ee S| Se leet IS See meri ea erative ES s 5 o
4 Ss: & 3: = S = = 8 J =~ > = s Sar > = 2 roy =v) C ieee lel
yA : IS} ao Ss. S. s. S. = Q RS : Ss. 8 ot = 5a ct ac
snoauryjoosiy | Ss iol. Sea ae alines seal ee icetel| teal oS 7 eee Sage Shah hate ‘< = 5
Be ae gre Hee HE Um (I Ralls ens (22 Aa aa ne a eels :

6 Pile Sis ” ” » [028
“T staqap weaoeysn5 oF a : I! Se 9S “1% ” 02/01 “AON eee
; ae ee Pe) | ali delecoel> pee Mn i ae
Re el- ol slaocl is [ue paler
s ne 7: : i adeno one arene
“wnIpryso]y ea € I G| £9/2'02 is O ie os
ee g ig 6°02 ayoanuey 02/01 ‘AON 198
*T sqUSUWISe1y JOISUT ie TI ¢ 6 6 a | ie E ae eee, ess
ie = pda (s G T ai tae ” ” “atput gt
ee € q I € git aqyauung odin
. € y I 9 L|9 FG - | ” De ee
seen : g eae e eg! talpree " ey or
‘ 25 € a ae letra ” a ” ” bit.
- 6 if ; ¥/9 81 “ neapuoy et/t aunfloct
€ ” ” aes I ; ne 9 lez ” Bs ” es a
eyes, ies ae occ aelheecs cs.
Robe oui 1 liebeae seo Sy lleeriesna etic ghee ane
Ene od ee . és tl | 9h whrlronuenler/t unche ——_

1
oO

s}usWIseIy YSY [[eWS

“snoaur] [ISI]

WwOD—HAIWA AMV NI OOSIO UALVM dadd OINVLINO YAVTI-SAHLVNIOUd °

=a ~ = =e iy & ~ » om
BIPPISS SIS SISS Sis SIS ES ES PS lel ale & Eales
SG Q v3 mM 1 0g NS 1S MM |S: S = =: s o OQ. =
S/S /8$83 |S lee | s S$] = [-8 oi pe STi a Ml AT loa ct Sy 8 Bole
Sr al eat ice Meee lh et all eaeeecat CG alluogi cetacean ae murano Boles = cps
S AUGSS Ee Se Se eee Gere cl) a ieem real ttn ee ce ‘s m 6
> a i) 8 : ~ | 8 psa a > 8 3 5 5
S % ~ S 9 °
S a 5 5

ie)
or)

L. HARENGUS—GEORGIAN BAY CISCO IN GEORGIAN BAY.

Miscellaneous.

“‘DIIYad SISK

ee!

paopojqaT :

|
|

"STAJSOLVB UO]
DUIUSOg

eds piuydoqg

“purdsisuo] |

pruydoq

“DAdANIOAJIA
piuydvg

‘xajnd piuydoqg

“DULIDISKAI
DPT

Ostracods 1.

‘ds sdoj9ky

“SHANAIDU
SNUDIDIOUWUVT

“saptats
snuiojd vig

“SUAJSNID]
DANY ISG

ine)

‘33

"SZO UT JYSIO\

|
|

“su UT Y} sud]

“AUPPIOT

37eq

22.7| 5}

4é

“TOGUIN NY
uOoT}I2][O_)

23|Nov. 24/20|Wiarton/19.1| 32

15 indiv.

v rerlr-9e|

€ € | [9° ZB /HPPHD 3404 |0Z/GZ “AON Wk
OINVLINO AMV NI MVIDNOT OINVLINO ANVT-(SAHLVNIOdd T

§ F |201|6 Sz ” ” ” g

€ Vv \%6 |S F2 ” ” ” I

g € [16 |6 ” a 9

g T € 8 L°GG ” ” ” Mf

€ & |22 |0°SS|#PHID 3140d|0Z/1Z “PO G

ry lesley ales |S) eetewetpe Ley MSI ELS Sa NEI Cohe eer GR el selO lets Sy lesh Pa i Se I= Ss) AAD

S/TEPE SE FSPTS (LEE RT LE|PSSIER | 2 Pos eae

Seven heer tee cee lt eal Bente aly (aera oe | ES Si sae |S Se SS 99" | 9 » ® 30

Oo Seo sr lk | eee | Rosie | eee lie a gl ate SS eS a

‘snoauryaosty |S SPSS IBS SIE Sasi cise alle sees SP aemnlh rapeallat sere cl) Mok dla Sle 4 5 5

= Bes o | & = ~ |S Fag wile ewe 5 : Zee e
> uo) 2: ‘ = [e) Q
8 tay ~ = N 3
S ° Pee

OIYVINO AAV!

NI OOSIO OINVINO ANVTI-SISNAIY VINO “T

100

€ I IT|% 96 ” 206 T
*T eds snsopky) € ITS &% neapuoy|0Z/ZI “AON| Z1Z'T
€ I TIE °F3} §, 4TH SPOT
€ I P| IT|9 &@ 618
I j € & | 9'16 |S°e% ZI8
"¢ SlIqep Uvsde YSN") I i! Soe Oake PGS
USE eS) G G L | Ile €% OTS
6 I Gea G2ee O&8
& ¥ | 9 |L TZ) eAOoUeN|9Z/OL ,, [608
\'T squouseiy Joosuy (e J29A0q 340g|0Z/E “AON! ,, ZI
"@ (sao3eul
-qns pure sooseur
‘piuasnjidayy ‘pda
-mayd gy) appraamayd J S,do[[ WN |02/6 ” I
*@ (apptdaa
-maydy Ddéajqoy rd ]
‘IDPYULOUOALY +) )

s}UsWISe1y osu]

"T pruyoespAy

‘HIYA ANVWT WON SHIOddS GHI4ILNACINNA

z I I Z Z
g ¢ I I GNP ealsacc
¢ a ae P IEP 661

AYOOJUBN |OZ/G *-SNy|ATPUr GT

neapuoy|6rt/T eunf|ezq

No. VI

THE PACIFIC HERRING.
BY

C. McLEAN FRASER
Marine Biological Station, Nanaimo, B.C.

4
.
n
.
.
- -
%

ihe -Pacinc. Herring

By C. McLEAN FRASER. .

Marine Biological Station, Nanamio, B.C.

Of the numerous species of fish found in the waters of the Pacific Ocean,
adjacent to the coast of North America, none plays a more important réle in
general marine economy than a species that is rather despised from a commerical
point of view, the Pacific herring. The salmon, the halibut and the cod receive
almost all the consideration when North Pacific fish are mentioned, but the
herring, if it is included at all, comes as an afterthought. This is not because
of any lack of food value or any lack of supply, but rather because of a lack of
appreciation of the truly wonderful possibilities of development in the value
of the herring industry.

While in the case of the halibut and the salmon there are strong indications
that human interference is more or less rapidly decreasing the numbers, in the
case of the herring the human factor has been too insignificant to make any
material impression.

As a species the herring has a more extensive distribution than any other
food fish of the coast, with the possible exception of the spring salmon, as appar-
ently there is an abundance all the way from San Francisco, or farther south,
to the Arctic Ocean. In all the wide range there is little difference in general
appearance and habits, as far as I have been able to ascertain, except that in
Bering Sea there appears to be a race in which the individuals grow much larger
than at other points along the coast. As I have been unable to get any of these
for examination I have no opinion to offer as to the cause of such difference.

For several years I have made use of opportunities for observing the habits
of the herring and for collecting data on the life history, and while much of the
material remains to be worked up and many of the data are still to be correlated,
since specimens have been obtained at all times of the year and at all ages a
somewhat connected idea of the life history has been obtained.

Most of the observations have been made in the vicinity of the Biological
Station, Nanaimo, B.C., and in general the statements made in this paper will
have special reference to these.

In the herring the gregarious habit is carried to the extreme. To attempt
to describe the size of, or the numbers in, a herring school to one who has never
seen anything of that nature is but to court the destruction of one’s reputation
for veracity. To watch them as they feed near the surface of the water, or as
they are rounded up in a seine, one is struck with the wonderful degree of uni-
formity in size of all the individuals of the school. Careful measurements of a
large number bear out this fact. In the case of those caught in the purse seines,
where none has a chance to escape, the average length is about 20 cm. or 8 inches,
the caudal fin rays not included, and the average weight 100 grams or 3.6 oz.

105

The migrations of the herring have been considered among the wonders of
the deep. Little speculation has been reported about the Pacific species, but
its habits are much like those of the Atlantic species, about which so many
theories have been propounded. There is nothing to indicate that the move-
ments of the Pacific herring are any more mysterious than those of any other
active fish, but since they move about in such large schools their. presence or
absence in any one location is much more readily observed. I cannot find any
reason for thinking that any herring that are found in the strait of Georgia have
ever been away from the strait or the various channels adjoining, and it may
readily be that the radius of activity is limited to comparatively few miles.
Their movements seem to be due largely to the necessity of following up the food
supply. The main basis of that supply is provided by copepods. Among hun-
dreds of stomachs examined I do not remember finding a single one in which
the contents were recognizable where there were not copepods, as eggs, larve
or adults, no matter what else was found. The necessity for a supply of these
copepods is, therefore, constant. I have never counted the number present
in the stomach of a mature herring, but in a young herring 6.6 cm. long, over
3,000 copepods were present. As digestion takes place very rapidly that would
probably by no means represent the number taken in a whole day. When this
is true for a herring six months old, how many must be needed for a mature fish,
and then how many for a school of fish having several! million individuals?
When it is tmpossible to conceive of such a number is it any wonder that there
is often a sudden migration of the fish to catch up with the food supply? Even
if the copepods are numerous they do not remain indefinitely in any one locality.
They are affected by temperature, intensity of light, by currents and probably
by the degree of salinity and many other conditions, and in the case of some at
least of these conditions, the change will affect the copepods in mass. In these
wanderings the herrings must follow. A school of herring can be observed only
when these herring are feeding near the surface of the water. They have not
far to go from the shallow water near shore to get into water deep enough to
cover up all evidence of their presence.

It is true that by going back to the copepods the matter of migration is
simply removed one step further. Another step is made by passing on from
copepods to diatoms on which they feed. This places a limit as far as organisms
are concerned, unless bacteria have something to do with preparing the food for
the diatoms. The processes preceding must be left to the physiologist; the
chemist and the physicist. This is not all that is to be said in the matter how-
ever. In February and March, when copepods and diatoms are scarcer than
usual in the surface waters of the strait, the herring find it necessary to supple-
ment the copepod diet. They come into shallow water at times and feed on the
nauplius and cypris larve of the barnacles and for days at a time they remain
in the barnacle zone. This is most noticeable about spawning time, hence,
_although it is usually stated that they come into the shallow water to spawn, it is
possible that the reason of their presence is entirely or largely due to the food supply,
the spawning in shallow water being merely incidental. Mollusc eggs, decapod
and other crustacean larve, ascidian larve and rotifers are also eaten, but in

106

no case have I found them to be the main portion of the diet. After the spawn
has been deposited it appears to be a common thing for them to gorge themselves
with it. On one occasion out of 94 herring examined 76 of them were so gorged.
Later, when the eggs are hatched out, many of the young fry meet with the
same fate. During all this time the large schools spend the greater portion of the
time in shallow water, since the nature of the food at that time makes this a
necessity.

Since the spawning season has been mentioned some consideration of this
season here may be in place. As far as the Nanaimo district is concerned there
is nothing perplexing about the spawning season of the herring as there is in
the case of the North Sea herring, since there is a single quite definite season,
the last days of February, through March and early April. All the evidence,
and it is quite conclusive, goes to show that no spawning takes place at other
times.

Herring are caught throughout the year. For some time after spawning the
gonads are empty, very little evidence of renewal showing before the end of the
third month. At the end of four months the eggs are still very small, each
gonad weighing less than a gram. From that time on the growth is noticeable.
Much variation in the size of the egg and the weight of the gonad is to be expected
as the young fish spawning for the first time produces fewer and smaller eggs
than older fish. At the end of six months the weight of the gonad varies from
2 to 5 grams, and this difference becomes more marked as the spawning season
approaches. Young herring may have mature gonads with each gonad weighing
less than 5 grams, while for a female the greatest weight observed was 18.6 grams
and for a male 28 grams. The increase in the size of the egg will give some idea
_of the increase in the size of the gonad. On October 10 the average diameter
was .7 mm.; on November 9, .85 to .9; on December 12, 1.0 to 1.05; on January
28, 1.1 to. 1:2; on February 8, 1.25 to 1.30; on February 22, 1.35 to 1.40;
and on February 28 (spawned), 1.4 to 1.6.

For several days before the spawning begins the herring appear in the shallow
water near shore, actively feeding on the barnacle larve as well as any copepods
that may be obtained. The fishermen say they come in to look for suitable
grounds for spawning, but why should they do so such a length of time ahead
when they have been in and out of the shallow water several times in the pre-
ceding months, and even when they are farthest from shore they could come in ina
few hours at most? In any case spawning does take place in shallow water, so
shallow at times that individuals perish by being left high and dry on account
of a flip out of the water near shore. There must be a large supply of eel grass
or seaweed of the pliable kind present, such stiff material as kelp being seldom
made use of. Against the seaweed the female rubs as the spawn is liberated and,
as the spawn is very adhesive, all of it remains attached. One fish may rub
against many pieces of weed or grass before the spawn is all liberated, but as the
fish are so close together and may spawn over the same area several days in
succession, every particle of a weed may become coated several layers thick.
Immediately after the female liberates the spawn the male follows, rubbing
against the seaweed in the same way. The milt in mass adheres for a short time,

107

but it soon separates and permeates the water to such extent that the water
becomes opaque. When the spawning of a large number takes place at the
same time the opaque area may reach for miles, so dense that the herring darting
through the water, even when only a few inches from the surface of the water,
appear but as shadows and if they are down a couple of feet they will not be
seen at all.

As the herring spawn somewhere in the vicinity of the Biological Station
every year there has been plenty of opportunity for observation, and during
several seasons a careful watch was kept over certain of these spawning areas.
The herring do not spawn in the same place season after season as some other
fish apparently do. A thorough survey of the spawning grounds of one year
may be of no assistance in finding the spawning grounds of the next year. While
the areas of one year may overlap the areas of another year I have never known
them to correspond exactly in two succeeding years.

In a previous paper! some description of the spawning areas was given, but
further observation has shown that the matter is not so simple as at first it
seemed. The spawning dates for different areas were quite correct, but it was
not realized that at times spawning takes place day after day for a considerable
period; it may take place for a number of days in succession, cease for a short
time and then begin again, or it may take place over a short period only, even
for a single day. The longest period, day after day, recorded, extended from
March 19 to April 5, 1916. This was around Horswell rock, at the northern
entrance to Departure Bay.

Where spawning takes place in the same area day after day the spawning is
by no means continuous. It seldom occurred outside of the period between
12 noon and 5 p.m. The height of the tide evidently had nothing to do with it
as the spawning was at its height at different times of the tide each day. On
this account, since the spawn is always deposited in shallow water, usually less
than 6 feet, much of that which is deposited at high tide is left exposed for some
hours at low tide, particularly at spring tide. These exposures seem to do no
harm, unless there is too much bright sun during the exposure. As the majority
of really low tides come at night during that season such a thing seldom happens.

It is not for lack of seaweed areas at greater depths that the shallow water
is used, as it often happens that the bottom at a little greater depth is much
more densely covered than the bottom near shore.

After spawning is over the herring are in no hurry to leave the shallow water.
They have been seen in Departure Bay in intervals during April and May, and
this year a small school stayed around continuously until the end of June.

The dangers of the deep water must be great if they are much greater than
the dangers of the shore and shallow water. While the herring are spawning
they are naturally not so active as at ordinary times and hence they fall a prey
to their enemies the more readily. As they are so near the surface the gulls
can see them and reach them readily. Since there are myriads of these they
must cause the disappearance of innumerable herring just at the time when
protection is most needed. The dogfish, doubtless their enemies at all times,

1On Clupea pallasii Cuvier and Valenciennes. Trans. Royal Can. Inst., 1916, p, 97-108,

108

=
(

are able to take their toll with greater ease and in consequence it is nothing out
of the way to find one with five or six herring in its stomach. The spring salmon
and many others of the larger fishes at times, at least, find herring a satisfactory
diet.

The danger to the fish is not the only danger, however, as the spawn exposed
at low tide is in position to suffer extensively. The effect of the weather has
already been mentioned, but much greater destruction is caused by the animals
that use spawn for food. In the Nanaimo district the various species of ducks,
especially the surf scoter, take predominance in this regard. These may be
seen by hundreds of thousands, and as each must get rid of millions of eggs per
day, it would be hard indeed to estimate the damage done in a season in this
way. I should have no hesitation in saying that I have seen sufficient numbers
of ducks feeding within a radius of five miles to destroy more fish—in the embryo
of course—in one day, than all the fishermen on the coast catch in a year. Many
fish, including the herring itself, as well as shore species among the invertebrates,
feed on this spawn, but all of these taken together must make a small showing
when compared with that taken by the ducks. It is well that the embryonic
life is short. If it were as long as that of the salmon, for instance, it would seem
as though none of the eggs would ever get a chance to hatch.

Nor is the danger ended with the hatching out of the eggs. When the fry
are still young, in the alevin stage, they are rather helpless since they are usually
found carried into large masses by the currents in such a way that they can
readily be seen and seized, more particularly by the many species of fish that
enjoy very young herring for breakfast. Here again the mature herring is one
of the many offenders.

The eggs when ripe are 1.4 to 1.6 mm. in diameter and in weight they run
from 900 to 1,200 to a gram weight of ovary, and the number of eggs varies much
with the age of the fish. Those spawning for the first time produce about
12,000 eggs, while the oldest or largest fish produce about 35,000. The develop-
ment of the embryo until the time of hatching has been described in the paper
to which reference has been made. After the yolk is absorbed the activity is
immediately increased. The individuals become more separated, but still
remain in large schools, and growth takes place quite rapidly.

The young herring just liberated from the shell membrane is 7 mm. long.
When the yolk is all absorbed it is about 1 mm. longer. At this time the pectoral
fins are present in the form of small flaps and the caudal fin is present, but the
anal fin is not separated from it. These are not supported by fin rays. None
of the other fins are distinct. Ata length of 12 mm. the dorsal fin appears as a
slight elevation; at 14 mm. the dorsal fin rays begin to appear. At 18 mm. the
end of the vertebral column, which up to this time has been straight, begins to
turn up to form the urostyle. At 20 cm. the urostyle is completely turned
upward, the dorsal and anal fin rays begin to show; the dorsal fin has 16 rays.
At 22 mm. a slight protuberance indicates the beginning of the pelvic fins; at
26 mm. these take definite shape; at 29 mm. the pelvic fin rays begin to appear.
At 35 mm. definite pectoral fin rays appear. .

Until now the young fish looks little like the older herring, but about this

109

time, 35 to 40 mm., the metamorphosis takes place, at which time the scales
begin to grow. This occurs about the end of June or the beginning of July.
In six months the fish are about 6 cm. long and in a year 9 to 10 cm. During
all of this period they live in immense schools along the shore and more par-
ticularly around the wharves and floats, where they mix freely with sticklebacks,
various species of young perch, sand launces and other small fish. Their staple
diet, as in the case of the older fish, consists largely of copepods. These may
make up the entire food supply and only occasionally does anything else pre-
dominate. Here also the diet may be varied by the nauplius and cypris larve
of barnacles, other crustacean larve, molluscan larve and eggs, ascidian larve,
rotifers and peridinia.

At much the same time as the mature herring leaves the shallow water for
the deep, the yearlings do also. Nothing has been observed to indicate that they
go out in the same schools. During the summer they are caught with hand
lines in swiftly running water in some of the main passes between the islands,
and in such cases they are not in very deep water. In the seine hauls made from
September to March there are seldom any young fish. It might be supposed
that they are small enough to pass through the meshes of the net leaving only
the larger ones in the net, but this can scarcely be correct as there are exceptions
to the general rule. One instance will illustrate. In November, 1914, the
fishermen were working off Cowichan Gap (Porlier Pass) and all the catches
lacked the usual uniformity. The fish were smaller than usual and consisted
of fish of many different sizes. On November 27 Mr. H. McIndoo, Fisheries
Overseer at Nanaimo, brought me in a pailful, taken without sorting, from one
of the catches. The 79 fish brought in were of 50 different lengths, differing
from 8.8 to 22.0cm. One was in the first year, 6 in the second, 47 in the third,
15 in the fourth, 8 in the fifth and 2 in the sixth. From this it would seem that
if the small fish were with the large ones on ordinary occasions they would be
caught as they were in this case. Furthermore, on different occasions, I have
watched a school of herring in continuous procession for hours pass a point and
often for shorter periods without seeing any small fish among them.

In their third year some of the herring spawn and these appear with the
schools of older fish, but comparatively few, even at this age, are found in the
seines. Probably much greater numbers spawn for the first time in their fourth
year. If the immature fish keep separate from the mature fish it will be a
difficult matter to find the time of the year at which the segregation takes place
or what determines the segregation. The North Sea investigators have con-
cluded that there is a time for such segregation among the Norwegian herring,
hence further work along that line may establish some important facts concerning
this mixing.

Doubtless the immature fish wander in towards shore and out again as the
mature fish do, but as they are small they are not observed readily. Whether
the individual school retains its main components, making additions from year
to year from the young fish to take the place of those that disappear or whether
there is promiscuous mixing of schools may not be determined readily, although
here again this seems to have been fairly well determined for the North Sea

110

herring. If the schools wander far there might easily be much mixing. If their
wanderings are restricted to a comparatively small area such mixing would
not so likely take place to any extent. Coast conditions along the British
Columbia coast are not readily comparable to those of the Norwegian coast
and with regard to two distinct species one may do nothing more than surmise
that the same habits would prevail.

In any case, after a fish has once spawned there is every indication that the
process is an annual one for the remainder of its life. It is probable that after
the first spawning the individual remains with the same school throughout the
rest of its life, although this would be a difficult matter to prove.

Extensive observations over a long period would be necessary to demonstrate
the racial differences in the different schools, but there is little doubt that such
differences exist; even though, in the main, their habits, times of migration, etc.,
may be very similar.

The majority of the fish caught in the purse seines are from’4 to 7 years old
and none have been found of a greater age than 10 years.

EBL

Ai *

‘ « =e

. b 0) — .
Te eh Oe Ua pe
Pr PY ade po tricieg acts

No. VII

ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE ANGLER (Lophius piscatorius, LE.)
BY

C. J. CONNOLLY, PH.D.
St. Francis Xavier's College, Antigonish, N.S.

On the Development of the Angler (Lophius piscatorius, L.)

By €) J. Connoriy, “Pap:

St. Francis Xavier’s College, Antigonish, N.S.
S S

INTRODUCTION.

During the summer of 1918 the writer made a study of the distribution, etc.,
of the Angler in Canadian waters and gave a general account of the life-history
of this fish in Bulletin No. 3, issued by the Biological Board of Canada. The
detailed results of observations made during that season are contained in the
following paper.

While carrying on another investigation at the Biological Station, St. Andrews,
N.B., during the summer months of 1919 and 1921, additional observations were
made on the early stages in the development of the Angler, and these are also
included in this paper.

I wish here to cordially thank Dr. A. G. Huntsman, Curator of the Biological
Station, for his kind assistance and many valuable suggestions while making
this investigation.

OvA OF THE ANGLER.

The period of spawning of the Angler, Lophius piscatorius, in Canadian
waters extends from about June to August. The eggs are embedded as a single
layer in a mucous band about thirty or forty feet in length, and this gelatinous
mass floats near the surface of the water. Fulton (1898, p. 118) has shown that
the mucoid substance is secreted by a specially modified epithelium. He has
further described the development of the ovarian eggs of Lophius from the
earliest stages to their maturation and has shown that the increase in volume of
the eggs during maturation is due to the imbibition of a watery fluid. The
specific gravity of the mature ovum, according to Milroy, is 1.034, while the
specific gravity of the mucous band, together with its mature ova, is 1.005.
The floating properties of the egg are due to the mucous substance. They are
pyriform when embedded in the mucous substance, but when free they assume
a more spherical form, though they still retain the flattened surfaces due to the
pressure of adjacent eggs. There are many small oil globules in the immature
egg, which fuse in the ripe egg to form one large oil globule.

DEVELOPMENT.

Agassiz described the young embryo just before hatching and also the early
larval stages. Prince described and figured embryos at the stage just before
hatching and also the early larval and post-larval stages for the European form,

115

but found no stage similar to the remarkable post-larval specimen figured by
Agassiz. His specimen resembled rather the post-larval stage obtained by
MacIntosh. Williamson made a further study of the larval Angler, showing
some minor points of difference, but with results agreeing essentially with those
of Prince. In all cases where the eggs have been found floating in the sea or
thrown up on the shore they contained embryos at well advanced stages or about
to hatch. So far as the writer can ascertain none of the earlier stages following
fertilization have been hitherto observed.

On June 24th, 1910, eggs of Lophius were found by the Indians at Pleasant
Point at the entrance of Passamaquoddy Bay. It was noted at the time that
the oil-globules in the eggs gave the entire mass a pink shade. A portion of
the mucous band containing the eggs was preserved in formalin at the Biological
Station, St. Andrews, N.B., and later transferred to alcohol. These eggs I
examined and found that they were in a very early stage of development; they
must have been taken shortly after fertilization. On account of the manner of
preservation, however, the eggs had undergone a considerable shrinkage. They
were all approximately in the same stage of development, and showed the
blastodisc divided into numerous cells or blastomeres at one pole of the egg and
a large oil-globule at the other. The greatest diameter of the egg measured
1.7 mm. The oil-globule measured 0.37 mm. in diameter. The egg capsule
showed distinct criss-cross markings, and a very thin layer of protoplasm which
surrounded the yolk ball after the blastodisc was formed, appeared shrunken
but was held fixed to the periphery by the blastodisc at one pole and by the
oil-globule at the opposite pole.

Further material was available during the summer of 1919 and on examina-
tion proved to contain embryos in very early stages of development. Portions
of a band of mucus containing eggs were picked up at Deer Point, Campobello,
on August 9th, 1916, and preserved in formalin. The mucous substance is
quite transparent and its presence in the preserving fluid is inferred from the
fixed positions which eggs maintain with respect to one another. Of the large
number of eggs examined all were in process of development. A large number
of the eggs, however, were quite opaque and difficult to examine. In these the
blastoderm had covered less than half of the yolk, and on being placed in formalin
suffered considerable shrinkage and distortion. The embryonic shield, with its
early differentiation of the embryonic axis rising from the embryonic ring, was
visible and at its anterior portion the head end appeared as a slight expansion
while posteriorly the caudal portion of the embryo projected downward for a
slight distance. Worthy of note is the very early pigmentation. The embryonic
shield and the lateral portions of the embryo were covered with black pigment
spots, circular in outline, but the neural region of the embryo remained free of
pigment, except for one or two patches in the head region. The pigmented
area apparently extends over the embryonic shield, though it was not possible
to determine accurately the limits of the shield which gradually merges into the
rest of the blastoderm.

In a large percentage of the eggs the blastoderm covered more than half
of the yolk, and in these no distortion occurred. The eggs were transparent

116

5
and the structure of the embryo quite clear. Figure 1 shows a stage in which
the blastoderm covers about five sixths of the surface of the yolk. The em-
bryonic ring is very narrow but distinctly marked. The embryo extends over
approximately one-half the circumference of the yolk, the perpendicular distance
from head to caudal extremity being 1.2mm. The pigment spots are now much
larger and branch frequently, connecting with each other. They cover the
larger portion of the blastoderm, only that portion opposite the embryo being
free of pigment. At this stage the optic sacs are beginning to be differentiated
and just posterior to them, the pigment spots extend across the median dorsal
region. A large oil-globule has its position opposite the caudal end of the
embryo. Sometimes a second oil-globule near the large one is present at this
stage. In some eggs that portion of the blastoderm covering the oil-globule

Fig. 1. Egg showing embryo at more advanced stage. es, embryonic shield; og, oil-globule;
er, embryonic ring; y, yolk.

becomes more densely pigmented than elsewhere, with the exception of the
lateral parts of the embryo, but in others the oil-globule is yet quite free of |
pigmentation. There is no indication at this stage of the formation of somites
In a few eggs the blastoderm has almost surrounded the yolk, the blastopore
having now a width about equal to the diameter of the oil-globule. There is no
further differentiation of the embryo shown at the slightly older stage except
that the head is more distinctly marked off.

In the summer of 1921 three specimens in early larval stages were observed
among material collected at Brazil Rock, off Barrington Passage, Shelburne
County, N.S. These specimens were taken with a young fish trawl on the
9th of August at a depth of 25 to 30 metres. They are but 8 to 9 mm. in length,
measured from the tip of the lower jaw to the extremity of the tail. In the 8 mm.

specimen there are four dorsal spines, the most anterior in position being 3 mm.
long and the fourth 0.5 mm., the other two, intermediate in position, being also
intermediate in size. The ventral fins possess two rays, the outer or the longer
ray being 4 mm. long and the inner about 3 mm. The bud of a third ray is
just beginning to appear. The rays bear dense patches of black pigment,
especially towards their extremities. The pectoral fins are pad-like structures
in which the rays are beginning to be differentiated. The other specimens,
8.5 mm. and 9 mm. in length, do not differ materially from the first, showing
merely a corresponding increase in the size of the parts. The second ray of the
ventral fin in the 9 mm. specimen has lengthened considerably and the third ray
is now 0.5 mm. long. In all three specimens a continuous median fin surrounds
the trunk and caudal region. Two large patches of black dendriform pigment
are present on each side of the trunk and a third is present near the caudal
extremity. The dorsal portion and the region of the body covered by the
pectoral fins are also heavily pigmented. The lower jaw protrudes beyond the
upper and bears a single row of conical teeth. A few small teeth were also
visible on the upper jaw.

On the same date that these specimens in the larval stage were taken Capt.
Arthur Calder, of the Biological boat Prince, captured with a dip-net a young
Lophius, which was swimming on the surface at Brazil Rock. This specimen
is in the post-larval stagé and approximates very closely the 30 mm. post-larval
stage described and figured by Agassiz. As some doubt apparently exists con-
cerning this stage, so grotesque in appearance, a few details will be given in con-
firmation of Agassiz’s observations. The specimen, however,”is apparently
abnormal in that the frontal surface of the head forms almost a right angle with
the axis of the trunk. It is true that this angle decreases with growth, but there
is only 4 mm. difference in length between this specimen and Agassiz’s, which is
hardly sufficient to account for so great a change. Moreover, the younger
larval stage 9 mm. in length does not show so great a cephalic angle, which in-
dicates that the Brazil Rock specimen is, in this respect, abnormal.

The Brazil Rock specimen has a total length of 26 mm. measured from tip
of lower jaw to extremity of tail. The greatest breadth of head is 7 mm.; greatest
height, 9 mm.; distance between eyes, 3.5 mm.; diameter of eye, 1.5 mm.
The median fins are all differentiated, though connected with one another by
a median fold at the base, and have well-developed fin rays. The anterior
dorsal spines, representing together the anterior dorsal fin, are six in number.
The first three are isolated from one another. The most anterior of these situated
2mm. behind tip of jaw, though longest in adult stage, is in this stage the shortest,
as figured by Agassiz. The first dorsal spine is 4 mm. long with a curved and
flattened tip; the second 7.5 mm. and the third 8 mm. long. Then follow
three dorsal spines connected by a membrane and forming the dorsal finlet,
the first and longest ray being 6.5 mm. in length. Posterior to these six spines,
forming together the anterior dorsal fin, is the second or posterior dorsal, having
a-length measured at the base of 8 mm. and a breadth expanded of 10 mm.
The caudal fin is 7 mm. long. The pectoral fins are fan-shaped structures held
erect and having a greatest breadth expanded of 14 mm. and a depth of 9 mm,

118

The rays of the ventral fins were damaged following the capture of the specimen
so that exact lengths could not be determined. They are 3 mm. wide at the
base. The median and shortest of the three rays reached slightly beyond the
extremity of the caudal fin. At its base and medial to it the bud of a fourth
ray was visible and lateral to the outer or longest ray the bud of a fifth ray.
The entire body, except the ventral surface between the anal fin and the origin
of the ventral fins, is mottled with dark brownish dendriform pigment spots.
The caudal fin is only slightly pigmented along its rays. On the upper surface
of the head three post-orbital spines were already visible.

RATE OF GROWTH.

While the structure of the young embryo at the time of hatching and the
following larval stages have been studied by various authors little is known
concerning the post-larval conditions and the rate of growth of the Angler. <A
description of a post-larval stage rarely met with has already been given. After
reaching the advanced post-larval stage it must seek greater depths, or seek
protection among algae-covered rocks, for specimens up to four or five inches
have rarely been observed either in American or European waters. According
to Fulton (19038, p. 187) one of the smallest European specimens found was
127 mm. or five inches long.

To determine the rate of growth it is, of course, necessary to begin with the
time of spawning. The period of spawning extends, as already mentioned,
from June to August; eggs in early stages of development were found in both
months in the same waters, namely Passamaquoddy Bay. Moreover, larval
stages 8 to 9 mm. in length, and a post-larval stage 26 mm. in length, were taken
August 9th at Brazil Rock, near the mouth of the Bay of Fundy.

Fig. 2. Photograph of Angler about three inches long,
captured in Halifax Harbour, N.S.

One of the youngest specimens found in Canadian waters and indeed one of
the smallest on record was caught in Halifax Harbour in 1870 and is preserved
in the Provincial Museum. It was identified by Dr. Theodore Gill, and a detailed
description of it is given by J. M. Jones in a report of the Nova Scotian Institute
of Science (Vol. III,. p. 103, 1871). Unfortunately, it is not now in a good state

119

of preservation. It has a total length of about 23 inches or 5.94 cm. The
exact date of its capture is not recorded, but it was taken “A few weeks”’ before
Mr. Jones read his paper in November, so that it was evidently spawned the
same year and is only a few months old. The second Halifax specimen has an
extreme length of 7.6 centimeters or about three inches (Fig. 2). It weighs
5.2 grams or about 5 of an ounce. There is likewise no exact date of capture
recorded for this specimen, but like the last it was obviously spawned the same
year. The largest of the three young specimens caught in Halifax Harbour, and
at present in the Provincial Museum, measures 13.3 centimeters or about 514
inches. It weighs 3414 grams or 13 ounces. This specimen belongs at least
to the previous year.

A specimen of the Angler caught on August 12th, 1910, at Campobello
Island, Bay of Fundy, and preserved in formalin, had an extreme length, measured
from the tip of the lower jaw to the extremity of the tail, of 11.2 centimeters or
about 41% inches and weighed 15.7 grams or about half an ounce (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3. Photograph of Angler four and a half inches long; dorsal and ventral view.

Though slightly shorter than the Halifax specimen there is a considerable
difference in development. The pectoral fins are membranous, wing-like struc-
tures and comparatively wide, being 3 centimeters or about 1 3/16 inches when
expanded, while in the latter specimen the pectorals have become thick, flipper-
like structures apparently more adapted for crawling than swimming. The
ventral fins of the Campobello specimen are long and narrow, and lie parallel
to the long axis of the body, while in the Halifax specimen they are broader
with strongly developed rays. They are now directed backwards and outwards,
crossing over the axils of the pectorals. The head in both specimens is about
one-third the length of the body. The Campobello specimen also belongs at
least to the previous year.

OTOLITHS AND THE RATE OF GROWTH.

In determining the age and growth of fishes the scale method has been
employed in recent years with much success. As the Angler is without scales

120

we must adopt another method to determine its growth. The otoliths, or
earstones, also show zones of growth and the rate of growth of some fishes has
been determined from them. Reibisch was the first to apply this method in
determining the rate of growth. The method, however, presents some difficulties
and is not so commonly used as the scale method.

The labyrinths, with their contained otoliths, are situated at the base of the
skull on either side of the brain. They can be exposed to view by making a
transverse cut in the skull on the line connecting the anterior margins of the
pectoral fins, cutting forward along the median axis of the skull, and then raising
the two sections of the top of the skull thus formed on either side of the median
axis. The lagena, or primitive cochlea, contains minute granules of calcareous
matter and where the two semi-circular canals join the sac there is a very small
otolith, but for determining the age of fishes only the large otolith, the so-called
sagitta, situated in the sacculus, is used.

The otoliths consist of calcareous matter and show a remarkable variety of
form in different fishes. They have all, however, essentially the same structure.
In the centre is an opaque kernel, oval or circular in outline, and around this
kernal or nucleus are concentric lines marking off the successive zones of growth.
During the rapid growth of summer a broad zone, which appears light under the
microscope by transmitted light, is formed and this zone is separated from the
zone of the following summer by a dark ring which represents the slow growth
of winter.

Fig. 4. Otolith one-twenty-fifth of an inch in diameter from Angler shown in figure 4.

In the young Angler fish represented in Figure 3 the otolith is quite small
(1 mm. or about 1/25 of an inch longest diameter), and is so thin that its structure
can easily be made out. In the centre is an opaque oval kernel (Fig. 4) and
around this there is a broad zone which, under higher magnification, is seen to
have fine concentric laminae. Taking into consideration the time of spawning

121

and the period of larval development it is probable that only the kernel could —
be formed during the first summer, and the line which limits it represents the
check in growth of the first winter. The broad zone around the kernel represents
the growth of the following summer so that this specimen is at least one year old.
A dark line divides the area outside the kernel into an inner broad opaque zone
and an outer narrow transparent zone. There is a possibility that this line
represents a check in the growth caused by a second winter and that the outer
marginal zone represents the growth of the following summer up to August 12th,
when the fish was caught. The outer zone is comparatively narrow to represent
an additional year, though it should be remembered that in the waters of the
Bay of Fundy the temperature is higher in the late than in early summer, and
consequently more rapid growth would take place in late summer.

In many fishes the otoliths of mature fish are so transparent that the zones
of growth are easily distinguished. In the specimen of the young Angler they
are also quite distinct, but in the adult they are opaque and irregular, so that
it is difficult, even when the otolith is ground down to a thin flake, to recognize
distinctly the annual rings of growth.

The otoliths of the Angler lie on either side of the brain with their long axis
slightly converging posteriorly towards the median axis of the body. They lie
somewhat tilted towards the brain. For descriptive purposes we may, with
Fryd, distinguish between a dorsal and a ventral margin, an outer and an inner
surface, an anterior and a posterior end. The lower or ventral margin is slightly
curved. The upper or dorsal margin is arched and notched. The outer surface
is concave and the inner somewhat convex. A little below the centre of the
inner surface there is a horizontal groove which stands in close relationship
with the macula acustica. Radial lines run along the surface from the central
portion to the upper margin and end in the notches.

The otoliths of the Angler are small for the size of the fish; their diameter
in a specimen 11.2 cm. long was, as we have seen, one mm. Below the measure-
ments of otoliths from Anglers of various sizes are given.

FIsH OTOLITH
Length Length Width Weight
95 cm. 9 mm. 6.5 mm. 0.12 grams
19°2-cm. a 6 _ ONO Tes
74 ~ Bie 5 " OrOby ays
AGYD 6:98 -— 5 + O20 aes
AOE Dis Oss i * O07 S55
103.405" a es 6 a 0.45
99 ~ TOs Se OAD SS a OAS taee

Apart from the typical features described above there is a great variety of
form in the otoliths of the Angler. Frequently the notches are quite deep,
forming prominent lobes, and in some cases the otolith is deeply cleft by a
groove dividing it into two main sections. In the other cases the notches are
barely perceptible. This is generally true of the otoliths of the young specimens.

122

Again the posterior end, though usually truncated, has often a conical pro-
tuberance directed backwards. Smaller papilla-like masses are frequently
present on other parts of the surface. There is thus a great variety in outline
and general appearance of the otoliths of the Angler of different ages and even
of those of approximately the same age. As Immerman has pointed out, it
would be an interesting problem to determine how variety of life conditions
cause this variation in the sculpture of otoliths having otherwise essentially
a constant structure.

VERTEBRAE AND THE RATE OF GROWTH.

The vertebrae also show annual rings and can likewise be used to determine
the age. Taking into consideration the structure and size of the vertebrae at
the end of the first year one can approximately determine the age by the broad
and whitish rings laid down in successive-years. In an Angler having a total
length of 46.5 cm., or about 18 inches, there were four distinct annual rings
indicating that the fish was four years old.

In larger specimens it is more difficult to make out the rings, but I have
estimated the ages as follows: length 46.5 cm. or 31 inches, 9 years; 95 cm. or
37 inches, 10 years; and 100 cm. or about 40 inches, 12 years. The average
yearly increment of growth is about 41% inches during the early years, and
gradually decreases in the older Angler. This is a slower growth than that
calculated by Fulton (1903, p. 194), who estimates that an Angler four years old
measures approximately twenty-seven inches. The slower growth could be
accounted for by the lower temperature in the Bay of Fundy.

The age-at, which maturity is reached was not determined definitely as a
sufficient number of specimens of different ages was not obtained. The specimen,
with a total length of 18 inches, was, however, not yet mature, while all specimens
over 30 inches in length were mature.

PIPE RAPTURE:

Acassiz, A.: On the Young Stages of Osseous Fishes. Proc. Amer. Acad. Sci.,
Vol. XVIII., p. 280, 1882.

AGAssiz and WHITMAN: The Dev. of Osseous Fishes. Mem. Mus. Comp.
Zool. Harvard, Vol. X1V., p. 16, 1885.

Fuiton, T. W.: On the Growth and Maturation of the Ovarian Eggs of Teleo-
stean Fishes. 16th Annual Rep. Fish. Bd. Scot., Pt. III., p. 88, 1898.

Futon, T. W.: The Distribution, Growth and Food of the Angler. 21st An.
Rep. Fishery Board Scot., Pt. I1I., p. 186, 1903.

Fryp, C.: Die Otolithen der Fische. Diss. Altona, 1901.

IMMERMANN, F.: Beitrage zur Altersbestimmung der Fische. Wiss. Meeres-
unters. Arb. d. w. Komm., No. 6. Bd. VIII., 1908.

Jones, J. M.: Proceedings and Trans. of the N.S. Inst. of Science. Vol. II.
1871.

123

McIntosu, W. C. and Princ&, E. E.: Development and Life-Histories of
Teleostean, Food and other Fishes. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., Vol. XXXV.,
p. 869, 1890.

Mrrroy, T. H.: The Physical and Chemical Changes taking Place in the Ova
of Certain Marine Teleosteans During Maturation. 16th An. Rep. Fish.
Ba..Scot., Pt. U1 .; p: 135; 1898:

Prince, E. E.: Notes on the Development of the Angler Fish. 9th An. Rep.
Fish. Bd. Scot., Pt. I1I,. p. 348, 1891.

Witui1amson, H. C.: Notes on the Eggs of the Angler. 28th An. Rep. Fish. Bd.
Scots Pt Ii. 1910.

ReIBIscH, J.: Ueber die Eizahl bei Pleuronectes platessa und die Altersbestim-
mung dieser Form aus den Otolithen. Wiss. Meeresunders, Abt. Kiel,

N.F., Bd. IV., 1869.

124

THE COMPOSITION OF LOBSTER MUSCLE
BY

SADIE N. BOYD, M.A.
Unwersity of Toronto

The Composition of Lobster Muscle

By SapiE N. Boyp, M.A.

University of Toronto.

This examination of lobster muscle was made because up to this time little
work had been done in this connection. Miss O. G. Patterson (1) has made
determinations of the coagulation points of the proteins of lobster muscle.
These are noted later. Dr. A. B. Macallum (2) analyzed the blood serum of
the lobster in order to determine whether there was any connection between its
- composition and the composition of the sea-water in which it lived.

In the following analysis a (3) qualitative study of the lobster muscle was
made to determine the elements present, and it was found to contain sodium,
potassium, a small amount of calcium, and only a trace of magnesium and iron.
These elements were present as phosphates, sulphates, carbonates, and chiefly
‘as chlorides.

The material used for the quantitative analysis was fresh lobster muscle. |
A determination was made of the ‘‘total solids’? present in each sample of
muscle for analysis. This was done in order that all results might be calculated
as per cent. of the dry material.

An estimation of the total salts present in lobster muscle was made in the
usual way of charring, extracting with hot water and ashing.

Dr. A. B. Macallum’s methods were used for separating calcium, magnesium
and iron, and determining the weight of each and also for the determination of
the weights of potassium and sodium. The usual methods (4) were used to
separate the chlorides and sulphates. They were precipitated as silver chloride
and barium sulphate respectively.

The following results were obtained in the complete quantitative analysis.
All results are calculated as per cent. of the dry material.

The total solids as ascertained in two determinations were averaged in one
case 21.39 per cent. and in the other 19.59 per cent. The fact that the muscle
which was used for the second determination was obtained at a different time
from that which was used for the first may probably account for the difference
in the results.

The total salts in the lobster muscle were found to average 8.3117 per cent.

127

The following are the results obtained for the weight of iron, calculated as
per cent. of the dry muscle.

Weight of dry Weight of % of iron Weight of % of iron Total iron
muscle (gms. ) oxide (gms.)| in oxide Fe PO, (gms.) in Fe P04 (per cent.)
18, 9h DOSS 0.0012 0. 0074 0.0002 0.0013 0. 0087
IT. 10.0038 0.0012 0.0040 0. 0004 0.0014 0.0054
2. I. 10.9674 0.0016 0.0052 0.0002 0. 0007 0.0059
II. 16.5412 0.0026 0.0057 0.0008 0.0017 0.0074
Std. 1. 980 / 0.0006 0.0027 0.0010 0.0046 0.0073
II, 12.9772 0.0014 0.0037 0.0016 0.0045 0.0082
4. I. 8.5964 0.0012 0.0049 0. 0002 0.0008 0.0057
II. 14.1552 0.0018 0.0044 0. 0006 0.0014 0.0058

The following table shows the weights obtained for the calcium and mag-
nesium.

Weigar ot dry bigs of ie % of Weight of % of % of
muscle See oe oe geo calcium Maenes Meg;(P0s)2 | Magnesium.
oxide oxide pyrophosphates
oe Rea a7 Bhs) 0.0208 0.3665 0.2655 0.0025 0.0440 0.0040
II. 10.0038 0.0360 0.3598 0. 2554 0.0033 0.0329 0.0030
2) le 10: 9674 0. 0433 0.3948 0. 2822 0.0149 0.0446 0.0040
II. 16.5412 0. 0629 0.3802 OL AAT 0.0339 0.0779 0.0072

The analysis of the ash gave the following results for the weights of sodium
and potassium.

Wt. of J of
Wt. of Wt. of | Wt. of | Wt. of | Naci | Wt. of | NaCl} Wt. of | %of | %of
muscle | platinum K. KCl & KCl NaCl & Na Na K
KCl

1. 4.0430 | 0.0616 | 0.0248 | 0.0472 | 0.2730 | 0.2258 | 6.75 | 0.0888 |2
2. 3.1148 | 0.0576 | 0.0232 | 0.0442 | 0.2064 | 0.1622 | 6.63 | 0.0638 |2
3. 3.2028 | 0.0563 | 0.0226 | 0.0484 | 0.2272 | 0.1788 | 7.09 | 0.0703 |2.1949| 0.7056
4. 4.3020 | 0.0551 | 0.0222 | 0.0476 | 0.2848 | 0.2372 | 6.62 | 0.09383 |2

The following table shows the weights obtained for chlorides.

Weight of Weight of % of % of
muscle AgCl AgCl Chlorides
3.3141 | 0.3394 10.0592 2.4884
Ar S21 0.4140 10.0190 PEAS 5 aus
3.7882 0.3870 10.2159 2.5272
1.6229 0.1632 10.0560 2.4876
1.8149 | 0.1822 10.0391 2.4835
1.6229 0. 1622 9.9944 2.4724

The weights obtained for the sulphates are shown in the following table.

Weight of Weight of % of ®, of
muscle Ba S04 gms. Ba S04 SOs
2.4475 0.0073 0.2982 0. 1022
3.3456 0.0093 0.2780 0.0954
2.5564 0.0077 0.3012 0.1033
2.9470 0.0092 0.3121 0.1070

An investigation of the mineral constituents of the muscle of various animals
by (5) Julius Katz led to a variety of results, which are quoted below as per cent.
of the dry material.

K Na Fe Ca Mg Cr S
Pig 0.9363 0.5752 0.0218 0.0298 0.1042 0.1787 | 0.7536
BIS Se ee 1.5200 0.2695 0.1019 0.0088 0. 1006 0.2342 | 0.7719
Deer 1.3586 0. 2848 0.0423 0.0388 0.1175 0.1637 | 0.8517
10 loo Ea 1.4178 0.4000 0.0193 0.0291 0. 1005 0.3415 | 0.9643
Fowl..... 1.4700 0.3008 0.0295 0.0333 0.1174 0.1904 | 0.9234
Codfish® .:.:.. 24, 1.7281 0.5118 0.0300 0.1138 0.0863 1.2447 | 1.1514
Brel ne eae tyes 3 0.6519 0.0812 0.0148 0.1061 0.0483 0.0935 | 0.3657
Bikers ek ns ear 2.0176 0. 1426 0.0209 0.1929 0.1505 0.1548 | 1.0576

Katz found the total solids in the codfish muscle to average 19.36 per cent.
and in the pike 20.62 per cent.

The following is a summary of the analysis of the lobster muscle which may
be compared with the table containing Katz’s results:

K Na Fe Gal Mg Cl S

Lobster a. 21 0.7399% | 2.1520% Diy eine ewe 0.0045% | 2.4876% |0.1020%

Total solids. ..21.39% 19.59%
129

Very few, if any, general conclusions may be drawn from a comparison of the
results quoted above. Each particular muscle is distinct in containing a definite
proportion of each of the mineral constituents. There are, however, several
outstanding facts which may be noted. In every kind of muscle, except that
of the cod-fish, pike and eel the calcium is less than the magnesium.

According to the results obtained in the analysis of the lobster muscle the |
calcium is greater than the magnesium. From these results it seems that this
may probably be a characteristic of marine forms. Examination of Katz’s
results shows that the amount of chlorides contained by any one form is highest
in the cod-fish. The lobster: muscle contains an even higher percentage of
chlorides. The fact that the cod-fish and lobster are both salt water forms
doubtless accounts for this. The sodium content of the cod-fish is higher than
that of the eel or pike, but highest of all in the lobster. With the potassium the
conditions seem to be reversed. The total solids in the lobster compare very
closely with the solids in the cod-fish and pike. On the whole the analysis
of the lobster muscle resembles most that of the cod-fish when considered in
conjunction with the other forms analysed by Katz, and as far as the figures
show, the features which seem to be common to marine forms are, similarity
in the amount of total solids, high percentage of chlorides, and low percentage of
magnesium, which is even less than the calcium.

The proteins in the lobster muscle were separated by fractional coagulation
(6) and (7).

Miss O. G. Patterson obtained coagulations in a distilled water extract of
the lobster muscle at the following temperatures: 39°, 47°, 52°, 62° and 70-71°C.
These results were verified in the following investigation.

A distilled water extract and a dilute salt solution extract of the muscle were
heated gradually and the coagulation filtered off whenever it formed. The
temperature was kept constant the necessary length of time.

From the results obtained it was seen that the muscle salts which were present
in the distilled water extract were sufficient in themselves to dissolve out the
proteins.

The following coagulation temperatures were obtained: 39°, 46°, 53°, 62°
and 72°. There are, therefore, probably five proteins present. This coincides
with Miss O. G. Patterson’s results.

The following table is a summary of the results which were obtained. The
figures given are the average results in each case.

Total Solids 21.39%—19.59% Chiloridessie yenenrerie . -2.4876%
otal Salise vy tier ethie 2 8.3117% sulphates seis tewer oben 0.1020%
\Ite6 hal pao Oe ge ae .. .0.0068% Sodium. (242: eA gee 2 120%
Raletumes. ii Scones 0.2687% Potassium: 27520 cme ee .0.7399%
Magnesium. ..-°.......<;. .-0.0045%

130

7
LITERATURE.

(1) O. G. PATTERSON: Unpublished results.

(2) A. B. Macattum: The Inorganic Composition of the Blood in Vertebrates
and Invertebrates and its Origin. From Proceedings of Roy. Soc. B.,
Vol. 82, 1910.

(3) Plimmer’s Physiological Chemistry.

(4) A.B. Macatium: p. 608. Same article as before stated. Also FRESENIUS,
p. 284. Instruction in Quantitative Chemical Analysis.

(5) Jurius Katz. Pfluger’s Archiv., Vol. 63,

(6) O. G. PATTERSON, Loc. cit.

(7) W. D. Hatisurton, Journal of Physiology, Vol. 5, p. 152; Vol. 18, p. 806.

151

‘
i
=

a
;

-rre,

No. IX.

RESULTS OF THE HUDSON BAY EXPEDITION, 1920.
I. THE FORAMINIFERA

JOSEPH A. CUSHMAN

Results of the Hudson Bay Expedition, 1920

I. The Foraminifera.
By JosEpH A. CUSHMAN.

The few bottom samples collected by Mr. Frits Johansen in Hudson Bay
and James Bay, 1920, were sent to me to examine for foraminifera. While the
number of species obtained is not large, they form a very interesting collection
from the standpoint of distribution. No foraminifera have previously been
known from this region. In all more than thirty species were obtained. These
are mostly species which are characteristic of Arctic conditions. A comparison
of these with the fauna known from other parts of the Arctic may be interesting.

One of the most interesting things is the lack of certain species which are
common elsewhere in the Arctic. Such, for example, is Hyperammina_ sub-
nodosa, which is abundant in the Canadian Arctic Expedition collection, 1913-18,
and also north of Newfoundland. It may be noted, however, that Kiaer did
not record this species in his paper on the American Arctic. Other species
which were abundant in the Canadian Arctic collection are missing in the Hudson
Bay collection or are replaced by other species.

A comparison of the Hudson Bay collection with the fauna recorded by
Brady from off Nova Zembla, and by Parker and Jones from Baffins Bay and
Davis Strait shows that these faunas are both very similar. It is evident, from
a comparison of these faunas, that the foraminifera of Hudson Bay are more
closely allied to regions to the east than to the regions to the west of this longitude.
It is also very evident from a study of both of these collections that there are
developed in the Arctic regions very definite species, which are distinct from the
warmer water forms often assigned to the same species.

STATIONS FROM WHICH MATERIAL WAS EXAMINED WITH SPECIES OF FORAMINI-
FERA AT EACH STATION.

(1) Bay at (N. of) S.E. point of South Twin Island, James Bay, 4-5 fathoms.
Sand, gravel, and stones. July 27, 1920.
Trochammina rotaliformis, Vernewilina advena, Discorbis wrighti, Poly-
stomella striato-punctata, var. incerta, Quinqueloculina seminulum.
(2) Bay on south side of Grey Goose Island, east side of James Bay (lat.
54°N.), 10 fathoms. Sandy mud and algae. July 30, 31, 1920.
Ammobaculites cassis, Trochammina rotaliformis, Patellina corrugata,
Pulvinulina frigida, Potystomella striato-punctata, var. incerta, Quinque-
loculina seminulum, Quinqueloculina subrotunda.
(3) Richmond Gulf (about 3 miles from entrance), east coast of Hudson
Bay, 15-20 fathoms. Stones, sand, and Delesseria-algae. August 23, 1920.

135

Sorosphaera confusa, Psammatodendron ayborescens, Haplophragmoides
canariensis, Verneutlina advena, Lagena globosa, Polymorphina lactea,
Discorbis wrightii, Truncatulina lobatula, Pulvinulina frigida, Nonionina
stelligera, Polystomella striato-punctata, var. incerta, Cornuspira foliacea,
Quinqueloculina seminulum, Quinqueloculina subrotunda.

(4) Bay inside Boat opening, Manitouk Sound, east coast of Hudson Bay,
5-7 fathoms. Clay with sand and stones. August 27, 1920.

Pelosina variabilis, Pelosina cylindrica, Pelosina rotundata, Webbinella
hemisphaerica, Tholosina bulla, Reophax curtus, Ammobaculites cassis,
Trochammina rotaliformis, Verneuilina advena, Polymorphina lactea?

(5) Bay between Black Whale and Olaska Harbours, E. coast of Hudson
Bay (about lat.55 N.), 10 fathoms. Sandy mud with many loose algae. August
28, 1920.

Psammosphaera fusca, Reophax curtus?, Ammobaculites cassis, Trocham-
mina rotaliformis, Verneuilina advena, Nodosaria calomorpha, Poly-
morphina lactea, Polymorphina lanceolata, Polymorphina ovata, Poly-
morphina oblonga, Discorbis wright, Pulvinulina frigida, Nonionina
orbicularis, Nonionina scapha, Polystomella striato-punctata, var. incerta,
Polystomella arctica, Cornuspira foliacea, Quinqueloculina seminulum,
Quinqueloculina subrotunda, Triloculina oblonga, Quinqueloculina sp.

(6) Sound between Paint Hills Islands, east coast of James Bay, 10 fathoms.
Sept. 10, 1920. Sandy mud with stones.

Trochammina rotaliformis, Nonionina -orbicularis, Polystomella_ striato-
punctata, var. incerta, Quinqueloculina sp.

FAMILY ASTRORHIZIDAE.

GENUS PSAMMOSPHAERA F. E. SCHULZE, 1875.
Psammosphaera fusca F. E. Schulze.

Psammosphaera fusca F. E. Schulze, II. Jahr. Comm. Wiss. Unt. deutsch. Meer
in Kiel, 1875, p. 1138, pl. 2, figs. 8 a-f—H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger,
Zoology, vol. 9, 1884, p. 249, pl. 18, figs. 1, 5-8 (not 2-4).

Rare specimens occur only at station 5. They are composed of small,
angular quartz grains, with a whitish cement, and no visible apertures. The
species is recorded from a very wide range, but there are entirely different
forms which should be carefully studied. I have recorded a large form from the
western Atlantic (Bull. 104, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 1, 1918, pl. 13, fig. 6; pl. 14,
figs. 1-3) which may not be this species. It is certainly not like this northern
form which seems to be typical. The type station is Hougesund, Norway,
120 fathoms. iy

GENUS SOROSPHAERA H. B. Brapy, 1879.

Sorosphaera confusa H. B. Brady?

Sorosphaera confusa H. B. Brady, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 19, 1879, p. 28,
pl. 4, figs. 18, 19; Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9, 1884, p. 251, pl. 18,
figs. 9, 10.

136

There are a very few specimens from station 3 which may be referred to this
species with some doubt. They are composed of fine white amorphous material
for the most part, of several chambers irregularly arranged, but with definite
apertures. In one of the specimens these are irregularly grouped near where
the chambers intersect, in another they are remote from one another. In the
usual form of the species the apertures are not apparent, according to the de-
scription, but the figures in the Challenger Report show rather definite areas
which appear to be apertures closed by amorphous material. Most of the other
records are from deep water.

GENUS PELOsINA H. B. BRADY, 1879.

Pelosina variabilis H. B. Brady.

Pelosina variabilis H. B. Brady, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 19, 1879, p. 30,
pl. 3, figs. 1-3; Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9, 1884, p. 235, pl. 26,
figs. 7-9—Flint, Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1897 (1899), p. 266, pl. 4, fig. 1.—
Rhumbler, Arch. Prot., vol. 3, 1908, p. 239, fig. 74 (in text) Chapman,
Trans. New Zealand Inst., vol. 38, 1905, p. 83.—Cushman, Bull. 71, U.S.
Nat. Mus., pt. 1, 1910, p. 47, fig. 52 (in text).—Heron-Allen and Earland,
Trans. Linn. Soc. London, vol. 11, pt. 18, 1916, p. 218.—Cushman, Bull.
104, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 1, 1918, p. 53, pl. 22, figs. 1-4.

At station 4 this and the two following species occur. One of the specimens
of P. variabilis has a double aperture. The test is composed of fine-grained,
light-coloured, amorphous material. Most of the records for the species are
in cold or deep water.

Pelosina cylindrica H. B. Brady.

Pelosina cylindrica H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9, 1884,
p. 236, pl. 26, figs. 1-6.—Egger, Abh. bay. Akad. Wiss. Miinchen, vol. 18,
1893, p:. 253, pl. 4, figs. 1, 2.—Rhumbler, Arch. Prot., vol. 3, 19038, p. 239,
fig. 72 (in text).—Chapman, Trans. New Zealand Inst., vol. 38, 1905, p. 83.
—Cushman, Bull. 71, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 1, 1910, p. 46, figs. 50, 51 (in
text).—Pearcey, Trans. Roy. Soc..Edinburgh, vol. 49, 1914, p. 1002.—
Cushman, Bull. 104, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 1, 1918, p. 54, pl. 22, fig. 5.

Rhizammina indivisa Goés (part), Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl., vol. 29, 1896, p. 20.

Like the preceding, this species is known mostly from deep, cold waters.

It is recorded from the Antarctic as well as from northern regions. The Hudson

Bay specimens are tubular with thick walls of amorphous material which carry

sand grains imbedded in the surface.

Pelosina rotundata H. B. Brady.

Pelosina rotundata H. B. Brady, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 19, 1879, p. 31,
pl. 3, figs. 4,5; Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9, 1884, p. 236, pl. 25,
figs. 18-20.—Egger, Abh. bay. Akad. Wiss. Miinchen, vol. 18, 1893, p. 254,
pl. 11, fig. 60.—Rhumbler, Arch. Prot., vol. 3, 1903, p. 239, fig. 71 (in text). -

137

Chapman, Trans. New Zealand Inst., vol. 38, 1905, p. 83.—Cushman,
Bull, 7F,-U.S2 Nat:-Mus., pt. 1; 1910; p.” 45,< figs “47-49 eGn stexere
Bull, 104, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 1, 1918, p. 55, pl. 21, figs. 4-6.

A few specimens were found which seemed to belong to this genus. They
had apertures, but were without necks. Later a single specimen with the
tapering tubular neck was found, showing that the whole are probably P. rotun-
data. Records for typical specimens are rare and much scattered.

GENUS WEBBINELLA RHUMBLER, 1903.
Webbinella hemisphaerica (Jones, Parker and H. B. Brady).

Webbina hemisphaerica Jones, Parker and H. B. Brady, Pal. Soc. Mon., 1865,
p- 27, pl. 4, fig. 5—Robertson, Rep: Brit. Ass., 1875, p. 189:— He BB: Brady
Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9, 1884, p. 350, pl. 41, fig. 11.—Egger,
Abh. bay. Akad. Wiss. Miinchen, vol. 18, 1893, p. 266, pl. 14, figs. 1-3.
Cushman, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 34, 1908, p. 24.+Heron-
Allen and Earland, Prec. Roy. Irish Acad., vol. 31, pt. 64, 1913, p. 53.

Webbinella hemisphaerica Rhumbler, Arch. Prot., vol. 3, 1903, p. 228, fig. 54
(in text).—Cushman, Bull. 71, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 1, 1910, p. 51, figs> 56a,
(in text).—Pearcey,. Trans. Roy: Soc-}Edinburgh, vol. 49; 1914) p: 1002:
Cushman, Bull. 104, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 1, 1918, p. 62, pl- 25, figs. 1-3.

At station 4.this species is evidently common as numerous small stones
sent me had numerous specimens-on their surfaces. The specimens are not as
high as that of the Challenger Report figure, nor are they of the same texture or
shape. The same is true of a comparison of those I have figured from off the
Carolinas, and there is a considerable difference from either of the others.

The specimens which are common in Hudson Bay give the appearance of
being the résult of selection in position of the material. If it may be supposed
that the original animal was free and able to ingest various sorts of material, it
is easy to see how the test might be formed. The whole is somewhat convex in
the central portion, with a thinning toward the periphery which is in general
circular, but often somewhat irregular. The central cavity in broken specimens
is comparatively small. It is bordered with the largest sand grains of the
whole test, and the outside gradually becoming finer, until the final outer coating
is very fine and smooth. There is no apparent aperture. All the specimens
examined are very uniform in structure and in appearance. This would lead
one to the belief that in this region there is a definite species, probably not the
same as that described by Jones, Parker and H. B. Brady, nor the same as that
figured in the Challenger Report, nor the same as that I have figured and referred
to above.

GENUAS THOLOSINA RHUMBLER, 1895.
Tholosina bulla (H. B. Brady)?

This species which was so abundant in the Canadian Arctic Expedition
collection seems to be almost wanting in Hudson Bay, unless a single detached

138

specimen represents it. The specimen is of the usual convex form and white
colour, and shows the central cavity. T. vesicularis was also entirely lacking in
the collection.

GENUS PSAMMATODENDRON NORMAN, 1881.
Psammatodendron arborescens Norman.

Psammatodendron arborescens Norman, MSS. in H. B. Brady, Denkschr. k.
Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. 43, 1881, p. 98; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 5,
vol. 8, 1881, p. 404.—-Eimer and Fickert, Zeitschr. Wiss. Zool., vol. 65, 1899,
p-o70:— Cushman, Bull. 104, U.S. NatrMus., pt. 1, 1918;-p. 79), pl. 30)
ines: 1.2.

Hyperammina arborescens H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9,
1884, p. 262; pl. 28, figs. 12, 13.—Wright, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club,
1884-85, App. IX., 1886, p. 319, pl. 26, fig. 1—Goés, Kéngl. Svensk. Vet.
Akad. Handl., vol. 25, No. 9, 1884, p. 18, pl. 4, figs. 68, 64.—Schaudinn,
Bergens Mus. Aarbok, 1894-95, No. 9, p. 5—Rhumbler, Arch. Prot., vol. 3,
1903, p. 260, fig. 102 (in text).—Awerinzew, Mem. Acad. Imp. Sci. St.
Petersburg, ser. 8, vol. 29, No. 3, 1911, p. 11.—Heron-Allen and Earland,
Trans. Linn. Soc. London, vol. 11, pt. 13, 1916, p. 220.—Cushman, Bull.
L@4--U-S) Naty Mus., pt. 1; 1918; p.. 79}: pl..30; figs..1, 2.

This species seems to be characteristic of the colder regions of the North
Atlantic and Arctic Oceans. It is recorded by Awerinzew from the Siberian
Arctic. In the North Atlantic it is known from off the coast of Norway and
Great Britain as well as further north off Greenland, Iceland, Nova Zembla,
and Franz Joseph Land.

— Only small branching portions were found in the Hudson Bay collection at

station 3.

BAMILY-LEEUOLIDAE.
GENus REOPHAX MonTrort, 1808.
Reophax curtus Cushman.

Reophax scorpiurus Goés (part) (not R..scorpiurus Montfort), Kéngl. Svensk.

Vet. Akad. Handl., vol. 25, No. 9, 1894, p. 24, pl. 5, figs. 160-163.
Reophax curtus Cushman, Bull. 104, U. S, Nat. Mus., pt. 2, 1920, p. 8, pl. 2,
figs. 2,°3.

Test short and thick, composed typically of three chambers, increasing
rapidly in size as added, last-formed chamber making up a large proportion of
the test, fusiform or elliptic, axis of the test straight or more often slightly
curved; wall composed of angular quartz sand grains, with a considerable
amount of grey cement between; apertural end slightly tapering, without a
definite neck, the aperture being an opening between three or more sand grains
at the end of the chamber.

Length up to 2 mm.

The type station for this species is Albatross D2458 in 89 fathoms, north of
the Grand Banks, in very cold water (29.5°F.). Fine, large, typical specimens

139

are common at station 4, and a single specimen from station 5 may be referred
here. The species occurs off Greenland and off the north coast of Europe in
cold water.

The species is shorter, thicker, and fewer-chambered than R. scorpiurus,
the chambers fewer and longer than in R. pilulifer, and different in the material
of the wall and in the number and shape of the chambers from R. dilocularis.

It seems to be a species of cold waters and moderate depths.

Goés figures this species under the name of R. scorpiurus in the reference
noted above. The specimens were from the Greenland Sea in 35-215 meters,
and from the Skagerack in 250 meters.

GENUS HAPLOPHRAGMOIDES CUSHMAN, 1910.
Haplophragmoides canariensis (d’Orbigny).

A single specimen only from station 3 gives the only record for this species
in the collection. It has been already recorded from the Canadian Arctic
Expedition and from other Arctic areas, as well as in temperate regions. It is
evidently not the same as that found in shallow, tropical waters.

GENUS AMMOBACULITES CUSHMAN, 1910.
Ammobaculites cassis (Parker).

Lituola cassis Parker, in Dawson, Canad. Nat., vol. 5, 1870, pp. 117, 180, fig. 3.

Haplophragmium cassis H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9.
1884, p. 304, pl. 33, figs. 17-19.—Goés, K6ngl. Svensk. Vet. Akad. Handl.,
vol. 25, No. 9, 1894, p. 24, pl. 5, figs. 152-157.—Flint, Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus.,
1897 (1899), p. 275, pl. 19, fig. 4—Awerinzew, Mem. Acad. Imp. Sci. St.
Petersburg, ser. 8, vol. 29, No. 3, 1911, p. 20.

Ammobaculites cassis Cushman, Rep. Canadian Arctic Exped., vol. 9, pt. M,
1920, p. 6m, pl. 1, fig. 3; Bull. 104, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 2, 1920, p. 63, pl.
12, fie. 5.

At one station (4), specimens were fairly common. The specimens are mostly
fairly broad, but some more slender ones also occur, but as a rule, these seem to
be young. There are a few specimens also from stations 2 and 5.

A. cassis is one of the species characteristic of cold waters. It ranges south-
ward as far as Cape Cod on the Atlantic coast, thence northward along the
New England coast, into the mouth of the St. Lawrence, Gaspé Bay, thence
westward into Hudson Bay, and is known from off Greenland, Spitzbergen,
Nova Zembla, the Siberian Arctic, and from the Canadian Arctic. It also
apparently is in cold waters in the North Pacific. The records are all in com-
paratively shallow waters.

GENUS TROCHAMMINA PARKER AND JONES, 1860.

Trochammina rotaliformis J. Wright.

Trochammina inflata (Montagu), var., Balkwill and Wright, Trans. Roy. Irish
Acad., vol. 28 (Science), 1885, p. 331, pl. 13, figs. 11, 12.

140

Trochammina rotaliformis J. Wright, in Heron-Allen and Earland, Journ.
Roy. Micr. Soc., 1911, p. 309.—Heron-Allen and Earland, Proc. Roy. Irish
Acad., vol. 31, pt. 64, 1913, p. 52, pl. 3, figs. 11-13.—Cushman, Bull. 104,
Les: Nat. Mus: -pt. 2, 1920; p. 77, pl. 16, figs. 1,2.

This is one of the commonest species in the collection. It occurs at all but
one of the stations, and at station 5 in great numbers. The specimens are very
similar to the original figures given by Balkwill and Wright, much more so than
those given by Heron-Allen and Earland from the Clare Island region.

It has not previously been recorded from the western Atlantic and I failed
to find it in the Albatross dredgings from Newfoundland southward. It may bea
species of shallow water. Its occurrence in Hudson Bay is an interesting one.

FAMILY TEXTULARIIDAE

GENUS VERNEUILINA D’ORBIGNY, 1840.

Verneuilina advena Cushman, new species.

Test minute, elongate, triserial, tapering, broadest near the apertural end,
composed of as many as twenty-five chambers, inflated; sutures distinct and
depressed; wall arenaceous, but very smoothly finished on the exterior, the
amount of cement and fine material being proportionately large; aperture in a
deep depression at the junction of the last of the three series of chambers; colour
reddish-brown, the last-formed chamber often white.

Length usually not over 0.3 mm.

At four of the stations this minute species has occurred, and at station 3 in
some considerable numbers. It is known from the Canadian Arctic Expedition
where I recorded it as V. polystropha (Rep. Canadian Arctic Exped., vol. 9,
pt. M, 1920, p. 8m, pl. 1, fig. 5). I have also found it off our eastern Atlantic
coast, and it is known from other regions to the north. It is probably recorded
under V. polystropha from various localities. Verneuilina scabra (Williamson)
_ (V. polystropha in part) does not so far as I have seen, occur in the western
Atlantic.

Heron-Allen and Earland have recently published a paper (Proc. Roy. Irish
Acad., vol. 35, No. 8, 1920) in which they note and figure this species, referring
it to V. polystropha, and speaking of it as a dwarf form as a result of “‘nanism.”’
Inasmuch as the larger typical form does not seem to occur on the American
coast, and this smaller species is widely distributed here, it would seem that
the two are distinct. Beside the difference in distribution there are very definite
characters in the size, and especially the characters of the wall which distinguish
the two.

FAMILY LAGENIDAE.

GENUS LAGENA WALKER AND Boys, 1784.

Lagena globosa (Montagu).

‘“‘Serpula (Lagena) laevis globosa’’ Walker and eee Test. Min., 1784, p. 3,
pes. figs-8:
141

Vermiculum globosum Montagu, Test. Brit., 1803, p. 523.

Lagena globosa Brown, Illus. Rec. Conch. Great Britain and Ireland, ed. 1, 1827,
plhisfie. 37.—Cushman, Bull? 71, U:S: Nat. Mus, pt. 371913).p.3a0le
fig. 2.

At station 3 there were taken several specimens that evidently belong to this
species as usually known. They are of the elongate form figured by Brady in
the Challenger Report (pl. 56, fig. 1). It is recorded from Baffins Bay by Parker
and Jones, and there are other records from various parts of the Arctic.

GENUS NoposARIA LAMARCK, 1812.
Nodosaria calomorpha Reuss.

Nodosaria calomorpha Reuss, Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. 25, 1865, p. 129,
pl. 1, figs. 15-19.—H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9,
1884, p. 497, pl. 61, figs. 23-27.—Cushman, Bull. 71, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 3,
1913, p. 48, pl. 25, fig. 6.

A single, two-chambered specimen was found in the bottom material from
station 5. It is similar to the specimens figured by Brady, the test translucent
and thin-walled.

Awerinzew records this species from the Siberian Arctic.

GENUS POLYMORPHINA D’ORBIGNY, 1826.
Polymorphina lactea (Walker and Jacob).

“Serpula tenuis ovalis laevis’? Walker and Boys, Test. Min., 1784, p. 2, pl. 1,
fig. 5.

“ Polymorpha Subcordiformia vel Oviformia’’ Soldani, Testaceographia, vol. 1,
peronel 7 Ol pts pl alto tise: al Lam. sete:

Serpula lactea Walker and Jacob, Adams’ Essays, ed. 2, 1798, p. 634, pl. 24,
fig. 4.

Polymorphina lactea Magillivray, Moll. Aberd., 1843, p. 320.—H. B. Brady,
Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9, 1884, p. 559, pl. 71, fig. 11.—Cushman,
Bull. 71, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 3, 1913, p. 84, pl. 34, fig. 8.

A few specimens, somewhat compressed, resemble the figures given of this
species. The specimens are translucent and thin-walled. They occurred at
stations 3, 4, and 5. The species of Polymorphina, as recorded in the literature
of this genus, are in a state of great confusion. From studies I have made of
tropical material and that from cooler regions it seems that careful discrimination
will result in definite distributions of a considerable number of species.

Polymorphina lanceolata Reuss.

Polymorphina lanceolata Reuss, Zeitschr. Deutsch, Geol. Gesell., vol. 3, 1851,
p. 83, pl. 6, fig. 50—H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9,
1884, p. 492, pl. 61, fig. 32—Cushman, Rep. Canadian Arctic Exped.,
vol. 9, pt. M, 1920, p. 9m.

Forms referred to this species, as figured by Brady, are rare at station 5.

The surface is smooth and polished and the sutures hardly depressed.

142

11
Polymorphina ovata d’Orbigny.

Polymorphina ovata d’Orbigny, For. Foss. Vienne, 1846, p. 233, pl. 18, figs. 1-3.
—H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9, 1884, p. 564, pl. 72,
figs. 7, 8.—Cushman, Bull. 71, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 3, 1913, p. 87, pl. 30,
fig. 2.

Rare specimens which show an alternating of chambers somewhat similar

to those figured by Brady occur at station 5.

Polymorphina oblonga d’Orbigny.

Polymorphina oblonga d’Orbigny, For. Foss. Vienne, 1846, p. 232, pl. 12, figs. 29-
31.—H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9, 1884, p. 569,
pl. 73, figs. 2-4——Cushman, Bull. 71, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 3, 1913, p. 88,
pl. 37, fig. 6. ;
Specimens very similar to the figures given by Brady occur at station 5. .
The sutures are depressed and the chambers stand out from the general surface.

FAMILY ROTALIIDAE.
GENUS PATELLINA WILLIAMSON, 1858.
Patellina corrugata Williamson.

Patellina corrugata Williamson, Rec. Foram. Great Britain, 1858, p. 46, pl. 3,
figs. 86-89.—H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9, 1884,
p. 634, pl. 86, figs. 1-7—Cushman, Bull. 71, U.S. Nat. Mus., pt. 5, 1915,
py Osepl. 4; hig. 1.

A single specimen of this interesting species was obtained in the material
from station 3. It is typical of the cold water form of this species. Records
of its distribution range as far north as 83°19’N., at a depth of 72 fathoms. It
is also known from off Nova Zembla and the coasts of Europe. I have recorded
it on the Atlantic coast from the Woods Hole region. This is probably different
from the species so common in shallow water of the South Pacific which has
_ been assigned to this of Williamson.

GENus DiscorBis LAMARCK, 1804.
Discordis wrightii (H. B. Brady).

Discorbina parisiensis J. Wright (in part) (not d’Orbigny), Proc. Belfast Nat.
Field Club, 1876-1877 (1877), Appendix, p. 105, pl. 4, figs. 2 a-c.
Discorbina wrightii H. B. Brady, Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. 43, pt. 2,
1881, p. 104. pl. 2, figs. 6a, 6—Earland, Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, ser. 2,
vol. 9, 1905, p. 223.—Heron-Allen and Earland, Proc. Roy. Irish Acad.,
volsaly, pr. 04, 1913 p.-13i; plel2 fig 4
A small specimen very similar to Brady's original figure with the beading
of the ventral side extending about half way from. the periphery to the umbilicus
occurred at station 3. From station 5 there is a better developed specimen
which has become somewhat flatter on the ventral side, and has the beading

143

extending to the periphery. From station 1 is a specimen, or rather two speci-
mens in a plastogamic condition, which are evidently this same species.

Brady’s original specimens were from off Nova Zembla and the species has
been recorded by Heron-Allen and Earland from. the coasts of the British Isles...

GENUS TRUNCATULINA D’ORBIGNY, 1826.
Truncatulina lobatula (Walker and Jacob).

Truncatulina lobatula Cushman, Rep. Canadian Arctic Exped., vol. 9, pt. M,
1920, p. 9m.
This species, which has already been recorded in the Canadian Arctic Ex-
pedition occurs at station 3 in Hudson Bay. It is not as common, however, as
might be expected.

GENUS PULVINULINA PARKER AND JONES, 1862.
Pulvinulina frigida Cushman, new species.

Pulvinulina karsteni H. B. Brady (not Retss), Trans. Linn. Soc. London, vol. 29,
1864, p. 470.

Pulvinulina repanda (Fichtel and Moll), var. karstent Parker and Jones, Phil.
Trans:, vol. 155, 1865; p. 396, pl. 14, figs, 14; 15, 17.

Test small, biconvex, rotaliform, composed of about two and one-half coils;
chambers distinct, usually six in the last-formed coil; sutures distinct but not
depressed on the, dorsal side, on the ventral side slightly depressed and filled
with an amorphous material radiating out from the umbilical region; wall clear
and translucent on the dorsal side, usually showing all the chambers back to
the proloculum distinctly, on the ventral side less clear.

Diameter up to 0.4 mm.

This Arctic, or at least cold water species, was obtained at stations 2,3, and 5.
It is not the same as P. karsteni Reuss, as a reference to the original figures will
show, especially the ventral side. The figures given by Parker and Jones of
Arctic specimens are very excellent for this species as it occurs in Hudson Bay.
There is little or no trace of any carina on the ventral side except that the material
filling the sutural depressions sometimes becomes confluent along the periphery.
The species was referred by Brady to P. karsteni in 1864, and he has been followed
since. Brady’s notes in 1864 are interesting in this connection.

“Three or four small starved specimens of this species have been pointed
out amongst my mountings by Mr. Parker. . . . As I have never met
with mature specimens,-I can only refer to Professor Reuss’s memoir on
the Chalk of Mecklenburg (Zeitsch. Deutsch. Geol. Gesellsch., vol. vii.,
p. 273, pl. 9, fig. 6), and in this instance I have preferred copying his figures
of the shell to drawing direct from immature specimens.”

The following quotation is from Parker and Jones in 1865:

‘This is a neat, many-chambered, moderately conical variety of P. repanda,
with some degree of limbation bordering the chambers, especially beneath,
where a wheel-like system of exogenous shell-matter characterizes the
shell.”’

144

They also note differences between the Arctic and North Atlantic specimens
referred to this species and also that Reuss’s figure is not exactly like either.

P. frigida is evidently an Arctic species of definite distribution and definitely
characterized.

FAMILY NUMMULITIDAE.
GENUS NONIONINA D’ORBIGNY, 1826.
Nonionina orbicularis H. B. Brady.

Nonitonina orbicularis H. B. Brady, Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol., 48, 1881,
p. 105, pl: 2;figs. 5a,b; Ann. Mag.> Nat: Hist., ser. 5; vol. 8, 1881, p. 415;
pl. 21, figs. 5a, b; Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9, 1884, p. 727, pl. 109,
figs. 20, 21.—Heron-Allen and Earland, Trans. Linn. Soc. London, Zoology,
ser. 2, vol. 11, 1916, p. 280.

In the Hudson Bay collection this species is fairly common, especially at
station 5, with fewer specimens at station 6. They are very simular in all respects
to the specimen figured by Brady from off Nova Zembla. The species is evi-
dently an Arctic one of wide distribution in cold waters. The figures of speci-
mens from warm waters referred to this species are evidently nat identical with
it. In general form, and especially in the condition of the umbilicus and sutures,
the specimens are exactly like the Nova Zembla specimens.

Nonionina stelligera d’Orbigny.

This species I have already recorded from the collection of the Canadian
Arctic Expedition. It is known from many Arctic and Subarctic localities.
The only specimen from Hudson Bay was from station 3.

D’Orbigny’s original specimens were from shore sands from the Canaries
at Teneriffe, and it would be interesting to obtain specimens of this from this.
locality to see if in reality it is the same as this widely distributed Arctic species

Nonionina scapha (Fichtel and Moll).

Nautilus scapha Fichtel and Moll, Test. Micr., 1803, p. 105, pl. 19, figs. d-f.

Nonionina scapha Parker and Jones, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, vol. 5, 1860,
p: 102, No. 4.

Polystomella crispa Linné, vat. (Nonionina) scapha Parker and Jones, Phil.
Trans., vol. 155, 1865, p. 404, pl. 14, figs. 37, 38; pl. 17, figs. 55, 56.

A very few specimens were obtained from station 5. They are of the very
broad, triangular form, in apertural view similar to the Arctic and North Atlantic
specimens figured by Parker and Jones in the above reference. This form is
very striking and different from many of the figures assigned to this species from
other regions by many authors.

= GENUS POLYSTOMELLA LAMARCK, 1822.

Polystomella striato-punctata (Fichtel and Moll), var. incerta (Williamson).

This variety I have already recorded from the collection of the Canadian
Arctic Expedition. It has occurred in the Hudson Bay collection at all but one

145

station, 1, 2,3, 5, and 6. From the records it seems to be widely distributed in
the Arctic and Subarctic regions.

Polystomella arctica Parker and Jones.

This circumpolar species occurs in the collection from Hudson Bay from
station 5. I have already recorded it from the Canadian Arctic Expedition.
There are numerous other specimens which have a form similar to this but
have a single row of openings, but with a broad band of exogenous shell material
above each suture. .

FAMILY MILIOLIDAE.
GENUS CORNUSPIRA SCHULTZE, 1854.
Cornuspira foliacea (Philippi).

In the Report of the Canadian Arctic Expedition I have given notes on this
species. It has again been found in very similar form in these collections from
Hudson Bay, occurring at stations 3 and 5.

GENUS QUINQUELOCULINA D’ORBIGNY, 1826.
Ouinqueloculina seminulum (Linné) ?

This species was recorded from the collection of the Canadian Arctic Expedi-
tion. It is recorded in most of the Arctic collections. Our specimens, however,
are all of a stout, squarish shape, with a very highly polished, smooth surface.
They were from stations 1, 2, 3, and 5, not common at any of the stations.

In shape these specimens are nearest to the figure given by Parker and Jones
(Phil. Trans., vol. 155, 1865, pl. 15, fig. 34) as Miholina (Quinqueloculina)
oblonga (Montagu) from the Arctic.

Quinqueloculina subrotunda (Montagu).

Most of the lists from the Arctic include this species. It has occurred in the
Hudson Bay collection at stations 2, 3, and 5. It was previously found in the
collection of the Canadian Arctic Expedition.

Quinqueloculina sp.

There is a single specimen of an arenaceous Quingueloculina from station 5.
It is dark red in colour and of different form from Q. agglutinans d’Orbigny.
Parker and Jones record this arenaceous reddish form from the Arctic.

Quinqueloculina sp.

From station 6 there is a single large specimen very similar to that figured
by Parker and Jones (Phil. Trans., vol. 155, 1865, pl. 15, figs. 36 a-c), and referred
by them to Quinqueloculina ferussacii d’'Orbigny. It is not the same as
d’Orbigny’s species and may possibly represent a distinct Arctic form.

146

iL
GENUS TRILOCULINA D’ORBIGNY, 1826.
Triloculina oblonga (Montagu).

Vermiculum oblongum Montagu, Test. Brit., 1903, p. 522, pl. 14, fig. 9.
Triloculina oblonga d’Orbigny, Ann. Sci. Nat., vo]. 7, 1826, p. 300, No. 16;
Modéles, No. 95; in.De la Sagra, Hist. Fis. Pol. Nat. Cuba, 1839, “ Foram-
iniféres,”’ p. 155, pl. 10, figs. 3-5—Cushman, Bull. 71, U.S. Nat. Mus.,
puso, lol7. p09, pl. 26, fig..3* figs. oo, 66 Gu. text).
Miliolina oblonga H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, vol. 9, 1884,
p. 160, pl. 5, figs. 4a, 0b.
There are numerous specimens from station 5 which may be referred to this
species. They are not as elongate as tropical specimens such as are usually
assigned to 7. oblonga. The surface of the test is smooth and polished.

147

No. X

RESULTS OF THE HUDSON BAY EXPEDITION, 1920

If. THE GASTEROSTEIDAZ

PHILIP COX, PH.D.

Results of the Hudson Bay Expedition, 1920
II. The Gasterosteide.

By Puitrp Cox, Pa.D.

In the winter of 1920-21, I received a collection of sticklebacks from Mr.
Frits Johansen, which he had made in James and Hudson Bay and the tributary
waters at the instance of the Biological Board of Canada. It is of special
interest as being the largest collection of such material ever made in those
regions, about whose fish fauna so little is definitely known. It consists of
nearly 200 specimens, which are in a good state of preservation.

Our knowledge of the sticklebacks of Hudson Bay is merely fragmentary
and very incomplete. To illustrate this, it is only necessary to state that in
“Fishes of North and Middle America,’ Jordan and Evermann, 1896-1900,
Hudson Bay is mentioned only once and that in a footnote. The Atlantic and
Pacific coast forms, as well as those of the interior, are well known through the
writings of Richardson, Reinhardt, Storer, DeKay, Girard, Eigenmann, Kendall,
and others; but little is known of the species of Hudson Bay. Information from
that remote and hitherto inaccessible region leaked out slowly. It is gratifying,
however, to learn that the Biological Board of Canada is making successful
progress in unlocking the hidden treasures of the north, and making them known
to the scientific public.

Sticklebacks were taken at 15 stations, which, for convenience of reference,
I have numbered, giving also the dates.

Tula: 3; Stn. No. 1—Ponds in swamp on beach, and at low tide, south

coast of James Bay, 30 miles west of Moose River.

= 8. Stn. No. 2.—Pools in swamp at Fort Albany, James Bay.

“14-15. Stn. No. 3.—Pond at Moose Factory.

eee oO: Stn. No. 4.—Pools at beach, east side of Charlton Island, James
Bay.

faeaael ote Stn. No. 5.—Trout pond on south side of Charlton Island.

ita 2. Stn. No. 6.—East side of South Twin Island, James Bay.

Aug. 6&7. Stn. No. 7.—Creek-mouth, east side of Hudson Bay, about 15
miles north of Great Whale River. ;

fe 8-11. Stn. No. 8.—East coast of Hudson Bay, lat. 56° N.

fee lee Stn. No. 9.—Ponds on river flats, second river south of Little
Whale River, east side of Hudson Bay.

Sept. 2: Stn. No. 10.—Sea surface between Cape Jones and Long Island,
east coast of Hudson Bay, 1 mile off mainland.

Sept 10). Stn) Nos ll ast coast, James Bay, lat. 53° N.
eee bale Stn. No. 12.—Moar Bay, east coast of James Bay, about lat. 53° N.

151

Sept. 14. Stn. No. 13.—Brackish land-locked pool (creek outlet) at beach
of Cape Hope Islands, east side of James Bay,
lat. 52730! N:
22 Stn. No. 14.—In pools in creek, interior of Charlton Island, James
Bay.
Oct. (middle) Stn. No. 15.—In pools at Abitibi River, and between New Post
and Moose River.

Eucalia inconstans (IKIRTLAND).
BROOK STICKLEBACK.

The writer is not aware of any previous record of this species from the
Hudson Bay country, nor is there any from Newfoundland or Labrador. Its
alleged occurrence at Sukkertoppen, Greenland (Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila.,
1865, p. 81), by E. D. Cope, would seem to need verification.

Mr. Johansen found this species at stations 2, 3, 5, 13, 14 and 15, but seemingly
not in abundance; or, perhaps, the facilities for making large hauls were not at
hand. A new character, however, has been added to the distribution; namely,
its occurrence in saltish water, for he collected it at station 13 in a “brackish
land-locked pool.’’ It has always been regarded as a strictly fresh-water species,
and its occurrence there may have been accidental; but, in high latitudes, the
severe cold, long winters, and deep freezing of coastwise streams and ponds may
induce, or rather force, a migration to brackish water. In this way the species
may have become more tolerant of such a medium. Whitefish, too, in the far
north, are known to descend to the sea, or at least into brackish estuaries.

The fish are fairly typical of the species as met with in the United States and
southern and western Canada. It is observed, however, that the gill membrane
is freer from the isthmus, the depth less in proportion to the length, the pelvic
spines shorter, and the thoracic processes less divergent; but minor differences
such as these are specifically unimportant, and are apt to be seen among all
species when representatives from widely separated localities are compared.

Pygosteus pungitius (LINNAEUS).
NINE-SPINED STICKLEBACK.

It was to be expected that this species would be met with, for it is the most
widely distributed of all the sticklebacks and probably extends its range farther
into the boreal regions of-North America than any other. It had been recorded
from Greenland, Labrador, the Arctic islands, and the Hudson Bay country.

Mr. Johansen collected it at stations 1, 4, 6, 9, 10, and 13, and generally
in quantity. At station 1, 69 specimens were secured; at station 7, lat. 56°,
the most northern point visited, only 4 were taken.

The majority is composed of under-sized and young fish. One specimen,
the largest, is 63 mm. long. The dorsal spines are 9; a very few have 10; one
has 8. No example with 7 is seen. This is about the status of the species
elsewhere. In colour and colour pattern they are similar to those of the Bay of
Fundy, though somewhat duller. :

Gasterosteus cuviert (GIRARD).

This partly naked stickleback is the only Gasterosteus in the collection.
By some authors it is classed as a variety or subspecies of the fully armoured
G. bispinosus, but the reason is not apparent. Its characters are very uniform
over a wide range, including Hudson Bay, and intermediate forms, linking it
with the alleged parent species, are not met within this range. These are the
essentials of a good species, and entitle it to full recognition as such.

It was found tobe common. At stations 1, 3, 8, 10, 11, 12 and 13 collections
were made. It does not seem to be limited to tidal pools, creeks, estuaries, and
shore waters, but occurs at considerable distances from the coast, as for instance
at station 10.

The fish are, on the average, small, the largest being 54 mm. in length, or a
little over half the greatest length of G. bispinosus in the Gulf of St. Lawrence
-and Atlantic shore waters of Nova Scotia. The lateral scales are typically
4-4, occasionally 4-5, rarely 5-5; nothing beyond this is seen. They are counted
from behind the one under the first dorsal spine backwards.

G. bispinosus does not appear in the collection; it is doubtful if it occurs
in Hudson Bay at all. In the United States National Museum there is one
small collection of Gasterosteus from Hudson Bay, but it consists entirely of
cuviert; neither is any other found in the collection made there by Rev’d. W. G.
Walton in 1919 and examined by the writer.

153

No XI

DIATOMS: FROM THE QUILL LAKES, SASKATCHEWAN, AND FROM
AIRDRIE, ALBERTA

Ee Wo BAe. (Pal Eb:
‘Fredericton, N.B.

Diatoms from the Quill Lakes, Saskatchewan, and from
Airdrie, Alberta

Bye WwW: BAILEY, Pa: D:;* lL: D:
Fredericton, N.B.

The collections of Diatoms from the two localities named above are of
exceptional interest, first from the fact that the lakes referred to are saline lakes
and contain a number of species of marine types not previously found at points
remote from the sea, and secondly, as showing that certain forms, previously
referred to distinct genera, are in reality different aspects of a single genus and
a single species.

ite
DIATOMS FROM QUILL LAKEs.°

The lakes are two in number, viz., Big Quill Lake and Little Quill Lake,
and are not widely separated from each other, being situated on the line of the
Canadian Pacific Railway, near Kandahar, in the Province of Saskatchewan.
Both are saline, receiving fresh water only from local drainage and having no
outlet. The salinity in the larger lake is about one half that of sea water or
1.65%, the bases present in the salt being, as in sea water, in order of relative
abundance, sodium, magnesium, calcium and potassium. The salinity of the
smaller lake is considerably less, and the amount of calcium is also much less.
The larger lake is deeper than the other, with drainage from a smaller area
coming into it, and in Spring remains frozen for a much longer period. Both
lakes occupy simple depressions of the surface, without any distinct evidence of
glacial origin. The collections were made by Dr. A. G. Huntsman, of Toronto
University in 1920, and to him I am indebted for the foregoing particulars of the
locality.

Besides Diatoms, the waters of the Quill Lakes contain very large numbers of
Copepods and other Crustacea, as well as Infusoria and fresh water Algae.

The Diatoms are very numerous, as indicated by the lists which follow, these
being based mainly upon observations made by the writer and Dr. A. H. MacKay
of Halifax, N.S., but supplemented by a few afforded by Mr. H. C. Wheeler
of Montreal, Mr. Oliver Kendall, Jr., of Providence, R.I., and Mr. Chas. S.
Boyer of Philadelphia. For the measurements of species I am wholly indebted
to the labour of Dr. MacKay.

The most interesting feature connected with these collections is that, though
found so far inland, they contain not less than six genera or species which are
usually regarded as wholly marine. These are the following:

“- Amphiprora ornata—Bail.

Chaetoceras.

Pleurosigma elongaium.

Thalasstothrix nitzschioides.

Cocconets scutellum?

Surtrella striatula, or a closely related species, S. Batleyana.

S. ovalis, Breb. with its varieties, ovata and Brightwellit.

157

It is difficult to account for the presence of these marine forms, none of
which, with a single exception, has been previously found in the inland lakes of
Canada or elsewhere. The exception is in the case of the genus Chaetoceras, a
species of which has been found by Mr. Boyer of Philadelphia in the waters of
the Devil’s Lake of Nevada, also a saline lake, and which has been described
and figured by him under the name of Chaetoceras Elmoret. It closely resembles,
but is apparently not identical with that of the Quill Lakes, and is more fully
described below.

It has been suggested that the occurrence of these marine types at a point
so remote from the sea and wholly disconnected with the latter may be due to
the agency of migratory birds, which are. known to sometimes carry organisms
of different kinds to long distances, but in this instance we have to consider
not a few isolated individuals but large communities, the forms of Chaetoceras
being present by the thousand, as are the Surirellas, which constitute the most
abundant as they are the most conspicuous of the species present, while the
others, though less numerous, are by no means rare. It is evident that the
Quill Lakes are their natural home, as further indicated by the fact that they
include reproductive as well as vegetative specimens. If the agency of birds
in transportation be accepted as the explanation of their presence it will follow
that these brought only a few individuals as the original stock, and these, being
active, continued to multiply under the favourable conditions afforded by the
salinity of the lakes. The only other supposition would seem to be that they
are survivals of a time when the sea actually covered the region in which they
are found, possibly in some one ‘of the inter-glacial periods. In the case of the
Devil's Lake in Utah, which contains a similar Chaetoceras, this is known to be
of glacial origin, but that the same is the case with the Quill Lakes has not yet
been ascertained. .

Another feature of interest in connection with the Quill Lake gatherings
is that of the species present at least two, and perhaps three, are believed to be
either entirely new or new varieties of species already known. These are the
following:

Surirella Batleyana MACKAY oR S. striatula VAR. Batleyana McK.
(Plate I, Figs. 3 to 5).

Valve broadly ovate, in length from 100 to 185 microns and in breadth
varying from 30 to 65 mu. Often twisted, the twist sometimes confined to the
narrower end but often involving the entire frustule as in S. spiralis Kutz, or
S. torquata Pant. Canaliculi distant, 7 to 13 on each side, large and conspicuous,
also more or less twisted from a branching symmetry, rectangular to the axis
in central portion of the valve, but curving outward toward either extremity.
Marginal area strongly lobed. Striation fine, showing lines from 15 to 20 in
ten microns, with a marginal row of small points more distant along the outer
margin of each lobe. Zonal view showing strong transverse ribs, alternating
with small dots.

158

Localities: Big and Little Quill Lakes, Saskatchewan. Very abundant.

The above species is the most characteristic one in the Quill Lake gatherings.
It bears a close resemblance in general aspect and dimensions to Swrirella striatula
Turpen, of which it may be only a variety; but as indicated in the above diag-
nosis, it differs in important particulars. It also nearly resembles Pantocsek’s
S. torquata, from the marine fossil deposits of Karand, Hungary, the latter
exhibiting similar sizes of costae, striae and marginal points, being also similarly
twisted. S. striatula is a marine species, and besides occurring in the modern
ocean is found in the same fossil deposits as S. torquata. There can be but little
doubt that the form now under consideration is of marine origin. |S. striatula
also occurs in the salt water of the Great Salt Lake in Utah, where varieties
like ovata and Brightwellii of Brebisson’s S. ovalis are found. These marine
forms are found in the Quill Lakes, if not also a variety Quillensis, as distinct as
Grunow’s variety S. ovata K. var. Utahensis, which is nearly identical with 5S.
ovalis Breb. var. Brightwellit Sm.

Cyclotella Quillensis, L. W. Batu.
(Plater, Fie. 2).

Valves circular, in the form of low vaulted domes, of which the surface is
sometimes slightly undulated. The size varies from 50 to 70 microns. Striae
radiant as in Cyclotella compta, but arranged in three or four concentric circles,
of which the outer has the character of ribs rather than striae, being strong and
more or less distinctly pearled, while the second is much fainter and the third
visible only with high powers. Even a fourth circle can sometimes be made out,
approaching the apex of the low zone. The number of marginal ribs is about
6 in 10 microns, and from these, in many cases, spring spines from one to two
microns long, thus bearing a close resemblance to Stephanodiscus. Minute
nodules are sometimes visible at the inner end of the second, third or fourth
zone of radiating striae. The centre of the dome is usually smooth, but some-
times shows a number of dots irregularly arranged. The species is larger than
C. Kutzingiana or C. compta, being more like C. Meneghiniana. The marginal
radial ribs look as if they might have been developed from striae originating like
those of S. astrea or S. Niagarae, while the fainter second circle is not continuous
with these, but appears to spring from an inter-rib depression.

Localities: Big and Little Quill Lakes, Saskatchewan.

Chaetoceras Quillensis, L. W. Batu.
(Plate I., Fig. 2).

Primary frustules quadrate, concatenate, in zonal view from 4 to 16 mu,
in valval view 6 to 18 mu. Secondary valves unlike, the surface of one rising
into a well marked dome, while the second, by a marked constriction becomes
bottle-necked. Between one frustule and another extends in some instances
a small tube, connecting dome with dome as in Chaetoceras Elmorei, Boyer.
Setae 4 to each frustule, straight, 100 microns or more in length, crossing at
joints and making angles of less than 60 degrees. Foramina narrowly linear.

Locality: Quill Lake, Saskatchewan.

159

Specimens of Chaetoceras are very abundant in some of the Quill Lake gather-
ings, though apparently wanting in others. They occur in both lakes and
probably include more than one species. That described above closely resembles
the form described and figured by C. S. Boyer under the name of Chaetoceras
Elmorei, as found in the Devil’s Lake, North Dacotah:-—which, like the Quill
Lakes, is saline—but others appear to differ.

Excepting in the Devil’s Lake locality no species of the genus Chaetoceras
has heretofore been found in any inland waters, unless it be those of the Caspian -
Sea. It is also to be noticed, as bearing upon the theory of transportation by
birds, that the species in question is wholly different from any other forms as
yet observed upon either the Atlantic or Pacific sea boards of America or else-
where.

List oF DIATOMS FROM LITTLE AND BiG QuILL LAKEs, SASKATCHEWAN.*

Amphiprora lepidoptera Greg. 85 (42:30:42) s20.
Amphora commutata Grun. 56 (11) s10.
es ovalis K. 33 (15) s13.
i: salina W. Sm. 26 (6) ?
Campylodiscus clypeus E. 210 (210) s1; 110 (110) s2 and 12.
Chaetoceras Quillensis (nov. sp.) z16 (15); z18 (12); z4 (15). Setae 100 plus,
crossing at joints making angles ol
less than 60. Valval view 18 (10)
13.(G)F 9} 46:
Cymbella ehrenbergii K. 45 (10) s10.
zs tumida Breb. 62 (5:15:5) s8.
Cyclotella compta (E) K. 25 (9:7:9) s6 and 18.
cp compta var. affinis Grun. 23 (63:10:63) s10.
< Quillensis (n. sp.) 50 (50) s6; 75 (75) s6.
Encyonema ? 26 (7) s16.
Epithemia gibba K. 130 (5:8:5) s6; 90 (7:10:7) sé.
Eunotia pectinalis var. undulata Ralfs. 82 (7) s10.
Fragillaria virescens Ralfs. 32 (45/11) s18.
Gomphonema capitatum E. 70 (7:10:20:15) s8.
Mastogloia lanceolata Thew. 58 (3:11:38) sO.
- Smithii Thew. 30 (10) s16.
os var. lacustria Grun.
Melosira granulata (E) Ralfs. z15 (12) s8; 29 (12) s12.
ag distans K. z16 (40/5) s16. .
Navicula acrospheria var. sandricensis A. S. 94 (13:9:16:9:13) s10.
A ammophila Grun. (or mollis Sm.) 29 (7) s11. Doubtful
Navicula anglica Ralfs. (Doubtful.) 35 (4:15:4) s13.
‘ bacilliformis Grun. 38 (9:9 :9) s20.
cs crucicula W. Sm. 48 (5:15:5) s17.
a; cryptocephala K. 40 (3:10:83) s12.

*For explanation of formulae see last page.

160

Navicula forcipata Grev. 30 (11) s20. Too small (and marine) to be the sp. but
has a resemblance. Only one specimen.
ii Grevillei Ag. 55 (6:15:5) s10 and 20.
e aridis KE. 75 (238).
of “~- var. producta? 50 (8:12:3) s16.
. major K. 190 (25:28:25) s7.
. mesolepta E. 60 (8:12:9:12:9:12:8).
ss oblonga K. 72 (9:11:9) s10. A small variety.
s ovalis Hilse, 56 (34) s8 and 12.
a Ouillensis (nov. sp.) 110 (10:30:10) s13.
of scutellum O.M. (?) 33 (16) s14.
A tenella Bréb. 29 (2:6:2) s10.
Nitzschia hungarica Grun. 60 (..11:12:11..) s16 and 8.
is thermalis (K) Grun. 48 (3:5:3) s16 and 0 (?).
tryblionella Hantzsch. V. calida Grun.
Pleurosigma attenuatum W. Sm.
accuminatum (KK) Grun. 120 (4:14:4) s20. Sigmoid.
. elongatum W. Sm. 260 (5:25:5) s17.
Rhoicosphenia curvata Grun. 30 (5:10) s14.
Stauronets crucigera Sm. 45 (5:14:5) s20 and stauros?
s salina W. Sm. 45 (18) s20 and St.
Tabellaria fenestrata K. 68 (6:33 :8:33 :6) $17.
oe ovalis Bréb. 95 (66) s38 and 18; 62 (33) s3 and 18.
‘‘ var. ovata K. 80 (60) s4 and 18; 50 (40) s3 and 18.
ss = “ Brightwellat Sm. 58 (51) s3 and 18; 40 (28) s383 and 18.
‘ x Crumena Breb. Nearly circular (?).
s ‘“ minuta Breb. Like Brightwellii, but smaller (2?) 25 (19).
S. Baileyana MacKay 155 (107) sl and 5 and 18; 100 (80) s75 (53) s2 & 18.
Very abundant and contorted or twisted.
S. biseriata Bréb. 160 (30:45:20) s2.
S. limaris Sm. var. constricta 55 (14:13:14) s3.
ee acus (K) Grun. 82 (3:5:3) s16; 100 (2:6:2) s16.
danica (K) 110 (14:1:4:14) s12.
5 pulchella (IK) 72 (6) s16.
* nitzschioides Grun. 70 (3). (See Thalassiothrix.)
: ning T2283 (36:3). 72 (82133) sli.
Thalassiothrix nitzschioides Grun. 70 3); 45: (3) S13; 32 (4) sis.
Vanheurckia vulgaris Thw. 50 (5:9:5) s?; 40 (5:9:5) s?; 30 (5:9:5) s?; 23 (4:8:4) s?

ie
DIATOMS FROM AIRDRIE, ALBERTA

The diatoms in the list following were found in a collection made by Mr. H.
C. Wheeler from a ditch near the C.P.R. track at Airdrie in November, 1920.
Ampbphora ovalis K. 33 (9) s10.

" var ayinis We 30 (6)rsi2- .

161

Cocconeis oblonga K.B. (?) 18 .(14), 18 (10).
pediculus E. 20 (15) s20.
Cyclotella Meneghtmana K. (?) 22 (22) s8.
Cymbella lanceolata E. 80 (7:20:7) s6-7. Frequent.
Encyonema ——————(?). Small variety.
Be gibba (E) K. 190 ( ) s7 and 14. Abundant.
var. parallela Grun. (?).
var. ventricosa Grun. 94 (8:7:11:7:8) s5.
Hyndmant W. Sm. (?).
turgida (E) K. 110 (7:15:7) s8. Very abundant.
o var. vertagus Grun. (?).
. Westermannit (E) K. (?) 87 (8:18:8).
: zebra (E) K. 48 (4:10:4) s12. Abundant.
Gomphonema acuminatum, var. elongatum W.Sm. Common. 47 (3:5:4:8:5:9:4)
sl0.
intricatum (?).
lanceolatum (?).
turris E. 58 (4:18:10:5) s6 to 9. Frequent.
ASO amphioxys Grun. 55 (2:8:8:2) s19. Frequent.
amphioxys Grun. var. intermedia Grun. 60 (3:10:3) s6 and 16; 71
(3:2:8-2°3) .s6~and. 15; \-80"(3aloear
s6 and 13. Frequent.
amphioxys var. major Grun. 182 (5:14:5) s6 and 12. Frequent.
amphioxys var. (?). 80 (3:25:11:23:3) s3 and 15. Approximating
H. virgata.
Melosira (?) Rare.
Navicula bipunctata Grun. (2) 30 (6:6:6:6:6) 20s.
>. ESE K. f. radiata 124 (4:26:4) s9 to 14.
Fs f. parallela 103 (4:24:4) s14.
$ ‘. e (craticulated) 78 (33:20:33) s14, 80 (4:18:4)s14.
< % var. ambigua E. f. radiata 54 (4:3:13:3:4).
a . rh f. parallela 75 (4:4:19:4:4:) s14, 98 (5:21:
y 5) s16. Craticulated.
“4 Hs var. Kendalli, f. radiata, 115 (9:26:9) s8 to 12, 120 (5:23:5)
s6 to 12.
ss ¢ A f. parallela, 150 (11:31:11) s10, 165 (14:32:14)
s12, 175. ((12:33712) sil 1s0sGes

BoA) sili2e

ce z Craticulated, 142 (10:27:10), 155
(11:29:11), 163 (11:31:11), 184
CtsO-11)s

a lacunarum Grun. 40 (8) s20. Rare.

4 oblonga K. var. (?) 104 (13) s7. Rare.

3 parva E. 65 (9:9:9) s8 to 10. Not rare.
cy pupula K. 36 (7:7:8:7:7) s20.

os viridis K. 100 (19) s7. Common.

162

Navicula ————(?), z35 (8:7:8). s10, v37 (8:7:8) s9. May be a new species not
distant from JN. borealis.
Nitzschia amphibia 17 (1:4:1) s8 and 16. Not rare.
a vermicularis (KK) Grun. 100 (43) s8 and ?.. Not common.
Y a (2?) 103 (10:15:13:15:10) s43 and 18. Not rare. May be
new.

i -—_————(?) 32 (5) s7 and 15. Rare.

Stauronets phoenicenteron E. Rare.
Synedra ulna E. Rare.

The most interesting feature of this collection is that it affords positive proof
that two Diatoms previously referred not only to distinct species but also to
two distinct genera are‘in reality but two different plates: of a single species.
The two forms thus regarded as being even generically different are Navicula
cuspidata KK. and Surtrella craticula—both of similar shape and dimensions, but
with the sculpture of the former consisting only of fine striae, closely approximated
and rectangular to the raphe, while the second exhibits a surface which is strongly
and irregularly craticulated. In the Airdrie collection both of these are found
rather abundantly, but with them are others less abundant, in which the features
thus referred to are both found in the same specimens, difference of focussing
being all that is required to bring the one or the other into view, as may be
desired. By the same focussing the craticular form of Surirella craticula is
proved to be the inner plate of Navicula cuspidata.

Dr. Mackay, on the receipt of a mounted sample of this collection from
Mr. O. Kendall of Providence, R.I., U.S.A., accompanied by photomicrographs
herewith reproduced, maintains that a diatom of the Navicula cuspidata group,
which abounds in a conspicuously fine craticulated form, is of co-ordinate specific
or varietal value to ambigua E., halophila Grun. and its larger variety major
Heribaud, and to Perrotetttt Grun. of Senegal, which it most nearly approaches.
(See Schmidt’s Atlas, 221:33). Instead of adding to the number of species he
takes at present the more conservative course of treating all these forms as
varieties of the species cuspidaia. On the other hand he is equally ready to
allow them as species of the N. cuspidata group. Ambigua, in both the normal
and craticulated form, is sharply distinguished from the others by its rostro-
capitate ends, and the others by the rounding out of the rostrate ends of the
type cuspidata.

These three other forms are of a similar type. Tapering from more or less
narrow but rounded ends they swell more or less evenly to a maximum breadth
at the centre, the exact dimensions of which can be comparatively shown in
Dr. MacKay’s notation as follows: *

IN. halophata Grun. 50 ( -:10: .).s19 to 70 (- -:12: +.) s20.
N. halophila V. major Her. 110 (4:17:4) s16 to 136 (4:20:4).
N. Perrotettit Grun. 175 (16:41:16), Schmidt’s Atlas, 211:33.

*The numbers are microns—the length standing first, the breadths at the principal points
of flexure along the margin of the valve being within the parenthesis separated by colons.
The letter “S’” following stands for “‘sculpture’’ and the number following for the number of
lines or dot elements in the sculpture in the space of ten microns.

163

N. Kendalli (nov. sp.) 142 (10:27:10) Crat., 180 (14:33:14) s12 to 184 (11:30:11)
sll to 12:

Halophila, meaning “‘salt loving,”’ is given in Paragallo’s Marine Diatoms of

France as found in brackish water in France, Belgium and England. Perrolettii

and Kendalli may be the same possibly, the one from Senegal, the other from
Alberta.

ADDENDUM

BY :
A. H. MacKay

The varieties and forms of Navicula cuspidata Ktz. from Airdrie were de-
scribed before I had obtained Cleve’s Synopsis of the Naviculoid Diatoms, 1894;
the works of Héribaud and his collaborators on the diatoms of Auvergne, France
(1893 to 1920); and the work of Pantocsek on the diatoms of Hungary, etc.

Cleve reduces all our forms to three species:

halophila Grun. (1881),

cuspidata Ktz. with a few varieties, and

Perrotetti.

In the Diatoms of Auvergne the following species are described:

cuspidata Ktz.

halophila Grun.

ambigua Ehr.

[éribaudi, Peragallo

Aubertit, Hérib.

Bouhardi, Hérib. and
seven varieties of NV. halophila, and three of N. cuspidata. Nearly all of these
_ appear to be covered in our Airdrie list where the condensation is greater than
Cleve’s. This scheme appears also to include nearly all the varieties of
Auvergne, except possibly the smaller varieties from the tertiary travertins.

Pantocsek’s single specimen of Craticula hungarica from a tertiary marine
deposit in Hungary is identical with our largest Airdrie specimen of N. cuspidata

', var. Kendalli. forma parallela (craticulated). His N. protracta Grun. var. minor

Pant. is a small form of our var. ambigua f. radiata.

When the valve is cuspidate we have the original specific form. When the
cusps become capitate we have the variety ambigua. When there are no cusps
or capitate ends, and the valves taper evenly to rounded ends, we have the
variety Kendalli, so called on account of the splendid photo-micrographs made.
of a number of specimens by Mr. Kendall, the best of which were received after
the photogravures of the first were made. Each of these varieties has been
found with the parallel striation and the central radiate striation, to the last of
which. NV. heribaudi Peragallo is referable. The specimens so well photographed
by O. Kendall, Jr., were collected by one of the most promising Canadian diatom-
ists, E. C. Wheeler, of Montreal.

164

When these forms of the V. cuspidata group from over the world are ultimately
compared, the precedence of nomenclature will undoubtedly be acknowledged if
compatible with the scientifically ascertained relationship of the forms. Grunow’s
N. halophila is a very appropriate name for the salt-loving, even-tapering forms
of the group, but the origtnal is a very depauperate form of the Airdrie diatom
from central Canada or of the marine Craticula hungarica Pant. from the tertiary
deposits of central Europe.

Pantocsek’s Surirella torquata, which is well figured, but too briefly and
indefinitely described, approaches in some respects Boyer’s S. Baileyana, and
was found in a marine tertiary deposit in Hungary.

165

PrATE Sl:

Fig. 1.—Cyclotella Quillensis, L. W. Bailey, n. sp.
Fig. 2.—Chaetoceras n. sp.?

Fig. 3.—Surirella Baileyana, flat form.

Fig. 4.—Surirella Batleyana.

Fig. 5.—Surirella Baileyana, doubled.

Fig. 6.—Surirella Baileyana, partly twisted.

Prats TI:

Fig. 1.—Navicula cuspidata K. var. ambigua E. 600. Measurements 88 (5:4:24:4:5).

Fig. 2.—Navicula cuspidata K. var. Kendalli McK. (Showing the striated valve and
craticular plate.) 457. Measurements 153 (18:33:13).

Fig.3.—Navicula cuspidata K. var. Kendalli McK. (craticulated). 455. Measurements
195 (13:39:13).

Fog. 4.—Navicula cuspidata K. var. Kendalli McK., f. parallela. 452. Measurements
184 (12:38:12) s10 to 12 or 18.

Fig. 5.—Navicula cuspidata K. var. Kendalli McK., f. radiata. 456. Measurements
ig leg S el )rsiatol 2:

All the above examples of N. cuspidata were collected at Airdrie, Alberta, by H. C. Wheeler
and photographed by O. Kendall.

Ie.

rom Quill Lakes and Airdri

{

iatoms

Bailey

BEATE

Bailey. Diatoms from Quill Lakes and Airdrie.

Riga, lle

Wns...

An
“>

No. XI

fot Or PUBLICATIONS BASED: ON RESULTS OBTAINED AT THE
BIOLOGICAL STATIONS OF CANADA, 1901-1921.

COMPILED BY

A. G. HUNTSMAN AND C. M. FRASER

List of Publications based on Results obtained at the
Biological Stations of Canada, 1901-1921.

—

CoMPILED BY A. G. HUNTSMAN AND C. M. FRASER

BaIiLey, L.W. 1910. The Marine and Estuarine Diatoms of the New Bruns-
; wick coasts. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc., New Brunswick, No. XXVIII., -
pp. 219-239, pl. 1, 2.
1912. The fresh water Diatoms and Diatomaceous Earths of New Bruns-
wick. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc., New Brunswick, No. XXIX., pp.
. 291-320.
1912. Diatoms of New Brunswick. III. Forms from the North Shore.
Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc., New Brunswick, Vol. VI., No. 30, pp.
387-417.
1912. Some recent Diatoms, freshwater and marine, from the vicinity of
the Atlantic Biological Station, St. Andrews, N.B. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1906-10. pp. 243-264, pl. 25, 26.
1913. The Diatoms of New Brunswick and Prince Edward Island. Trans.
Roy. Soc. Canada, Ser. III., Vol. VII., pp. 57-76. .
1915. The plankton Diatoms of the Bay of Fundy. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1911-14, Fasc. I., pp. 11-23, pl. 1-3.
1917. Notes on the Phyto-plankton of the Bay of Fundy and Passama-
: quoddy Bay. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1915-16, pp. 93-107.
1917. The Geological features of the St. Croix river and Passamaquoddy
Bay. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1915-16, pp. 109-112.
1917. The marine life of our coasts. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc., New Brunswick,
No. XXXII. (Vol. VIT.), 1917, pp. 99-104.
BAILEY, L. W. and MacKay, A. H. 1916. Diatoms from the eastern coast of
Vancouver Island. Trans. Roy. Soc., Canada, Third Series,
Vol. IX., Section IV., pp. 141-174.
1921. The Diatoms of Canada. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1918-20, pp. 15-1
124.
BartscH, P. 1921. A new classification of shipworms and descriptions of some
new wood boring mollusks. Proc. Biol. Soc., Washington, Vol.
XXXIV., pp. 25-32. Xylophaga washingtoni from Departure
Bay.
1921. New marine mollusks from the west coast of America. Ibid., pp.
35-40.
Odostomis cumshewaensis, Cerithiopsis fraseri, C. signa. Alvania
burrardensis and Vitrinella columbiana from British Columbia.
BEAN, B. A. and WEED, A. C. 1919. Notes on a collection of fishes from
Vancouver Island, British Columbia. Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada,
Serres MI, Vol XIIL, Sect. V:, pp. 69-83.

169

BENsLEY, B. A. 1901. Report on the sardine industry in relation to the
Canadian herring fisheries. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1901, pp.
59-62.
1915. The Fishes of Georgian Bay. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1911-1914,
Fasc. UL, pp it-ol:
BERKELEY, C. 1919. A study of marine Bacteria, Straits of Georgia, B.C.
Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, Third Series, Vol. XIIP., Sect. V.,
pp. 15-25. .
1920. Pentose contents of some tissues of marine animals. Journ. Biological”
Chemistry, Vol. XLI., No. 3, pp. liv.-lv.
1920. Pentosan- and Methylpentosan-splitting enzymes of Macrocystis
pyrifera. Journ. Biological Chemistry, Vol. XLI., No. 3, pp.
LVI.-LVII.
1921. Pentose mononucleotides of the pancreas of the dogfish (Squalus
sucklii). Journ. Biological Chemistry. Vol. XLV., No. 2, pp.
263-275.
1921. Anaerobic respiration in some pelecypod molluscs. The relation of
anaerobic respiration to glycogen. Journ. Biological Chemistry,
Vol. XLVI., No. 3, pp. 579-598. *
BicELow, H. B. 1916. Halimedusa, a new genus of Anthomedusae. Trans.
Roy. Soc. Canada, Vol. X., pp. 91-95.
Description of Halimedusa typus, n.g., n.s. from the coast of
Vancouver Island.
BissONETTE, T. H. 1915. List of Georgian Bay Fleshy Fungi and Myxomy-
cetes. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1911-1914, Fasc. II., pp. 213-218.

BJERKAN, PAuL. 1919. Results of the hydrographical observations made by
Dr. Johan Hjort in the Canadian Atlantic waters during the year
1915. Can, Fish. Exp., 1914-15, Gulf of St. Lawrence, pp! 349-
AOS sb lealaa2:
BurwasH, E.M. 1912. The Geological Environment of the British Columbia
Biological Station at Departure Bay, B.C. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1906-1910, pp. 295-305.
CAMERON, A. T. 1914. The distribution of Iodine in plant and animal tissues.
I. Journ. Biological Chemistry, Vol. XVIII., pp. 335-380.
Material collected at Pacific Coast Station. .
1914. The distribution of Iodine in plant and animal tissues. Trans. Roy.
Soc. Canada, Third Series, Vol. VIII., Section IV., pp. 7-10.
Material collected at Pacific Coast Station.
1915. The distribution of Iodine in plant and animal tissues. II. Journ.
Biological Chemistry, Vol. XXIII., pp. 1-39. Baltimore.
Material collected at the Pacific Coast Station.
1915. The iodine content of the marine flora and fauna in the. neighbour-
hood of Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, B.C. Contr. Canadian Biol.,
1911-1914, Fasc. I., pp. 52-68.
1915. The commerical value of the kelp beds of British Columbia. Contr.
Canadian Biol., 1914-1915, pp. 25-40.

170

CAMERON, A. T. 1915. The water and iodine contents of some Pacific coast
kelps. Ibid., pp. 169-173.

CAMERON, A. T. and FRAsER, C. M. 1915. Variations in density and tempera-
ture in the coastal waters of British Columbia. Ibid., pp. 133-144.

CAMERON, A. T. and VINCENT, S. 1915. Note onan enlarged thyroid occurring
in an Elasmobranch fish (Squalus sucklii). Journ. Med. Research,
Vol. XXXII., pp. 251-256.
Obtained at Pacific station.
CLEMENS, W. A. 1915. Rearing Experiments and Ecology of Georgian Bay
Ephemeride. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1911-1914, Fasc. II., pp.
113-128, 2 pls.
1915. Life-histories of Georgian Bay Ephemeride. Observations on
Heptagenia and Breeding Experiments. Contr. Canadian Biol.,
1911-1914,. Fasc. II., pp. 131-148, 4 pls.
1920. Histories of New Food Fishes. IV: The Muttonfish. Bull. Biol.
Board of Canada, No. 4, pp. 1-12.

CLEMENS, W. A.and L.S. 1921. A contribution to the biology of the mutton
fish (Zoarces anguillaris). Contr. Canadian Biol., 1918-20. (1921),
pp. 69-83, 1 pl.

Cotiins, F. S. 1913. The marine algae of Vancouver Island. Victoria
Memorial Museum, Bulletin I., Geological Survey of Canada,
pp. 95-137.

Coiturp, J. B. 1920. The alkali reserve of marine fish and invertebrates.
The excretion of carbon dioxide. Journ. Biological Chemistry,
Vol. XLIV., No. 2, pp. 329-344.

1920. Studies on Molluscan coelomic fluid. Anaerobic respiration in Mya
arenaria. Ibid., Vol. XLV., No. 1, pp. 23-47.

CONNOLLY, C. J. 1920. History of New Food Fishes. III. The Angler.
Bull. Biol. Board of Canada, No. 3, pp. 1-17.

CoopEr, A. R. 1914. A new Cestode from Amia Calva L. Trans. Roy.

Canadian Inst., Vol. X., pp. 81-119, 3 pls.

1914. On the Systematic Position of Haplobothrium globuliforme Cooper.
rans: Koy. Sec, Canada, Ser. LIT, Vol: VIIT., pp. 1-3:

1915. -Trematodes from Marine and Fresh-water Fishes, including one
species of Ectoparasitic Turbellarian. Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada,
Ser. III., Vol. 9, pp. 181-205, 3 pls.

1915. A morphological study of Bothriocephalid Cestodes from Fishes.
Journ. Parasitology, Vol. 4, pp. 33-39, 2 pls.

1915. North American Pseudophyllidean Cestodes from Fishes. III.
Illinois Biol. Monographs, 4 (No. 4), pp. 289-541, 13 pls.

1915. Contributions to the Life-history of Proteocephalus ambloplitis
Leidy, a parasite of the Black Bass. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1911-
1914, Fasc. II., pp. 177-194, 3 pls.

171

CoPELAND, G.G, 1912. On the temperatures and densities of Passamaquoddy
Bay waters and environs, with notes on allied subjects and the
bearings of the same on the oyster industry. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1906-1910, pp. 281-294, pl. 36-37.

CorNIsH, Geo. A. 1907. Report on the Marine Polyzoa of Canso, N.S.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1902-05 (1907), pp. 75-80.

1907. Notes on the fishes of Canso. Ibid., pp. 81-90.

1912. Notes on the Fauna of Tignish, Prince Edward Island. Contr.
Canadian Biol., 1906-10, pp. 79-81.

Cox, Puitip. 1916. On asupposed-disease of Quahaugs from New Brunswick.
d ‘ Contr. Canadian Biol., 1914-15, pp. 73-79.

1916. Investigation of a disease of herring (Clupea harengus) in the Gulf
of St. Lawrence. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1914-15, pp. 81-84, pls.
8 and 9. :

1916. Are migrating eels deterred by a range of lights? Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1914-15, pp. 115-118.

1920. Histories of New Food Fishes. II. The Lumpfish. Bull. Biol.
Board Canada, No. 2, pp. 1-28.

1921. List of fishes collected in 1917 off the Cape Breton coast and the
Magdalen Islands. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1918-20 (1921), pp.
109-114.

CRAIGIE, D. Horne. 1916. Life History of the Hake (Urophycis chuss).
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1914-15 (1916), pp. 87-94.

1916. Hydrographic Investigations in the St. Croix River and Passama-
quoddy Bay. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1914-15 (1916), pp. 151-161.

1916. Hydrographic section of the Bay of Fundy in 1914. Contr. Canadian’
Biol., 1914-15, pp. 163-173.

CRAIGIE, E. H. and CHAse, W.H. 1918. Further Hydrographic Investigations
in the Bay of Fundy. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1917-18, pp. 125-147.

CurRRIE, MAry E. 1918. Exuviation and variation of plankton copepods,
with special reference to Calanus finmarchicus. Trans. Roy. Soc.
Cahada, Vol. 12, 1918, pp. 207-233. FF

DANNEV 1G, ALF. 1919. Canadian Fish-Eggs and Larvae. Canadian Fish.
Exp. Invest. Gulf of St. Lawrence and Atl. waters of Canada,
1914-15 (1919), pp. 1-74, pl. 1-3.

DETWEILER, JOHN D. 1915. Preliminary notes on the mollusca of St. Andrews
and vicinity, New Brunswick. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1911-14,
Fasc. I. (1915), pp. 43-46.

1918. The pearly fresh-water Mussels of Ontario, with suggestions as to
Culture and Utilization. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1917-18, pp.
73-91.

Durr, Dorotuy. 1916. Investigation of the haddock fishery, with special
reference to the growth and maturity of the haddock. Contr.
Canadian Biol., 1914-15, pp. 95-102.

FOWLER, JAMEs. 1901. The flora of St. Andrews, New Brunswick. Contr.
Canadian Biol., 1901, pp. 14-48.

172

FowLer, JAMEs. 1907. Report on the flora of Canso, Nova Scotia. Contr.

Canadian Biol., 1902-05, pp. 59-70.

FRASER, C. M. 1911. The Hydroids of the west coast of North America.

1913.
1915.

1914.
1914.
1914.

1914.
LOTS.

1915.

1916.

LOT.

1916.
1916.
1916.
LONG,
191%
1917.
1918.

1918.

IDES:
1918.

Bull. Laboratories of Nat. Hist. State University of Iowa, pp. 1-91. —

Includes distribution of material and sometimes descriptions
of such, collected at the Pacific Station in 1908 and 1909, as well
as other material from Vancouver Island and Puget Sound.

Hydroids from Vancouver Island. Ibid., pp. 147-155.

Hydroids from Nova Scotia. Canadian Geol. Surv. Victoria
Mem. Mus. Bull. 1, pt. XVI., pp. 157-186.

Marine Biology in British Columbia. British Columbia Acad. Sci.,
pp. 49-60. Vancouver.

Pacific Coast Biological Station, Departure Bay, B.C. Trans.
Pacific Fisheries Soc., pp. 61-69.

Some Hydroids of the Vancouver Island region. Trans. Roy. Soc.
Canada, Ser. IT1., Vol. VIIL., Section IV., pp. 99-216.

Notes on some Alaskan hydroids. Ibid., pp. 217-222.

The Swarming of Odontosyllis. Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, Ser. III.,
Vol. [X., Section IV., pp. 43-49.

Hydroids: in the Report of the Exploration of the coast water
between Nova Scotia and Chesapeake Bay, July and August,
1913, by the United States Fisheries Schooner ‘‘Grampus.”’
Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard College, Vol. LIX., No. 4, pp.
306-314.

On Clupea pallasii Cuvier and Valenciennes. Trans. Roy. Canadian
Inst., pp. 97-108.

Ichthyological Notes: I. Ophiodon elongatus Girard. II. Oncor-
hynchus keta Walbaum. III. The diagnosis of fish by means of
scales. IV. Mallotus villosus Muller. Ibid., pp. 109-118.

Possible lobster planting areas on the east coast of Vancouver Island,
-B.C. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1914-1915, pp..119-132.

Growth of the spring salmon. Trans. Pacific Fisheries Soc. for 1915,
pp. 29-35.

On the development of Aequorea forskalea. Trans. Roy. Soc.
Canada, Third Series, Vol. X., Section IV., pp. 97-104.

On the Scales of the Spring Salmon. Contr. Canadian Biology for
1915, pp. 21-38.

On the life-history of the Coho. Ibid., pp. 39-52.

Grading of Pacific salmon. Pacific Fisherman, pp. 15-16.

Monobrachium. parasitum and other west coast Hydroids. Trans.
Roy. Soc. Canada, Third Series, Vol. XII., Section IV., pp. 131-1388.

Hydroids of Eastern Canada. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1916-17,
pp. 329-367.

Rearing sockeye salmon in fresh water. Ibid., pp. 105-109.

Migration of marine animals. Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, Third
Series, Vol. XII., Sect. IV., pp. 139-143.

173

FRASER, C. M. 1920. Copepods parasitic on fish from Vancouver Island region.
Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, Ser. III., Vol. XIII: for 1919, Sect. V.,
pp. 45-67.
1920. Growth rate in the Pacific salmon. Ibid., pp. 163-226.
1920. Enemies of North Pacific fishes. Canadian Fisherman, pp. 113-115.
1921. Key to the Hydroids of Eastern Canada. Contr. Canadian Biol.,
_ 1918-20, pp. 1387-180.
1921. Further studies on the growth rate in Pacific salmon. Contr. Can-
adian Biol., 1918-1920, pp. 7-27.
1921. Some apparent effects of severe weather on the marine organisms in
the vicinity of Departure Bay, B.C., Ibid., pp. 29-33.
1921. Temperature and specific gravity variations in the surface waters
of Departure Bay, B.C., Ibid., pp. 35-47.
1921. Association, Commensalism and Parasitism among marine animals in
the strait of Georgia, Canadian Field Nat., Vol. XXV., pp. 48-50.
Fritz, CLARA W. 1921. Plankton diatoms, their distribution and bathymetric
range in St. Andrews waters. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1918-20,
‘pp. 49-62.
1921. Experimental cultures of diatoms occurring near St. Andrews, N.B.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1918-20, pp. 63-68.
GILBERT, C.H. 1912. A new genus and species of Cottoid fish from Departure
Bay, Vancouver Island, B.C. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1906-1910,
pp. 215-16.
Gran, H. H. 1919. Quantitative investigations as to Phytoplankton and
pelagic Protozoa in the Gulf of St. Lawrence and outside the same.
Canadian Fish. Exp., 1914-15, Gulf of St. Lawrence, pp. 487-491.

Gross, Louts. 1919. An investigation into the question of early putrefaction
of eviscerated fish in which the-.gills have been left. Rep. Adv.
Council Sci. and Indust. Research, No. 6, pp. 1-4.
1921. An investigation into the rate of putrefaction in the common food
fish caught in and around Passamaquoddy Bay, N.B. Contr.
Canadian Biol., 1918-20, pp. 99-102.
HADDON, KATHLEEN. 1912. Hersilia (Clausidium) vancouverensis, n.s., Ann.
and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 8, Vol. X., pp. 84-86.
1912. Herpyllobius arcticus. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., Vol. 58, pp. 385-410.
A copepod parasitic on British Columbia polchaets.
Harrison, F. C. 1918. Report of examination of affected salmon from
Miramichi Hatchery Pond, New Brunswick. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1917-18, pp. 147-168.
1918. Some observations on haddock and ‘‘ Finnan Haddies”’ relating to the
bacteriology of cured fish. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1917-18, pp.
177-180.
Hickson, S. J. 1915. Some Alcyonaria and a Stylaster from the west coast
of North America. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, pp. 541-557.
1917. West Coast corals. Bionomical Leaflets, McGill University, No. 6,
pp. 21-24.

174

Hyort, JoHAN. 1919. Introduction to the Canadian Fisheries Expedition,

1914-15. Canadian Fish. Exped. Invest. Gulf of St. Lawrence and
Atlantic waters of Canada, pp. i.-xv.

HuntTsMAn, A. G. 1911. Ascidians from the Coasts of Canada. Trans.

1912.

1913.
1913.

1913.
Oa:

1915.

1918.

Canadian Inst., Vol. IX., pp. 111-148.

Holosomatous Ascidians from the coast of Western Canada. Contr.
Canadian Biol., 1906-1910, pp. 103-185.

The Classification of the Styelidae. Zool. Anz., Bd. XLI., pp. 482-
501.

On the origin of the ascidian mouth. Proc. Roy. Soc., B, Vol. 86,
pp. 454-459.

Protostigmata in Ascidians. Proc. Roy. Soc., B. Vol. 86, pp. 440-453.

A new Caprellid from the Bay of Fundy. Contr. Canadian Buol.,
1911-14, Fasc. I., pp. 39-42, pl. 5, 6.

The Fresh-water Malacostraca of Ontario. Contr. Canadian Biol.,
1911-14, Fasc. II., pp. 145-163. ;
The Growth of the Scales in Fishes. Trans. Roy. Canadian Inst.,

Vol. XIT:, Ser. IIT., pp. 63-103.

. The vertical distribution of certain intertidal animals. Trans. Roy:

soce Canada, Ser. Mil. > Vol. X11... 53-60.

. The effect of the tide on the distribution of the fishes of the Canadian

Atlantic coast: Trans. Roy. Soc.-Canada, Ser. III-, Vol: =Xif,,
pp. 61-67.

. The scale method of calculating the rate of growth in fishes. Trans.

Roy. Soc.'Canada, Ser. ITI., Vol. XII., pp. 47-52.

. Our eastern flat-fishes. The Canadian Fisherman, Vol. V., pp. 788-

790.

. Fisheries research in the Gulf of St. Lawrence in 1917. The Canadian

Fisherman, Vol. V., pp. 740-744:

. Histories of New Food Fishes, I. The Canadian Plaice. Bull. Biol.

Board of Canada, No. 1, Toronto, 1918, pp. 1-32.

. Report on affected salmon in the Miramichi river, New Brunswick.

Contr. Canadian Biol., 1917-18, pp. 167-173.

. The Bait Question. Biol. Board of Canada, Leaflet, No. 3, pp. 1-4.
. Growth of the young herring (so-called sardines) of the Bay of Fundy.

Canadian Fish. Exped., 1914-15, Gulf of St. Lawrence, pp. 165-171.

. Some quantitative and qualitative plankton studies of Eastern

Canadian Plankton, Ibid., pp. 405-485.

. The Growth of Fishes. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc., Vol. 49, pp. 19-23.

. Climates of our Atlantic waters. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc., Vol. 50,

pp. 326-333.

. Age-determination, growth and symmetry in the test of the ascidian

Chelyosoma. Trans Roy. Canadian Inst-,- Vol. XIII, No. 4
pp. 27-38.

HtntsmMan, A. G. 1921. Eastern Canadian Plankton-—The distribution of the
Tomopteridae obtained during the Canadian Fisheries Expedition,
1914-15. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1918-20, pp. 85-91.
1921. Eastern Canadian Plankton. The distribution of floating Tunicates
(Thaliacea) obtained during the Canadian Fisheries Expedition,
1914-15. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1918-20, pp. 93-97.
HuntTsMAN, A. G. and Rep, M. E. 1921. The success of Reproduction in
Sagitta elegans in the Bay of Fundy and the Gulf of St. Lawrence.
Trans. Roy. Canadian Inst., Vol. XIII., pp. 99-112.
KiLBorn, L. J. and MAcLeop, J. J. R. 1920. Observations on the glycogen
content of certain invertebrates and fishes. Quart. Journ. Exper.
Physiol., Vol. XII., No. 4, pp. 317-330.
Material from the Pacific Coast Station.
KINDLE, E. M. 1918. The Ship Worm (Teredo navalis) on the Atlantic Coast
of Canada. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1917-18, pp. 91-101.
KINDLE, E. M. and WHITTAKER, E. J. 1918. Bathymetric check-list of marine
invertebrates of eastern Canada, with an Index to Whiteaves’
catalogue. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1917-18, pp. 228-294.
KiuGu, A. B. 1909. The excretion of Sodium chloride by Spartina glabra
alterniflora. Rhodora, Vol. XI., p..237.
1910. Notes on the flora of the Nerepis Marsh, New Brunswick. Ottawa
Naturalist, Vol. XXIV., pp. 121-122.
1912. Notes on the flora of the St. Croix valley and Passamaquoddy region,
New Brunswick. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1906-10, pp. 265-276,

pl. 27-29.
1913. Notes on the Algae of the Georgian Bay. Rhodora, Vol. XV., pp.
88-92. |

1913. -Notes on the Plant Formations of the Georgian Bay. Ontario Nat.
Sci Bulla Now8:

1915. Notes on the Aquatic Plants of the Georgian Bay. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1911-14, Fasc. II., pp. 219-220.

1917. The marine algae of the Passamaquoddy region. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1915-16, pp. 79-85, pl. 8.

1921. A new genus-and three new species of Algae from the Miramichi
river, N.B. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1918-20, pp. 181-183. -

_Knicut, A. P. 1901. The effects of polluted waters on -fish-life. Contr.

Canadian Biol., 1901, pp. 9-18.

1907. The effects of dynamite explosions upon fish-life. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1902-05, pp. 21-80.

1907. A further report upon the effects of sawdust on fish-life. Contr.
Canadian Biol., 1902-05, pp. 37-54.

1907. Sawdust and Fish Life. Final Report. Contr. Canadian Biol.,
1902-05, pp. 111-119.

1912. Fishery Bait experiments. A report on the comparative merits of
different kinds of bait used in cod-fishing along the Gaspe peninsula.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1910, pp. 23-32.

176

Kyicut, A. P. 1916. Lobster sanctuaries and hatching ponds. An investigation
of the Long Beach Lobster Pond, Digby County, Nova Scotia,
in 1914. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1914-15, pp. 41-54, pl. 2-7.
1917. Official Report upon Lobster Conservation in Canada. Suppl. 51st.
Annl. Rept. Fish. Branch Dept. Nav. Ottawa. Ser., 1916-17,
pp. 1-48.
1918. Official’ Report on Lobster Investigations, 1917, and methods of
increasing the lobster supply in Canada. Ottawa, 1918, pp. 1-21.
1918. Lobster Investigations, Long Beach Pond, Nova Scotia, 1915. Contr.
Canadian Biol., 1917-18, pp. 51-71.
1919. Official Report on Lobster Investigations in Canada for 1918. Ottawa
1919, pp. 1-35.
1921. Histology of the Flexor tendon in the crushing claw of the lobster.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1918-20, pp. 185-188.
Lanc, R. S. and MAcLeEop, J. J..R. 1920. Observations on the reducing
substances in the circulating fluids of certain invertebrates and
fish. Quart. Journ: Exper. Physiol., Vol. XII., No. 4, pp. 331-337.
Material from the Pacific station.
LEA, EINAR. 1919. Report on the age and growth of the herring in Canadian
waters. Canadian Fish. Exped., 1914-15, Gulf of St. Lawrence
and Atlantic waters of Canada, pp. 75-164.
Lem, A. H. 1921. A new species of Spirontocaris with notes on other species
from the Atlantic coast. Trans. Roy. Canadian Inst., Vol. 13,
pp. 133-145, pl. 2-6.
Macatitum, A.B. 1903. On the inorganic composition of the Medusae Aurelia
flavidula and Cyanea arctica. Journ. Physiol., Vol. XXIX.,
pp. 213-241.
1904. The Palaeochemistry of the Ocean in relation to Animal and Vegetable
Protoplasm. Trans. Canadian Inst., Vol. VII., pp. 535-562. Also
University of Toronto Studies, Physiological Series, No. 5.
1910. On the Inorganic Composition of the blood of Vertebrates and In-
vertebrates and its Origin. Proc. Roy. Soc. London, Vol. B 82,
pp. 602-624.
1913. Acineta Tuberosa: A Study on the Action of Surface Tension in
Determining the Distribution of Salts in Living Matter. Proc.
_ Roy. Soc. London, Vol. B 86, pp. 527-550, 2 pls.
MacBripe, E.W. 1912. Oyster Culture and the Clam Fishery, Prince Edward
Island. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1906-10, pp. 217-220.
MacCieMEnt, W. T. ‘1915. Preliminary Report on the Plants of the Georgian
Bay, a Contribution to the Biology of the Georgian Bay Waters.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1911-14, Fasc. II., pp. 201-211.
1917. Diatoms and Lobster rearing. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1915-16,
pp. 11-20.
MacKay, A. H. 1907. The Diatomaceae of Canso Harbour, Nova Scotia.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1902-05, pp. 55-58.

EL.

Martin, W. H. 1915. Some experiments on the freezing and thawing of live
fish. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1911-14, Fasc. I., pp. 73-75.

Mavor, J. W. 1915. Studies on the sporozoa of the fishes of the St. Andrews
region, New Brunswick. » Contr. Canadian Biol., 1911-14, Fasc. I.,
pp. 25-38, pl. 4.

1915. On the Occurrence of a Trypanoplasm, probably Trypanoplasma
borreli Laveran and Mesnil in the Blood of the Common Sucker,
Catostomus commersonii. Journ. Parasit., Vol. II., pp. 1-6.

1916. On the life-history of Ceratomyxa acadiensis, a new species of Myxo-
sporidia from the eastern coast of Canada. Proc. Amer. Acad.
Arts and S¢i., Vol. LI., pp. 551-574.

1916. Studies on the Protozoan Parasites of the Fishes of the Georgian Bay.
Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, Ser. III., Vol. X., Sect. IV., pp. 63-73.

1918. On the age and growth of the walle in the Bay of Fundy. Contr.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1917-18, pp. 107-125.

1920. Circulation of water in Bay of Fundy and Gulf of Maine. Thane
Amer. Fisher. Soc., Vol. L., pp. 334-342.

1920. Drift Bottles as indicating a superficial circulation in the Gulf of
Maine. Scienge, N.S., Vol. LIL., pp. 442-443.

1921. The utilization of Dog-Fish and selachian fishes of Eastern Canada.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1918-20, pp. 125-235.

1921. On a bottle which drifted from the Gulf of Maine to the Azores.
Science, N.S., Vol. LIII.,-pp.487-188.

1921. Another drift bottle which crossed the Atlantic. Science, N.S., Vol.
LIM. p.389.

-Mavor, J. W., CraicicE, E. H. and DETWEILER, J. D. 1916. Investigation of
the bays of the southern coast of New Brunswick, with a view to
use for oyster culture. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1914-15, pp. 145-
149.
McDona.p, D. L. 1912. On a collection of crustacea made at St. Andrews.
Contr. Canadian Biology, 1906-10, pp. 83-84.
McMurricy, J. P. 1911. The Actiniaria of Passamaquoddy Bay with a
discussion of their synonomy. Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, Ser. IIL.,
Vol. IV., Sect. IV., pp. 59-83, pl. 1-3.
1912. The Life Cycles of the Pacific Coast Salmon belonging to the genus
Oncorhynchus, as revealed by their scales and otolith markings.
Trans. Roy. Soc, Canada, Ser. III., Vol. VI., Section IV., pp. 9-28.
1912. Observations on the Actiniarians occurring in the neighbourhood of
the Biological Station, St. Andrews, New Brunswick. Contr.
Canadian Biol., 1906-10, pp. 33-35. \
1913. Some further observations on the life-histories of the Pacific Coast
Salmon as revealed by their scale markings.” Trans. Roy. Soc.
Canada, Ser. III., Vol. VII., Section IV., pp. 23-32. Ottawa.
1913. Notes on the scale markings of the halibut and their bearing on
questions connected with the Conservation of the fishery. Ibid.,
pp. 33-41.

178

McMouraricu, J. P. 1913. Salmon fisheries of British Columbia. Commission
of Conservation, Fourth Annual Report, pp. 48-59. Ottawa.
1913. On two new actinians from the coast of British Columbia. Proc.
Zool. Soc. London, pp. 963-972. ;
1916. Notes on the Plankton of the British Columbia Coast. Trans. Roy.
Soc. Canada, Ser. III., Vol. X., Section V., pp. 75-89.
1917. Notes on some crustacean forms occurring in the plankton of Passama-
quoddy -Bay.. Tratis. Roy. Sec: -Ganada; Ser, -TIl., Volkz2ch,
Sect. IV., pp. 47-61.
1917. The winter plankton in the neighbourhood of St. Andrews, 1914-15.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1915-16, pp. 1-10.
Miter, F. R. 1910. Intestinal peristalsis and anal rhythm in Crustacea.
Eighth Internat. Physiol. Congress, Vienna, 1910.
1910. On the rhythmical contractility of the anal musculature of the cray-
fish and lobster. Journ. Physiol., Vol. 40, p. 431.
1912. Contributions to the physiology of the American lobster. The
physiology of the intestine. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1906-10,
pp. 277-280, pl. 30-35.
MORTENSEN, T. H. 1920. Studies on the development of crinoids. Papers
from the Department of Marine Biology of the Carnegie Institute
of Washington, Vol. XVI.
Florometra seratissima from the Pacific Coast station.
1921. Studies of the development and larval forms of Echinoderms, Copen-
hagen.
Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis, Pisaster ochracea, Evast-
terias trischelii, Orthasterias leptolena, Pycnopodia helianthoides,
Stichopus californicus from British Columbia.
NELson, JuLius. 1917. An investigation of oyster propagation in Richmond
Bay, PES, during 1915.- Contr, Canadian” Biol, 1915-16,-pp:
53-78.
NEWCOMBE, C. F., GREENWOOD, W. H. and FRASER, C. M. 1918. The Sea-
lion question in British Columbia. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1916-17,
pp. 1-39.
O’DonoGuuE, C. H. 1921. Nudibranchiate Molluscs from the Vancouver
Island region. Trans. Roy. Canadian Inst., Vol. XIII., No. 1,
pp. 147-209.
OvtpRoyp, I. S. 1920. New,species of West Coast shells. The Nautilus,
Vol. XX XTIT.; No. 4; pp. 1385-136.
Tritonalia fraseri from Departure Bay.
PATTERSON, O. G. 1918. The smoking of haddocks for Canadian markets.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1917-18, pp. 173-178.
PENHALLOW, D. P. 1906. Report of a special committee on an examination
of localities for the permanent location of the Marine Biological
Station. Montreal, 1906, pp. 1-12.
1912. Report on the Atlantic Biological Station of Canada. Contr. Can-
adian Biol., 1906-10, pp. 1-21, pl. 1, 2.

179

’ PIXELL, H. L. M. 1912. Two new species of the Phoronidea from Vancouver
Island. Quart. Journ. Microsc. Sci., Vol. 58, pt. 2, pp. 257-284.
1912. Polychaeta from the Pacific coast of North America, Part I. Ser-
pulidae. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, pp. 784-805.
Much of the material was obtained at the Pacific Station.
Potts, F. A. 1912. Mycetomorpha, a new Rhizocephalan. Zoolog. Jahr-
bucher, pp. 575-594.
1913. The swarming of Odontosyllis. Proc. Cambridge Philosoph. Soc.,
Vol. XVII., Part 2, pp. 193:200.
Observed in Departure Bay, B.C.
1913. Stolon formation in certain species of Trypanosyllis. Quart. Journ.
Microsc. Sci., Vol. Fe VTE Part 3, pp. 411-446.
Trypanosyllis gemmipara found at different points along the
Vancouver Island coast.
1914. Polychaeta from the north-eastern Pacific. The Chaetopteridae.
Proc. Zool. Soc. London, pp. 955-994.
| Material from Pacific coast station.
Prince, E. E. 1901. Account of the Marine Biological Station of Canada;
its foundation, equipment and work. Contr. Canadian Biol.,
1901, pp. 1-8.
1907. The eggs and early life history of the Herring, Gaspereau, Shad and
other clupeoids. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1902-05, pp. 95-110, pl. 8-10.
1907. Professor Macallum on the chemistry of Meduse. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1902-05, pp. 121-128.
1913. A new Canadian Cirripede parasitic ona shrimp. Ottawa Naturalist,
Vol. XXVI., No. 10, pp. 121-125.
From the Pacific coast station.
1913. The Biological Board of Canada. Reprint from the 4th Anal.
Report Comm. Conservation, Ottawa, 1913, pp. 1-14.
1917. On serially striped haddock in New Brunswick. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1915-16, pp. 86-90, pl. 9.
1918. How to handle frozen fish. Bull. Coun. Sci. and Industr. Research,
No. 3, Ottawa, 1918, pp. 1-4.
1918. Hints on frozen fish. Bull. Coun. Sci. and Industrial Research, No.
4, Ottawa, 1918, pp. 1-4.
PRINCE, E. E. and MacKay, A. H. 1901. The paired fins of the mackerel
shark (Lamna). Contr. Canadian Biol., 1901, pp. 55-58, pl. 5-7.
Ramsay, L. N. E. 1914. On the Annelids of the family Nereidae collected by
Mr. F. A. Potts in the north-east Pacific in 1911. Proc. Zool.
Soc. London, pp. 237-250.
Nereis cyclurus, N. virens, N. agassizi, Micronereis variegata
from vicinity of Pacific coast station.
RATHBUN, M. J. 1917. The Grapsoid Crabs of America. United States Nat.
Museum, Bulletin 97.
Includes references to material, particularly Pinnotherid
material, collected at the Pacific coast station.

180

Rosertson, A. D. 1915. The Molluscs of the Georgian Bay. Contr. Can-
adian Biol., 1911-14, Fasc. II., pp. 96-111, 3 pls.

1916% Report on the barren oyster bottoms, Richmond Bay, P.E.I. Contr.
Canadian Biol., 1914-15, pp. 55-71.

Ropinson, C. B. 1907. “The Seaweeds of Canso. Contr. Canadian Biol.,
1902-05, pp. 71-74.

Ryerson, C. G. S. 1915. Notes on the Hirudinea of the Georgian Bay.
Contr. Canadian Biol:, 1911-14, Fasc. II., pp. 165-175.

SADLER, WILFRID, 1918. The bacteriology of swelled canned sardines. In-
terim report. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1917-18, pp. 179-215.

1918. Bacterial destruction of Copepods occurring in marine plankton.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1917-18, pp. 215-228.

1921. Canned sardines-—The cause of ‘‘Swells’’ or ‘“‘ Blown Cans.’
Canadian Biol., 1918-20, pp. 103-108.

SANDSTROM, J. W. 1919. The Hydrodynamics of the Canadian Atlantic
Waters. Canadian Fish. Exped., 1914-15, Gulf of St. Lawrence,
pp. 221-343, 10 pls.

Sars, G.O. 1915. The Entomostraca of the Georgian Bay. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1911-14, Fasc. II., pp. 221-222.

Scott, F.H. 1901. The food of the Sea Urchin (Strongylocentrotus). Contr.
Canadian Biol., 1901, pp. 49-54.

STAFFORD, J. 1901. The clam fishery of Passamaquoddy Bay, New Benner
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1901, pp. 19-40, pls. 1-4.

1904. Trematodes from Canadian Fishes. Zool. Anz. Bd. xxvii., pp.

’

Contr.

481-495.

1905. Trematodes from Canadian Vertebrates. Zool. Anz. Bd. xxviit.,
pp. 681-694.

1905. On the larva and spat of the Canadian oyster. Amer. Nat., Vol. 39,
pp. 41-44.

1907. On the fauna of the Atlantic coast of Canada. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1902-05, pp. 31-36.

1907. Preliminary report on the Trematodes of Canadian marine fishes.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1902-05, pp. 91-94.

1909. The larva and spat of the Canadian oyster. Amer. Nat., Vol. XLIII.,
pp. 31-47.

1910. The larva and spat of the Canadian oyster. Amer. Nat., Vol. XLIV.,
pp. 343-366.

1912. Supplementary observations on the development of the Canadian
oyster. Amer. Nat., Vol. XLVI., pp. 29-40.

1912. On the fauna of the Atlantic coast. Second report (Malpeque,
1903-4). Contr. Canadian Biol., 1906-10, pp. 37-44.

1912. On the fauna of the Atlantic coast. Third report. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1906-10, pp. 45-67.

1912. On the fauna of the Atlantic Coast of Canada. Fourth report.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1906-10, pp. 69-78.

181

STAFFORD, J. 1912. On the recognition of bivalve molluscan larvae in plankton
collections. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1906-10, pp. 221-242, pl. 22-24.
Stock, V. 1915. On some of the parasitic Copepods of the fishes of the Bay
of Fundy. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1911-14, Fasc. I., pp. 69-71.
STONER, D. 1920. Notes on Scutelleroidea from Vancouver Island. Canadian
Entomologist, Vol. LI., pp. 12-13.
Taytor, G. W. 1912. Preliminary list of one hundred and twenty-nine
species of B.C. Decapod Crustaceans. Contr. Canadian Biol.,
1906-1910, pp. 187-214. :
VacHon, A. 1917. Quelques problémes de la mer. Bull. Soc. Geog. Quebec,
Vol. XI.
1918. Hydrography in Passamaquoddy Bay and vicinity. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1917-18, pp. 294-325. 7
1920. L’Etoile de mer; son utilité comme engrais. Trans. Roy. Soc.
Canada, Vol. XIV., Sect. V., pp. 39-49.
VANHorRNE, A and M. 1915. A list of fleshy fungi collected at St. Andrews
and vicinity, New Brunswick. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1911-14
(1915), Fasc. I., pp. 47-50.
VERRILL, A. E. 1914. Monograph of the shallow water starfishes of the North
Pacific coast from the Arctic ocean to California. Smithsonian
Institution, Harriman Alaska Expedition series, Vol. XIV.
Contains descriptions of many species, some of them new,
collected near the station and at the other points along the coast
of British Columbia.
WALKER, E. M. 1914. The known nymphs of the Canadian species of Lestes
(Odonata). Canadian Entomologist, Vol. XLVI.,. pp. 189-200.
1914. New and little known nymphs of Canadian Odonata. Ibid., pp.
369-377.
Aeshna tuberculifera, Ae. palmata, and Ae. umbrosa from
Vancouver Island.
1914. New and little known nymphs of Canadian Odonata. Ibid., pp.
349-357.
Ischnura cervula from Vancouver Island.
1915. Notes on the Odonata of the vicinity of Go Home Bay, Georgian Bay.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1911-14, Fasc. II., pp. 53-94, 7 pls.
1917. The known nymphs of the North American species of Sympetrum
(Odonata). Canadian Entomologist, Vol. XLVIII., pp. 409-418.
S. vicinum, S. costiferum and S. pallipes from Vancouver Island.
WaLiace, N. A. 1910. The Isopoda of the Bay of Fundy. Univ. Toronto
Stud., Bio. Ser., 1919, pp. 1-42.
Waite, H. T. 1915. Bryozoa of the Georgian Bay region. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1911-14, Fasc. II., pp. 195-199.
Wittey, A. 1913. Notes on plankton collected across the mouth of the St.
Croix River opposite to the Biological Station at St. Andrews,
New Brunswick, in July and August, 1912. Proc. Zool. Soc.
London, 1913, pp. 283-292.

182

1915. The plankton of St. Andrews Bay (New Brunswick). Contr. Can-
adian Biol., 1911-14, Fasc. I., pp. 1-9.
1916. Investigation into the Pacific Halibut Fisheries. Contr. Canadian
Biol., 1914-15, pp. 1-18.
1919. Report on the Copepoda obtained in the Gulf of St. Lawrence and
adjacent waters, 1915. Can. Fish. Exp. Invest. in the Gulf of
St. Lawrence and Atlantic waters of Can., pp. 173-320.
1920. Marine Copepoda. Rept. Can. Arc. Exp., 1913-18. Vol. 7, Crus-
tacea, Part K, pp. 1-46.
1920. The Economic History of Copepods. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc.,
Vol. L., pp. 320-325.
1921. Arctic Copepoda in Passamaquoddy Bay. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts
and Sci., Vol. 56, No. 5, Boston, 1921, pp. 185-196.
WILLEY, A. and Huntsman, A. G. 1921. Faunal Notes from the Atlantic
Biological Station. Canadian Field Nat., Vol. 35, pp. 1-7.
Witson, C. B. 1912. Parasitic Copepods from Nanaimo, British Columbia,
including eight species new to science. Contr. Canadian Biol.,
1906-1910, pp. 85-102.
1921. Argulide from the Shubenacadie River, Nova Scotia. Canadian
Field Nat., Vol. 34, pp. 149-151.
WoopuHousE, R. P. 1916. Report on the Life-history of the Cod, as determined
from its scales and other data. Contr. Canadian Biol., 1914-16,
pp. 103-113.
WricuT, R. Ramsay. 1907. The Plankton of Eastern Nova Scotia waters.
Contr. Canadian Biol., 1902-05, pp. 1-19, pl. 1-7.

183

=
—=—==>_
——

—————_
0) =
—

———

=——

=———

———(

——
=*=*"=""=™'
—_—_——

—————

=—=_=

=!
=

>=
—
—=——=__

mm, tt

‘Sse ae s *
na ar we hh
i ee a et eee Eo
atthe) nrptidintetn Pasrline tenets a Fy Oye Ae
ing JA s-o eonian aperaeate Put re ks OSPR
Myr Tye eyes
Santee

partie
ee alien
Beate Fa careonch ee ene
=

Caneasn” pigeeannee
ete
eee

eohiedee ene oe 4 - a . nenene oe - . heey Aa a
OW 9 es a = = poboueunpane - ree : - I or waeuearparan
2 A

ame
A ee

* l coandsiamineatenintuadme dentera armenia nannies
nek ey: WAN MA EESUA MOE SL eH veGRaLI: gre ont ae
en OP aed ity Hh He bean erento

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Contributions to Canadian biology"

See other formats